CODE: 00ZARF151/A1E
DIGITAL COPIER
AR-150AR-155
MODEL AR-F151
[ 1 ] GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
[ 2 ] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
[ 3 ] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
[ 4 ] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES . . . 4 - 1
[ 5 ] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
[ 6 ] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
[ 7 ] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
[ 8 ] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
[ 9 ] SIMULATION, FAX SOFTWARE SWITCH,
TROUBLE CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
[10] USER PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1
[12] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 1
CONTENTS
Parts marked with “ ” are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with specifiedones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
SHARP CORPORATIONThis document has been published to be usedfor after sales service only.The contents are subject to change without notice.
(AR-F151)
AR-F151
CAUTION
This product is a class 1 laser product that complies with 21CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 of the CDRH stand-ard and IEC825. This means that this machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation. The use ofcontrols, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in haz-ardous radiation exposure.
This laser radiation is not a danger to the skin, but when an exact focusing of the laser beam is achievedon the eye’s retina, there is the danger of spot damage to the retina.
The following cautions must be observed to avoid exposure of the laser beam to your eyes at the timeof servicing.
1) When a problem in the laser optical unit has occurred, the whole optical unit must be exchanged asa unit, not as individual parts.
2) Do not look into the machine with the main switch turned on after removing the developer unit, tonercartridge, and drum cartridge.
3) Do not look into the laser beam exposure slit of the laser optical unit with the connector connectedwhen removing and installing the optical system.
4) The middle frame contains the safety interlock switch.Do not defeat the safety interlock by inserting wedges or other items into the switch slot.
LASER WAVE – LENGTH : 780 ∼ 795Pulse times : 0.481 ms/6 mmOut put power : 0.20 ± 0.03 mW
CAUTIONINVISIBLE LASER RADIATION,
WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED.
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
VORSICHTUNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG,WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET UNDSICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG ÜBERBRÜCKT.NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
VARO !AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUSOHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINANÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE ÄLÄKATSO SÄTEESEEN.
ADVARSELUSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING VED ÅBNING, NÅRSIKKERHEDSBRYDERE ER UDE AFFUNKTION. UNDGÅ UDSAETTELSE FORSTRÅLNING.
VARNING !OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DELÄR ÖPPNAD OCH SPÄRREN ÄR URKOPPLAD.BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN. – STRÅLEN ÄR FARLIG.
AR-F151
At the production line, the output powerof the scanner unit is adjusted to 0.57MILLI-WATT PLUS 20 PCTS and ismaintained constant by the operation ofthe Automatic Power Control (APC).Even if the APC circuit fails in operationfor some reason, the maximum outputpower will only be 15 MILLI-WATT 0.1MICRO-SEC. Giving and accessibleemission level of 42 MICRO-WATTwhich is still-less than the limit ofCLASS-1 laser product.
The foregoing is applicable only to the 220Vmodel, 230V model and 240V model.
VAROITUS! LAITTEEN KÄYTTÄMINEN MUULLAKUIN TÄSSÄ KÄYTTÖOHJEESSA MAINITULLATAVALLA SAATTAA ALTISTAA KÄYTTÄJÄNTURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1 YLITTÄVÄLLENÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE.
VARNING - OM APPARATEN ANVÄNDS PÅ ANNATSÄTT ÄN I DENNA BRUKSANVISNINGSPECIFICERATS, KAN ANVÄNDAREN UTSÄTTASFÖR OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING, SOMÖVERSKRIDER GRÄNSEN FÖR LASERKLASS 1.
CautionThis product contains a low power laserdevice. To ensure continued safety do notremove any cover or attempt to gain accessto the inside of the product. Refer allservicing to qualified personnel.
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITEKLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
AR-F151
[1] GENERAL1. AR-150/155/F151 major functions
ItemCPM SB/MB 2 tray SPF R-SPF FAX
GDI withUSB
GDIwithoutUSB
SOPM DuplexModel
AR-150 15CPM MB Opt ∗1 Opt ∗1 Opt Opt
AR-155 15CPM MB Opt Opt
AR-F151 15CPM MB ∗2 Opt
Descriptions of itemsCPM: Copy speed (Copies Per Minute)SB/MB: SB = Manual feed single bypass, MB = Manual feed multi bypass 2 tray: Second cassette unit. The 1 tray unit (AR-DE9) is optionally available. SPF: Original feed unitR-SPF: Duplex original feed unitFAX: FAX function. The AR-FX3 (FAX-SPF and FAX board) is optionally available.)GDI with USB: GDI printer function with USB. The AR-PG1 (GDI + USB kit) is optionally available. GDI without USB: GDI printer function without USB. The said model has no option of it. SOPM: Scan One Print Many function (Many copies are made by one scan.)Duplex: Auto duplex copy function
Descriptions of table: Standard provision
: No function or no option available∗1: Incompatible between SPF and FAX function∗2: 1 tray option for Europe
2. System Configuration
(Options)
(AR-150) (AR-F151) (AR-155)
AR-SP3
AR-FX3
AR-DE9
AR-PG1
AR-F151
1 – 1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS1. Basic specifications of copierA. Basic specifications
Item Spec.
Type Desktop
Copy system Dry, electrostatic
Segment (class) Digital personal copier
External dimensions (W × D × H) (mm)AR-150: 518mm × 482.6mm × 292.6mmAR-155: 518mm × 482.6mm × 379mm
AR-F151: 518mm × 482.6mm × 465.3mm
WeightAR-150: Approx. 19Kg, (drum cartridges included)AR-155: Approx. 22Kg, (drum cartridges included)
AR-F151: Approx. 25Kg, (drum cartridges included)
B. Operation specification
Section Item Details Spec.
Paperfeedsection
Paper feedsystem
AR-150/AR-155: 1 tray (250 sheets) + multi bypass (50 sheets)AR-F151: 2 tray (250 sheets) + multi bypass (50 sheets)
(1 tray for Europe)
AB system
Tray paper feedsection
Paper size A4, B5, A5 (Landscape)
Paper weight 56 – 80g/m2
Paper feed capacity 250 sheets
Kinds Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper
Remark User adjustment of paper guide available
Multi bypass paperfeed section
Paper size A4, B5, A5, B6, A6 (Landscape)
Paper weight 52 – 128g/m2
Paper feed capacity 50 sheets
Kinds ∗1Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, OHP, Label,
Postal card
Remark User adjustment of paper guide available
Inch system
Tray paper feedsection
Paper size 8-1/2″ × 14″, 8-1/2 × 11″, 8-1/2″ × 5-1/2″ (Landscape)
Paper weight 15 – 21 lbs.
Paper feed capacity 250 sheets
Kinds Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper
Remark User adjustment of paper guide available
Multi bypass paperfeed section
Paper size8-1/2″ × 14″, 8-1/2 × 11″, 8-1/2″ × 5-1/2″, 3-1/2″ × 5-1/2″
(Landscape)
Paper weight 14 – 34.5 lbs.
Paper feed capacity 50 sheets
Kinds ∗1Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, OHP, Label,
Postal card
Remark User adjustment of paper guide available
Paper forDuplex(AR-155only)
AB system
Paper size A4, B5, A5 (Landscape)
Paper weight 56 – 80 g/m2
KindsStandard paper,Specified paper,Recycled paper
Inch system
Paper size 8-1/2″ × 14″, 8-1/2″ × 11″, 8-1/2″ × 5-1/2″ (Landscape)
Paper weight 15-21 lbs
KindsStandard paper,Specified paper,Recycled paper
∗1: OHP, Label, Postal card: each 1 pc.
AR-F151
2 – 1
Section Item Details Spec.
Paper exit sectionExit way Face down
Capacity of outputtray
100 sheets
Originals
Original set Center Registration (left edge)
Max. original size B4 (10″ × 14″)
Original kinds sheet
Original sizedetection
None
Opticalsection
Scanningsection
Scanning system CCD sensor scanning by lighting lamp scanner
CCD sensor Resolution 400 dpi
Lighting lamp
Type Xenon lamp
Voltage 1.5kV
Power consumption 11 ± 3W
Gradation 256 gradations/8bit
Writingsection
Writing system Writing to OPC drum by the semiconductor laser
Laser unit Resolution 600 dpi
Image forming
PhotoconductorType OPC (30φ)
Life 18k
Charger
Charging system Saw -tooth charging with a grid, / (–) scorotron discharge
Transfer system (+) DC corotron system
Separation system (–) DC corotron system
Developing Developing system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush development system
Cleaning Cleaning system Counter blade system (Counter to rotation)
Fusing section
Fusing system Heat roller system
Upper heat roller Type Teflon roller
Lower heat roller Type Silicon rubber roller
Heater lamp
Type Halogen lamp
Voltage 100V
Power consumption 800W
Electrical section
Power sourceVoltage Local AC voltage
Frequency Common use for 50 and 60Hz
Power consumption
Max. AR-150/AR-155: 1000W, AR-F151: 1000W
Average (during copying) *1) AR-150/AR-155: 310Wh/H, AR-F151: 310Wh/H
Average (stand-by) *1) AR-150/AR-155: 70Wh/H, AR-F151: 90Wh/H
Pre-heat mode *1) AR-150/AR-155: 40Wh/H, AR-F151: 51Wh/H
Auto power shut-off mode *1) AR-150/AR-155: 18Wh/H, AR-F151: 23Wh/H
*1) May fluctuate due to environmental conditions and the input voltage.
C. Copy performance
Section Item Details Spec.
Copy magnificationFixed magnification ratios
3R + 2E (AB system: 50, 70, 81, 100, 141, 200%)(Inch system: 50, 64, 78, 100, 129, 200%)
Zooming magnification ratios 50 ∼ 200% (151 steps in 1% increments)
Manual steps (manual,photo)
5 steps
AR-F151
2 – 2
Section Item Details Spec.
Copy speed First copy timeTray paper feed
9.6 sec. or below (A4), 9.4 sec. or below (8-1/2" ×14") (Pre-heat mode: 16 sec. or below / Auto power-
shut-off mode: 23 sec. or below)
Manual paper feed10.0 sec (Pre-heat mode: 16 sec. or below / Auto
power-shut-off mode: 23 sec. or below)
AB system: A4(Landscape)
Copy speed (CPM)
Same size 15
Enlargement 15
Reduction 15
B5 (Landscape) Copy speed (CPM)
Same size 15
Enlargement 15
Reduction 15
Inch system 8-1/2″× 14″ (Landscape)
Copy speed (CPM)
Same size 12
Enlargement 12
Reduction 12
8-1/2″ × 11″(Landscape)
Copy speed (CPM)
Same size 15
Enlargement 15
Reduction 15
Max. continuous copyquantity
99
Void
Void area
Leading edge 1 ∼ 4mm
Trailing edge4mm or less, 6mm or less
(Duplex copying/both images)
Side edge void area
4.0mm or less (per side), 4.5mm or less(Duplex copying/both images: per side)
machine with side edge void 0.5mm ∼ 4mm (Total ofboth edge voids)
Image lossOC mode Leading edge
Same size: 3.0mm or less / Enlarge (200%): 2.0mmor less / Reduction (50%): 6.0mm or less
SPF/R-SPF/Duplex
Leading edgeSame size: 4.0mm or less / Enlarge (200%): 3.0mm
or less / Reduction (50%): 8.0mm or less
Warm-up time 0 sec.
Power save mode reset time 0 sec.
Paper jam recovery time 0 sec.
2. Basic specifications of facsimile (AR-F151 only)Large Item Middle Item Small Item Sub Item Spec.
Communi-cation system
Transmissionmethod
Transmission time Approx. 6 sec. (G3 ECM/14,400bps)
Transmission Method V17, V29, V27TER, V33 (Only Receiving)
Compression method MH, MR, MMR
Modem speed 14,400bps → 2,400bps automatic fall back
Mutual transmission G3
Line usedPublic Switched Telephone Network (PSTN), PrivateBranch exchange (PBX),
Number of lines used 1 line (cannot be added)
ECM YES
Scanningsystem
Document size
Max. document width OC: B4 SPF: B4 (Multi)/ 257 × 500 (Single)
Unscannable regionLeading edge 1 to 4 mm, trailing edge: 4mm max., leftend + right end: either 4mm max.
Transmitted document sizeSPF: Max. 10.1" × 19.7"SPF: Min. 8.5" × 5.5"(Inch System)SPF: 210 × 148mm (AB system)
Document size designation B4, 8-1/2, A4, B5, A5, 5/2
Two-sided documentdesignation
NO
AR-F151
2 – 3
Large Item Middle Item Small Item Sub Item Spec.
Scanningsystem
Document size Long document 500 mm (Single Feed with hand hold)
Scanningsystem
Automaticdocumentdetection
SPF YES (Over or Under B4 size)
OC NO
Transmissionmode
SPF/OC transmissionchangeover
NO
Documentloading capacity,scanning cycle(SPFperformance)
Continuous, automatic feedcompatibility
NO
Document loading capacity SPF: 30 sheets
Document scanning cycle13 sheets/min. (Standard mode, A4R memorytransmission)
Imageprocessingsystem
Half tonereproduction
Half tone (photo mode)
Equivalent to 256 scalesFollowing functions are not possible in half-Tone modein B4 size. Timer sending Memory sending Broadcast To store the original for memory polling.
Resolution 8 dot /mm × 7.7 line / mm (Fixed)
Contrastadjustment
Contrast selection Manual in 3 stages (AE)
Resolutionselection
Standard 8 dot / mm × 3.85 line / mm
Fine 8 dot / mm × 7.7 line / mm
Super fine 8 dot / mm × 15.4 line / mm
Finest NO
Printer sectionresolution
600dpi
Print system
Printing sizeMax. printing width 215.9 mm
Print paper size detection YES (Only width): A4/Letter or small size
Printing size A4/Letter/Legal
Print paper
Cassette capacity 250 × 2 (1 tray option for Europe)
Print paper absencedetection
By failing paper pick up
Exit Paper Tray Full censor NO
Feed Paper cassette
Trans-missionfunctionsystem
Easy dialingfunction
Rapid key dialing 20 other parties
Speed dialing 100 other parties
Group dialing20 groups (including the other parties registered to rapidkey dialing)
Phonebook transmissionBy using the SEARCH key: Any other parties registeredto speed dialing and rapid key dialing can be searchedfor using the first letter.
Chain dialing YES
Redialing The last number dialed is saved
Program NO
Mode recall NO
Timedesignationfunction
Time specifiedtransmission/polling
Time of day specified for transmission or polling. Max.3
AR-F151
2 – 4
Large Item Middle Item Small Item Sub Item Spec.
Trans-missionfunctionsystem
Recall mode
Automatic recall modewhen other party is busy
Intervals 1 to 15 minutes
Count 1 to 14 times/0: no re-transmission
Recall mode whencommunication error occurs
Intervals 1 to 15 minutes
Count 1 to 14 times/0: no re-transmission
TransmittedPages
Beginning with the page where error occurred
Number of transmissionscounted in recall modesimultaneously
Max. 20 transmissions
Subsequent transmissionreservation override inrecall mode
YES
Memory Trans-mission/directtransmission
Memory transmission
MemoryTransmission
YES
Number oftransmissionReservationsthat can bemade
Max. 20
Processingwhen memory isfull
Transmission is cancelled when using Timer, Group orBroadcast function. Only scanned’ data is transmitted.
∗ The number of pages to be actually sent does notalways correspond to the one passing through theSPF in case of communication error.
∗ The transmission is cancelled when communicationerror occurs.
Setting changeAfterTransmissionSetting
NO
Direct transmission YES
Default setting By Memory All Clear
Line soundmonitoringfunction
Dialing confirmationmonitoring
YES (Service Man diagnostic.)
Broadcastfunction
Broadcast transmission
Number ofdestinations
50 destinations (Including the Group Dial)
Transmissionmethod
Broadcast key, group key
Usable numbers Rapid or Speed keys
Group dialingTransmitted to group registered to rapid keys or speeddial.
Boadcastfunction
Relay transmission
InstructingStation
NO
Relay station NO
Multiple relay NO
Number of relaygroups
NO
Number ofReceivingstations thatmay beSpecified perGroup
NO
Confidentialfunction
Confidential transmissionOther party’sStation
NO
Batchtransmissionfunction
Batch transmission NO
AR-F151
2 – 5
Large Item Middle Item Small Item Sub Item Spec.
Trans-missionfunctionsystem
Priority function
Transmission reservationinterrupt
NO
Broadcast interrupt NO
Recall mode interrupt NO
Multiplemessagetransmissionfunction
Multiple messagetransmission
NO
RotationalTransmission
Rotational transmission Paper size NO
Book documenttransmission
Book document transmission
Transmissionmethod
YES (From OC mode)
Consecutivepagetransmission(page splitting)
NO
OK stamp OK stamp NO
Remotetransmission(pollingtransmissionfunction)
Remote transmission(Memory Polling)
RemoteTransmission
YES (From Memory)
Protective function
Check by otherParty’s number
NO
Check byMatching ofSystem number(user’s ownmachine) andID number(other party’sMachine)(between Sharpmachines only)
NO
Receivingfunctionsystem
Receiving mode
Default settingAutomatic receiving (can be switched to A.M mode ormanual receiving in key operator program)
Automatic receiving
Number of calls
0 to 9 times (factory-set to twice: can be changed inkey operator program)
- The external telephone rings once if set the numberof calls for automatic receiving to 0 times.
Automaticphone/faxswitching
NO
Manual receivingManualreceiving setting
YES
Receiving mode
Manual receiving
Number ofSwitching callsto automaticReceiving inmanualreceiving mode
OFF/1 to 9 times
Telephone messagereceiver connection
AnsweringMachine mode
YES
Automaticallyswitch toautomatic receive
ON / OFF
Quiet detect time OFF/ 1 to 9 sec.
Receiving modetimer switching
NO
AR-F151
2 – 6
Large Item Middle Item Small Item Sub Item Spec.
Receivingfunctionsystem
Variable scalefactor receiving
Reduction
Reduction madewithin Regularsize
YES (ON/OFF in key operator program)
By receiveddata print sizeDesignation
YES
Enlargement NO
Memoryreceiving function
Substitute receiving intomemory
SubstituteReceiving intoMemory
Only when data cannot be output
Forced memoryreceiving
NO
Received dataoverride Output
NO
TransferTransfer at occurrence oftrouble
YES
Numberspecifiedreceiving
Receiving of only specifiednumber enabled
NO
Anti junk fax mode YES (ON/OFF) 10 group, 20 letters
Confidentialfunction
Confidential receiving
Sender NO
Mailbox NO
Mailbox name NO
Confidential IDcode
NO
Rotationalreceiving
NO
Split receivingSplit size YES
Split receiving settingYES (according to paper selection condition in keyoperator program)
Two-sideddocumentreceiving
NO
2-in-1 receiving NO
Transmissionrequest (pollingreceivingfunction)
Transmission request
TransmissionRequest
YES
Resolution attransmissionRequest
Depends on the Sending Machine.
Turnaroundtransmission
NO
Registrationsystem
Numberregistration
Speed dialing
Number of otherparties
100 other parties
Number of otherparty’s Numberdigits
20 digits
Registered name 20 letters (may be omitted)
Speed dialing
Searched letters Up to 1 letter
User tagClassification
NO
Internationalcommunicationmode setting
NO
Transmissionmethod
Speed dialing key + (00 to 99) + start key
AR-F151
2 – 7
Large Item Middle Item Small Item Sub Item Spec.
Registrationsystem
Numberregistration
Rapid key dialing
Number of otherparties
20 other parties
Number of otherparty’s Numberdigits
20 digits
Registered name 20 letters (may be omitted)
Searched letters Up to 1 letter
User tagClassification
NO
Internationalcommunicationmode setting
NO
Transmissionmethod
Rapid key dialing
Group dialing
Registration keys Rapid keys
Max. number ofregistered otherparties per group
50 other parties
RegistrableNumber
Numbers registered to speed dialing and rapid keydialing.
Registered name 20 letters (may be omitted)
Searched letters NO
User tagClassification
NO
Transmissionmethod
Group dialing
Program
Number ofprograms
NO
Registerable item NO
Registered name NO
Calling method NO
Setting changeAfter calling
NO
Batch
Registration key NO
Number of otherparties
NO
Registrationmethod
NO
SenderRegistration
Sender registrationSender’s name 24 letters, registered in key operator program
Sender’s number 20 digits, registered in key operator program
Transmissionrequest/remotetransmissionenable numberregistration
Transmission requestenable number
TransmissionRequest sourceNumberRegistration
NO
System numberSystem numberRegistration
NO
ID numberID numberRegistration
NO
Letter inputInput method Key input YES
Letters that may be input Characters Alphanumeric characters, symbols
Registered dataread-out, read-in
NO
Date & timeadjustment
Registered in key operator programSupport terms is from 1990 to 2089.
Date indicationchange
NO
BackupRegistered data backup atpower failure
SRAM used, built-in battery-backed
AR-F151
2 – 8
Large Item Middle Item Small Item Sub Item Spec.
TelephoneFunctionSystem
Handset NO
On-hook YES
Hold NO
Pause YES (2 second fixed)
Phonetransmission atpower failure
NO
Ringer volume Adjusted in key operator program
Speaker volume Adjusted by pressing arrow keys on the fax control panel
Tone pulseswitching
Switched between 10 pps and TONE in key operatorprogram (North America)
Externaltelephoneconnection
YES
Remote receiving switching YES (switching number in 1 digit +**) 0 to 9
Automatictelephone/faxswitching
NO
Audio response NO
Response voice recording NO
Fax Memory
Memory capacityStandard 2MB (Approx. 120 pages/A4)
Option NO
Memory Back up
YesJob memory back up: Approx. 1 hour (after min. 6minuts charge)Configuration Memory back up to 5 years.
MemoryContents(transmissionreservation)confirmation
LCD indication NO
Print out YES
Memory remainindication
YES (Memory available percent display 3 digits in % onLCD
Additionalinformationprintingfunction fortransmission
Page counter NO
Date printingYES (Year: month: day/ year in 4 digits)LCD: 2 digits / Print: 4 digits
Date indication change NO
Cover function Cover item
Other party’sname
YES
Other party’snumber
YES
Sender’s name YES
Sender’s number YES
Transmissionmessage
YES
Transmissionmessage
Regular messageNO MESSAGE/URGENT/IMPORTANT/CONFIDENTIAL/PLS.DISTRIBUTE/PLS.CALL BACK
User message NO
Sender printingfunction
Sender’s number 20 digits
Sender’s name 24 letters
Additionalprintingfunction forreceiving
Index printing YES
AR-F151
2 – 9
Large Item Middle Item Small Item Sub Item Spec.
Record tablesystem
Communicationrecord function
Communication record tablesize
A4, LETTER, Legal (not output if size setting is not A4,LETTER, legal or larger)
Communication recordmemory capacity
50 communications for transmission/receiving respectively
Communication record table
Number ofcommunications
50 communications for transmission/receiving respectively
Time-specifiedoutput
YES 5 kinds, Every day, Each 2 day, Each 4 day, Oncea week, OFFThe print time is fixed at 00:00.
When recordingMemory is full
NO
Printingsequence
LAST IN LAST OUT
Department-by-departmentoutput
NO
Time-specifiedcommunication table
Common to transmission record table
Confidential receivingconfirmation table
NO
Communicationresult reportfunction
Communication result table(transmission)
YES (ALWAYS PRINT, ERROR/ TIMER, SEND ONLY,NEVER PRINT, ERROR ONLY)
Broadcast transmissionreport
NO
Communication result table(receiving)
YES
Document image printingwhen memory transmissionis not yet made
NO
Other report/list
Rapid key dialing list YES (output as telephone number list)
Speed dialing list YES (output as telephone number list)
Group dialing list YES
Transmission activity list YES
ID/sender list NO
Batch transmissionconfirmation list
NO
Confidential ID list NO
Option setting list YES
Telephone list YES
Timer list YES
Anti junk fax number list YES
Receptions activity List YES
Memory image erasure list NO
Others
Other partyconfirmationfunction
Other party confirmationdisplay
NO
CSI function CSI YES
Departmentmanagement
Department-by-departmentuser restriction
NO
Number of set departments NO
Department-by-departmentcharge management function
NO
Operation paneldisplay
LCD 20 letters by 2 lines
AR-F151
2 – 10
Large Item Middle Item Small Item Sub Item Spec.
Others
Auto startupmode
NO
Distinctive Ring(Only NorthAmerica andAustralia)
YES
Powerconsumption
Energy star compatibility YES
AutomaticSummer Set(Only Europe)
YES
PBX setting(Only Europe)
YES
AR-F151
2 – 11
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS1. Supply system tableA. USA, CANADA
NO Name Content Life Product name Package Remark
1Developer cartridge (Black)<With IC>
Toner/developer cartridge (Toner 238g, Developer 190g)
× 1 6.5K AR-150TD(∗1 AR-150TD-J)
5 Life setting by A4 6%document
Polyethene Bag × 1
2 Drum cartridge Drum cartridge × 1 18K AR-150DR(∗1 AR-150DR-J)
5
Polyethene Bag × 1
3 Toner/developer kit (Black)<With IC>
Toner bottle (Toner 228g) × 10 65K AR-150MI(∗1 AR-150MI-J)
1 Life setting by A4 6%documentFilling Hose × 1
IC chip × 10
Toner cap × 10
Developer bottle(Developer 190g)
× 10
DV blade × 10
4 Waste toner box Waste toner box × 10 AR-150TB 1
5 Protective cover MG cover × 10 AR-150MG 1
6 Drum kitDrumDrum fixing plate
× 10× 10
180K AR-150MR(∗1 AR-150MR-J)
1
7 Blade kitBlade × 10 AR-150CB
1Brush sheet (F/R) Each × 10
8 Toner kit Toner bottle (Toner 228g) × 10 65K AR-150MT(∗1 AR-150MT-J)
1 Life setting by A4 6%documentFilling Hose × 1
Toner cap × 10
∗1: For USA governmentNote: The recommendable number of times of refill for either of the developer cartridge and the drum cartridge is 5 times.
B. Europe / East Europe / Australia / Newzealand / Latin America (SEC)
NO Name Content Life Product name Package Remark
1Developer cartridge (Black)<With IC>
Toner/developer cartridge (Toner 238g, Developer 190g)
× 1 6.5K AR-150DC 5 Life setting by A4 6%document
Polyethene Bag × 1
2 Drum cartridge Drum cartridge × 1 18K AR-150DM 5
Polyethene Bag × 1
3 Toner/developer kit (Black)<With IC>
Toner bottle (Toner 228g) × 10 65K AR-150LI 1 Life setting by A4 6%documentFilling Hose × 1
IC chip × 10
Toner cap × 10
Developer bottle(Developer 190g)
× 10
DV blade × 10
4 Waste toner box Waste toner box × 10 AR-150TB 1
5 Protective cover MG cover × 10 AR-150MG 1
6 Drum kitDrumDrum fixing plate
× 10× 10
180K AR-150LR 1
7 Blade kitBlade × 10
AR-150CB 1Brush sheet (F/R) Each × 10
8 Toner kit Toner bottle (Toner 228g) × 10 65K AR-150LT 1 Life setting by A4 6%documentFilling Hose × 1
Toner cap × 10
Note: The recommendable number of times of refill for either of the developer cartridge and the drum cartridge is 5 times.
AR-F151
3 – 1
C. Middle East (Except Saudi Arabia) / Africa / CIS / Latin America (Agent)
NO Name Content Life Product name Package Remark
1Developer cartridge (Black)<With IC>
Toner/developer cartridge (Toner 238g, Developer 190g)
× 1 6.5K AR-150DC 5 Life setting by A4 6%document
Polyethene Bag × 1
2 Drum cartridge Drum cartridge × 1 18K AR-150DM 5
Polyethene Bag × 1
3 Toner/developer kit (Black)<With IC>
Toner bottle (Toner 228g) × 10 65K AR-150LI 1 Life setting by A4 6%documentFilling Hose × 1
IC chip × 10
Toner cap × 10
Developer bottle(Developer 190g)
× 10
DV blade × 10
4 Waste toner box Waste toner box × 10 AR-150TB 1
5 Protective cover MG cover × 10 AR-150MG 1
6 Drum kitDrumDrum fixing plate
× 10× 10
180K AR-150LR 1
7 Blade kitBlade × 10 AR-150CB
1Brush sheet (F/R) Each × 10
8 Toner kit Toner bottle (Toner 228g) × 10 65K AR-150LT 1 Life setting by A4 6%documentFilling Hose × 1
Toner cap × 10
Note: The recommendable number of times of refill for either of the developer cartridge and the drum cartridge is 5 times.
D. Hong Kong / China
NO Name Content Life Product name Package Remark
1Developer cartridge (Black)<With IC>
Toner/developer cartridge (Toner 238g, Developer 190g)
× 1 6.5K AR-150TD 5 Life setting by A4 6%document
Polyethene Bag × 1
2 Drum cartridge Drum cartridge × 1 18K AR-150DR 5
Polyethene Bag × 1
3 Toner/developer kit (Black)<With IC>
Toner bottle (Toner 228g) × 10 65K AR-150CI 1 Life setting by A4 6%documentFilling Hose × 1
IC chip × 10
Toner cap × 10
Developer bottle(Developer 190g)
× 10
DV blade × 10
4 Waste toner box Waste toner box × 10 AR-150TB 1
5 Protective cover MG cover × 10 AR-150MG 1
6 Drum kitDrumDrum fixing plate
× 10× 10
180K AR-150MR 1
7 Blade kitBlade × 10 AR-150CB
1Brush sheet (F/R) Each × 10
8 Toner kit Toner bottle (Toner 228g) × 10 65K AR-150CT 1 Life setting by A4 6%documentFilling Hose × 1
Toner cap × 10
Note: The recommendable number of times of refill for either of the developer cartridge and the drum cartridge is 5 times.
AR-F151
3 – 2
E. Asia (Subsidiary)
NO Name Content Life Product name Package Remark
1Developer cartridge (Black)<With IC>
Toner/developer cartridge (Toner 238g, Developer 190g)
× 1 6.5K AR-150TD 5 Life setting by A4 6%document
Polyethene Bag × 1
2 Drum cartridge Drum cartridge × 1 18K AR-150DR 5
Polyethene Bag × 1
3 Toner/developer kit (Black)<With IC>
Toner bottle (Toner 228g) × 10 65K AR-150CI 1 Life setting by A4 6%documentFilling Hose × 1
IC chip × 10
Toner cap × 10
Developer bottle(Developer 190g)
× 10
DV blade × 10
4 Waste toner box Waste toner box × 10 AR-150TB 1
5 Protective cover MG cover × 10 AR-150MG 1
6 Drum kitDrumDrum fixing plate
× 10× 10
180K AR-150MR 1
7 Blade kitBlade × 10 AR-150CB
1Brush sheet (F/R) Each × 10
8 Toner kit Toner bottle (Toner 228g) × 10 65K AR-150CT 1 Life setting by A4 6%documentFilling Hose × 1
Toner cap × 10
Note: The recommendable number of times of refill for either of the developer cartridge and the drum cartridge is 5 times.
F. Asia (Agent) – Except Taiwan
NO Name Content Life Product name Package Remark
1Developer cartridge (Black)<With IC>
Toner/developer cartridge (Toner 238g, Developer 190g)
× 1 6.5K AR-150TD 5 Life setting by A4 6%document
Polyethene Bag × 1
2 Drum cartridge Drum cartridge × 1 18K AR-150DR 5
Polyethene Bag × 1
3 Toner/developer kit (Black)<With IC>
Toner bottle (Toner 228g) × 10 65K AR-150CI 1 Life setting by A4 6%documentFilling Hose × 1
IC chip × 10
Toner cap × 10
Developer bottle(Developer 190g)
× 10
DV blade × 10
4 Waste toner box Waste toner box × 10 AR-150TB 1
5 Protective cover MG cover × 10 AR-150MG 1
6 Drum kitDrumDrum fixing plate
× 10× 10
180K AR-150MR 1
7 Blade kitBlade × 10 AR-150CB
1Brush sheet (F/R) Each × 10
8 Toner kit Toner bottle (Toner 228g) × 10 65K AR-150CT 1 Life setting by A4 6%documentFilling Hose × 1
Toner cap × 10
Note: The recommendable number of times of refill for either of the developer cartridge and the drum cartridge is 5 times.
AR-F151
3 – 3
G. Saudi Arabia
NO Name Content Life Product name Package Remark
1Developer cartridge (Black)<With IC>
Toner/developer cartridge (Toner 238g, Developer 190g)
× 1 6.5K AR-150DC 5 Life setting by A4 6%document
Polyethene Bag × 1
2 Drum cartridge Drum cartridge × 1 18K AR-150DM 5
Polyethene Bag × 1
3 Toner/developer kit (Black)<With IC>
Toner bottle (Toner 228g) × 10 65K AR-150LI 1 Life setting by A4 6%documentFilling Hose × 1
IC chip × 10
Toner cap × 10
Developer bottle(Developer 190g)
× 10
DV blade × 10
4 Waste toner box Waste toner box × 10 AR-150TB 1
5 Protective cover MG cover × 10 AR-150MG 1
6 Drum kitDrumDrum fixing plate
× 10× 10
180K AR-150LR 1
7 Blade kitBlade × 10 AR-150CB
1Brush sheet (F/R) Each × 10
8 Toner kit Toner bottle (Toner 228g) × 10 65K AR-150LT 1 Life setting by A4 6%documentFilling Hose × 1
Toner cap × 10
Note: The recommendable number of times of refill for either of the developer cartridge and the drum cartridge is 5 times.
H. Taiwan
NO Name Content Life Product name Package Remark
1Developer cartridge (Black)<With IC>
Toner/developer cartridge (Toner 238g, Developer 190g)
× 1 6.5K AR-150TD 5 Life setting by A4 6%document
Polyethene Bag × 1
2 Drum cartridge Drum cartridge × 1 18K AR-150DR 5
Polyethene Bag × 1
3 Toner/developer kit (Black)<With IC>
Toner bottle (Toner 228g) × 10 65K AR-150CI 1 Life setting by A4 6%documentFilling Hose × 1
IC chip × 10
Toner cap × 10
Developer bottle(Developer 190g)
× 10
DV blade × 10
4 Waste toner box Waste toner box × 10 AR-150TB 1
5 Protective cover MG cover × 10 AR-150MG 1
6 Drum kitDrumDrum fixing plate
× 10× 10
180K AR-150MR 1
7 Blade kitBlade × 10 AR-150CB
1Brush sheet (F/R) Each × 10
8 Toner kit Toner bottle (Toner 228g) × 10 65K AR-150CT 1 Life setting by A4 6%documentFilling Hose × 1
Toner cap × 10
Note: The recommendable number of times of refill for either of the developer cartridge and the drum cartridge is 5 times.
AR-F151
3 – 4
2. EnvironmentalThe environmental conditions for assuring the copy quality and themachine operations are as follows:
(1) Normal operating condition Temperature:20˚C~25 Humidity:65 ± 5%RH
(2) Acceptable operating condition
(3) Optical condition
(4) Supply storage condition
3. Production control number(lot No.)identification
⟨Developing cartridge⟩
∗:Destination
Division No.
EX DestinationA same pack G
B same pack H
Option DestinationA P
B Q
⟨Drum cartridge⟩The label on the drum cartridge shows the date of production.(SOCC production)
⟨JAPAN production⟩
Division No.
Ex production 1
Option 2
Same pack 3
Humidity (RH)
85%
60%
20%
10˚C 30˚C 35˚C
Humidity (RH)
90%
60%
15%
–25˚C 30˚C 40˚C
Humidity (RH)
90%
20%
–5˚C 45˚C
Production month
Production day
Destination code
(Dealer, distributor, OEM, etc.)
Production place
(SOCC: Fixed to B.)
End digit of year
Version No.
Production month
Production day
Destination code
(Dealer, distributor, OEM, etc.)
Production place
(SOCC: Fixed to B.)
End digit of year
Version No.
X000119Ver.A 1
Production month
(1 - 9 = Jan. - Sep. 0 = Oct. X = Nov. Y = Dec.)
Serial number of month
Fixed to 1.
Pack division
(See table below)
End digit of year
Version No.
AR-F151
3 – 5
∗1 The production control label is not attached to the cartridge of aChina product.
4. Consumable parts refill procedure[External view check points]Check for breakage of the four pins (*) and the ATC sensor connectorof the DV BOX unit.
Check for breakage of molt and suede.(For reattachment, refer to the reattachment procedure.)
A. TD cartridge1) Remove the waste toner box unit
2) Remove the DVF cover unit.• When removing, be careful not to break the two pins.
3) Remove the THBOX unit.
Production controllabel attachment position
*Pins *Pins
ATC sensorconnector
DV molt F DV molt DV molt R
Side sheet F Side sheet R
Production controllabel attachment position(*1)
AR-F151
3 – 6
4) Remove the DV blade.• Remove excessive glue.• Remove together with the base PET.
5) Tilt the DV box unit and rotate the DV18T clockwise to removedeveloper.
6) Clean the DV box unit by sucking or blowing with a vacuum cleanerto remove developer from the MG roller and toner from the DV boxunit. Check that there is no toner or no foreign material attached tothe connector and the gear.
7) Shake the developer bottle 10 times up and down, and remove thebottle cap and supply developer into the DV box unit.• Slowly slant the bottle to supply developer evenly.• Check the label to insure that developer is suitable for the model.
8) Install the THBOX unit. • Insert two bosses of TH box on the drive side into the positioning
hole of the DV box and fix together.9) Remove the toner cap, look into the toner supply port and stop the
THD Mylar at the position shown in the figure below. (Rotate theTHK gear on the rear side of the TH box counterclockwise to rotatethe TM shaft.)
10) Shake the toner box 20 times up and down, and remove the bottlecap and install the refill hose. Check the label to insure that toneris suitable for the model.
11) Face the toner supply port of the TH box unit upward, and pressand insert the refill hose into the toner supply port with the tonerbottle kept straight up.
• Hold the left side of the TH box with your hand.• Press and insert the refill hose completely.
12) Lift the toner bottle and shake it left and right and supply toneruntil the bottle and the filling hose are empty.
• It takes about one minute to fill toner completely in TH BOX UNfrom lifting the toner bottle to emptying the bottle and the hose.
• If toner remains in the hose, when removing the hose from THBOX UN, the remaining toner may disperse. Use great care forthat.
13) Check that there is no toner remaining in the bottle and removethe hose, and slowly pull and remove the hose.(If there is any toner remaining in the bottle or the hose, performtoner supply again.)Bend the refill hose and remove it from the TH box unit withoutdispersing toner. Attach the toner cap.
• Attach the toner cap with the toner supply port of the TH box unitfaced upward.
AR-F151
3 – 7
14) Clean the DV box unit with alcohol and attach the DV blade.• After drying the unit, attach the DV blade.• After attachment, check that there is no scratch and waves on
the DV blade.• After attachment, be careful not to damage the DV blade.• Check that there is no foreign material in the DV blade and the
section.
15) Install the DVF cover to the DV-TH box unit.16) Clean the waste toner box unit and install it to the DV box unit.
(Check that there is no toner in the waste toner box)Be careful of the pawl.
17) Replace the IC connector.Check that there is no oil on the IC connector pins. (Do not touchwith fingers.)
Put a white mark on the above position.At that time, put marking for checking of the number of refilling.18) Check the operations of the DV lever and the toner box shutter.19) Shake the DV box unit 5 times horizontally. Rotate the DV18T
clockwise and check developer state on the MG roller. (Visuallycheck that developer state is normal and there is no foreignmaterial.)
20) Install the MG cover.Put the unit straight with the MG roller on the upper side. Rotatethe DV18T several times forward and reverse to store developeron the MG roller into the inside. Check that there is no developeron the MG roller surface, and install the MG cover.
Note: When attaching the MG cover, be careful not to wind aroundthe DV blade.
Note for MG cover installation• When installing, check that there is no breakage and peel-off of
the MG cover sheet and the MG cover molt attached to the MGcover.
• Check that there is no winding into the DV blade, deformationand scratches of DV molt F and R.
0.5
0
0.5 0
AR-F151
3 – 8
Remove the side sheets on the both sides of DV box unit.Clean the DV box unit with alcohol and reattach the side sheets F and R to the both sides.
00 .50
0.5
00
.5
0 0 .5
.Remove glue completely before reattaching.
.After drying alcohol, attach the side sheet F,R.
DV box unit F side DV box unit R side
Remove the DV molt F,R and DV molt and clean with alcohol. After attaching the DV molt F and R, attach the DV molt with theDV molt R edge as the reference.
.Do not allow clearance between DV molt and DV molt F. (Pull and attach them. Overlap may be allowed.)
.Remove glue completely before reattaching.
.After drying alcohol, attach the DV side sheet.
When attaching the DV molt F, projection in the arrow direction is not allowed.
When attaching the DV molt R, projection in the arrow direction is not allowed.
[The reattachment procedure]
00.5
0
0.5
0
0.5
00.5
0 0.5
0
0.5
0 1
0 0.5
0
0.5
DV molt F attachment reference (DV box edge)
DV molt attachment reference (DV box edge)
DV molt attachment reference (DV box edge)
DV molt attachment reference (DV box edge)
DV molt Rattachment reference (DV box edge)
AR-F151
3 – 9
B. Drum unit1) Check the external view.
• Check for damage or cracks on the boss and the boss hole. • Check to insure that the waste toner pipe shutter slides smooth-
ly.• Check to insure that the star ring and the CRU washer rotate
smoothly.
2) Remove the drum cover. (4 Lock Tabs)
3) Remove the drum fixing plate and the photoconductor drum.(Note) Dispose the drum fixing plate which was removed.
4) Check the cleaning blade and the red felt for no damage. • If there is any damage, execute all procedures from item 5) and
later. • If there is no damage, execute the procedure of item 12).
5) Remove the main charger. (Cleaning the screen grid and the sawteeth.)
6) Remove the cleaning blade. Note: Dispose the cleaning blade which was removed.
(2)
(3)
LO CK
AR-F151
3 – 10
7) Clean the cleaning section and the waste toner pipe to removewaste toner completely with a vacuum cleaner.
8) Remove the felt and duplex tape completely. Note: Be careful not to scratch or bend the sub blade.
9) Attach the cleaning blade.Securely insert the plate section of the cleaning blade into thedove and fix it with a screw.Do not touch the cleaning blade rubber with your hand.When attaching the cleaning blade, press the cleaning blade in thearrow direction and attach.
10) Attach the felt.
Attach the mocket with slightly pressing section A of the cleaning blade.Do not touch the tip of the cleaning blade.Do not put the mocket under the cleaning blade.Do not put the mocket on the sub blade.Do not press the sub blade with the mocket.11) Attach the main charger.
Securely set the MC holder on the projection of the process frame.Securely insert two projections of the MC holder into the groovein the process frame.When attaching the MC holder ass’y, be careful not to make con-tact with the cleaning blade.
12) Attach the drum fixing plate and the photoconductor drum.Apply grease to the inside of the photoconductor drum. (Dia. 2)
Attach the drum from (b). (Prevention against the sub blade edgebreakage)Attach the drum so that its position with the sub blade is as shown.
13) Attach the detection gear.Note:• The detection gear is not installed to the drum cartridge packed
with the main body. Add a new one.
14) Attach the drum cover.Note: After attaching the drum cover, do not make a copy.
When attaching the drum cover, engage the detection gear20T rib with the 30T gear rib, and attach the drum cover tothe process frame.
15) Mark the number of times of recycling on the side of the cover withwhite paint. Max. times of recycling: 5 times
Note: Another method of cleaning the drum counter is avail-able with SIM 24-07.
AR-F151
3 – 11
[4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES
1. Appearance
1 Operation panel 2 Original table 3 SPF exit area ∗1
4 Original guides ∗1 5 Document feeder tray ∗1 6 FAX operation panel ∗1
7 Original cover 8 Side cover 9 Bypass tray
10 Bypass tray guides 11 Side cover open button 12 Front cover
13 Paper tray 14 R-SPF exit area ∗2 15 Middle tray ∗2
16 Original guides ∗2 17 Document feeder tray ∗2 18 Feeding roller cover ∗2
19 Handle 20 Cover for optional printer interface ∗ 21 Paper output tray
22 Paper output tray extension 23 Power switch 24 Power cord socket
∗ A GDI expansion kit is optional. ∗1 AR-F151 only ∗2 AR-155 only
2. Internal
1 TD cartridge lock release button 2 TD cartridge 3 Drum cartridge
4 Drum cartridge handle 5 Fusing unit release lever 6 Charger cleaner
7 Transfer charger
7
1
2
3
4
5 6
3 4
6
5
2
1
13
12
7
8
10
9
11
AR-F151 only
24
23
19
20
21
22
19
14 15 16
17
18
AR-155 only
AR-F151
4 – 1
3. Operation panel
1
Exposure mode selector key and indicatorsUse to sequentially select the exposure modes: AUTO,MANUAL or PHOTO. Selected mode is shown by a litindicator.
2
Light and dark keys and exposure indicatorsUse to adjust the MANUAL or PHOTO exposure level.Selected exposure level is shown by a lit indicator.Use to start and terminate user program setting.
3
Alarm indicators :Drum replacement required indicator :Misfeed indicator :TD cartridge replacement required indicator :Maintenance indicator
4SPF indicator(AR-155, AR-F151 only)
5SPF misfeed indicator(AR-155, AR-F151 only)
6
Copy ratio selector key and copy ratio indicatorsUse to sequentially select preset reduction/enlargementcopy ratios.Selected copy ratio is shown by a lit indicator.
7 Zoom indicator 8 Copy ratio display (%) key
9DisplayDisplays the specified copy quantity, zoom copy ratio,user program code, and error code.
10
ON LINE indicator / ON LINE KEYLights up when the machine is used as a printer.To use as a printer, an optional printer expansion kit isneeded.(AR-150, AR-155 only)
11Power save indicatorLights up when the copier is in a power save mode.
12Tray select keyUse to select a paper feed station (paper tray orbypass tray).
13Paper feed location indicatorsLight up to show the selected paper feed station.
14Zoom keysUse to select any reduction or enlargement copy ratiofrom 50% to 200% in 1% increments.
15Copy quantity keys• Use to select the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).• Use to make user program entries.
16
Clear key• Press to clear the display, or press during a copy run
to terminate copying.• Press and hold down during standby to display the
total number of copies made to date.
17Print key and ready indicator• Copying is possible when the indicator is on.• Use to set a user program.
18Duplex Mode select key and indicator(AR-155 only)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
17161514131218
AR-F151
4 – 2
4. A Look at the Operation Panel (AR-F151 only)
1
Left arrow key ( ) and right arrow key ( )Press these keys to scroll through a menu. Duringinput mode, these keys are also sometimes used tomove the cursor.
2FUNCTION keyPress this key to enter function mode.
3Liquid crystal displayShows various messages during fax operation andprogramming.
4BOOK SEND keyPress this key to fax a document from the original table.
5RESOLUTION keyPress this key to adjust the resolution before sendingfaxes.
6CONTRAST keyPress this key to adjust the contrast before sendingfaxes.
7
Rapid keysPress one of these keys to dial a fax or telephonenumber automatically.Press Rapid key 20 to start polling. (Note that youmust attach the Rapid key labels.)
8Number keysPress these keys to dial numbers, and enter numbersand letters during number/name storing procedures.
9
∗ / #Press these keys to enter symbols during the namestoring procedure.Press the “∗” key to change from pulse dialing to tonedialing mode.
10
STOP keyPress this key to stop an operation before it iscompleted, or to delete the number that was last input.This key is also used to close the line when manuallydialing.
11FAX START keyPress this key to begin sending a fax or manuallyreceiving a fax.
12SPEAKER keyPress this key to begin manual dialing. (To close theline, press the SPEAKER key again.)
13
REDIAL/PAUSE keyPress this key to automatically redial the last numberyou dialed. Also, press this key to insert a pause whenentering numbers.
14
SPEED/SEARCH keyPress this key to dial a two digit Speed Dial number.During character inputting, use this key to delete anincorrect entry.Also, press this key twice to search for an automaticdialing number.
15DOCUMENT keyPress this key to perform a direct send fax transmission.
16BROADCAST keyPress this key to send documents to a group ofreceiving fax machines.
17RECEPTION MODE keyPress this key to select the mode of reception.
18A.M. lightThis light indicates the answering machine will answerthe line if properly connected.
19MANUAL lightThis light indicates that the machine must be answeredmanually.
20AUTO lightThis light indicates that the machine will answer themachine automatically.
21ENTER keyPress this key to decide an item in a menu, or to enternumbers and letters you have typed in.
22LCD contrast dialTurn this dial to adjust the contrast level of the LCD.
01 02 03 04 05
06 07 08 09 10
11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20/POLL
AUTOMANUALA.M.
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
ABC
JKL
TUV
GHI
PQRS
SPEAKER
BOOK SEND
DOCUMENT
FAX STARTSTOP
REDIAL/PAUSE
SPEED/SEARCH
ENTER
RESOLUTION CONTRAST BROADCASTRECEPTION
MODE
FUNCTION
12
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
21
AR-F151
4 – 3
5. Motors and solenoids
No. Part name Control signal Function operation
1 Toner motor TM Supplies toner.
2 Mirror motor MRMT Drives the optical mirror base (scanner unit).
3 SPF motor SPMT Drives the single pass feeder
4 Original feed solenoid SPUS Original feed solenoid
5 Cooling fan motor VFM Cools the optical section.
6 Main motor MM Drives the copier.
7 Resist roller solenoid RRS Resist roller rotation control solenoid
8 Multi paper feed solenoid MPFS Multi manual pages feed solenoid
9 Paper feed solenoid CPFS1 Cassette paper feed solenoid 1
10 Paper feed solenoid CPFS2 Cassette paper feed solenoid 2
11 Duplex Motor DMT Drivers the duplex paper transport section
111
23
54
6
7
8
910
AR-F151
4 – 4
6. Sensors and switches
No. Name Signal Type Function Output
1Mirror home positionsensor
MHPS Transmission sensorMirror (scanner unit) homeposition detection
“H” at home position
2 SDOD sensor SDOD Transmission sensorSPF open/close detectionBook sensor
“L” at paper pass
3 POD sensor POD Transmission sensor Paper exit detection “H” at paper pass
4 SPF sensorSPID/SDSW
Transmission sensorPaper entry detectionCover open/close detection
“L” at paper pass
5 SPPD sensor SPPD Transmission sensor Paper transport detection “L” at paper pass
6 PPD2 sensor PPD2 Transmission sensor Paper transport detection 2 “L” at paper pass
7 Cassette detection switch CED1 MicroswitchCassette installationdetection
“H” at cassette insertion
8 Cassette detection switch CED2 MicroswitchCassette installationdetection
9 Paper size detection switch PSW1 MicroswitchDetects A4/Letter orsmaller sizes
1 or 0V of 5V at dooropen
10Paper size detectionswtich 2
PSW2 MicroswitchDetects A4/Letter orsmaller sizes
11 PPD1 sensor PPD1 Transmission sensor Paper transport detection 1 “L” at paper pass
12 PPD3 sensor PPD3 Transmission sensor Paper transport detection 3 “L” at paper pass
13 Door switch DSW Micro switchDoor open/close detection(safety switch for 5V)
1 or 0V of 5V at dooropen
14 Door switch DSW Micro switchDoor open/close detection(safety switch for 24V)
1 or 0V of 24V at dooropen
15 Drum reset switch DRST Micro switch New drum detection switchInstantaneously “H” atinsertion of new drum
12
3 4
5
67
8
91011121314
15
AR-F151
4 – 5
7. PWB unit
No. Name Function
1 Exposure lamp invertor PWB Exposure lamp (Xenon lamp) control
2 GDI/USB PWB For GDI/USB interface
3 Main PWB (MCU) Copier control
4 FAX control PWB For FAX control
5 Memory PWB 6MB For memorying data
6 FAX operation PWB Operation input/LCD display
7 LSU PWB For laser control
8 LSU motor PWB For polygon motor drive
9 TCS PWB For toner sensor control
10 Operation PWB Operation input/display
11 CCD sensor PWB For image scanning
12 Power PWB AC power input, DC voltage control, High voltage control
1
23
4 5
6
7
8
910
12
11
AR-F151
4 – 6
8. Cross sectional view
No. Part name Function and operation
1 Paper exit roller Roller for paper exit
2 Lens unit Scans the original image with the lens and the CCD.
3 LSU (Laser unit) Converts the original image signal into laser beams and writes onto the drum.
4 Main charger Provides negative charges evenly to the drum surface.
5 Paper exit roller Discharges documents.
6 Pickup roller Picks up documents.
7 Separation roller Separates documents to feed properly.
8 PS roller Feeds documents to the scanning section.
9 Scanner unit Illuminates the original with the copy lamp and passes the reflected light to the lens unit (CCD).
10 Exposure lamp Exposure lamp (Xenon lamp) Illuminates original
11 Heat roller Fuses toner on the paper. (Teflon roller)
12 Pressure roller Fuses toner on the paper. (Silicon rubber roller)
13 Drum Forms images.
14 Transfer unit Transfers images onto the drum.
15 Pickup roller Picks up the manual feed paper. (In multi feed only)
16Manual paper feedtray
Tray for manual feed paper
17Manual paper feedroller
Transport the paper from the manual paper feed port.
18 PS roller unit Takes synchronization between the lead edge and the rear edge of the paper.
19 Paper feed roller Picks up a sheet of paper from the cassette.
1 2
3 45 6 7
8
9
101112131415
17
16
(AR-F151)1819
AR-F151
4 – 7
[5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION
1. COPIER INSTALLATIONImproper installation may damage the copier. Please note thefollowing during initial installation and whenever the copier ismoved.
Caution: If the copier is moved from a cool place to a warmplace, condensation may form inside the copier.Operation in this condition will cause poor copyquality and malfunctions. Leave the copier at roomtemperature for at least 2 hours before use.
Do not install your copier in areas that are: damp, humid, or very dusty
exposed to direct sunlight
poorly ventilated
subject to extreme temperature or humidity changes, e.g.,near an air conditioner or heater.
The copier should be installed near an accessible power outletfor easy connection.
Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet thatmeets the specified voltage and current requirements.Also make certain the outlet is properly grounded.
Be sure to allow the required space around the machine forservicing and proper ventilation.
2. CAUTIONS ON HANDLINGBe careful in handling the copier as follows to maintain the per-formance of this copier.
Do not drop the copier, subject it to shock or strike it againstany object.
Do not expose the drum cartridge to direct sunlight.Doing so will damage the surface (green portion) of the drumcartridge, causing poor print quality.
Store spare supplies such as drum cartridges and TDcartridges in a dark place without removing from the packagebefore use.
If they are exposed to direct sunlight, poor print quality mayresult.
Do not touch the surface (green portion) of the drum cartridge.
Doing so will damage the surface of the cartridge, causing poorprint quality.
8"(20cm)8"(20cm)
4"(10cm)
4"(10cm)
AR-F151
5 – 1
3. CHECKING PACKED COMPONENTS ANDACCESSORIES
Open the carton and check if the following components and ac-cessories are included.
4. UNPACKINGBe sure to hold the handles on both sides of the copier to un-pack the copier and carry it to the installation location.
5. REMOVING PROTECTIVE PACKINGMATERIALS
1) Remove pieces of tape and protective cover. Then open theoriginal cover and remove protective materials (a) and (b).
2) Use a coin (or suitable object) to remove the screw.Store the screw in the paper tray because it will be used ifthe copier has to be moved.
6. INSTALLING THE TD CARTRIDGEThe TD cartridge replacement required ( ) indicator will lightup when toner is needed. If copying is continued while the indicator is lit, copies will gradually become lighter until thecopier stops and the indicator begins blinking. Replace the oldTD cartridge by following the procedure given below.
Note: After the copier stops, it may be possible to make a few
more copies by taking the TD cartridge out of the copier,shaking it horizontally, then reinstalling it. If copying isnot possible after this operation, replace the TDcartridge.
During long copy run of a dark original, the ready ( )indicator may blink, the indicator light up, and thecopier stop, even though toner is left. The copier will feedtoner up to 2 minutes and then the ready ( ) indicatorwill light up. Press the print ( ) key to restart copying.
1) Ensure that the bypass tray is open and then open the sidecover while pressing the side cover open button.
2) Remove the CAUTION tape from the front cover andremove the two protective pins from the fusing unit by pull-ing the strings upward one at a time.
3) Push gently on both sides of the front cover to open thecover.
4) Remove the TD cartridge from the bag. Remove the protec-tive paper. Hold the cartridge on both sides and shake ithorizontally four or five times.
Copier
Power cord
Line cordFAX modelonly
TD cartridge
Drum cartridge (installed in copier)
4 or 5 times
AR-F151
5 – 2
5) Hold the tab of the protective cover and pull the tab toremove the cover.
6) Gently insert the TD cartridge until it locks in place.
7) Close the front cover and then the side cover by pressingthe round projections near the side cover open button. The indicator will go out and the ready ( ) indicator willlight up.
Note: When closing the covers, be sure to close the frontcover securely and then close the side cover. If thecovers are closed in the wrong order, the covers may bedamaged.
7. LOADING COPY PAPERNote: This copier is equipped with two paper trays. Load copy
paper into the two paper trays.
1) Raise the handle of the paper tray and pull the paper trayout until it stops.
2) Remove the pressure plate lock. Rotate the pressure platelock in the direction of the arrow to remove it while pressingdown the pressure plate of the paper tray.
3) Store the pressure plate lock which has been removed instep 2 and the screw which has been removed when un-packing (see page 4-2, step 2 of REMOVING PROTEC-TIVE PACKING MATERIALS) in the front of the paper tray.To store the pressure plate lock, rotate the lock to fix it onthe relevant location.
4) Adjust the paper guides on the paper tray to the copy paperwidth and length.Squeeze the lever of paper guide (A) and slide the guide tomatch with the width of the paper.Move paper guide (B) to the appropriate slot as marked onthe tray.
5) Fan the copy paper and insert it into the tray. Make sure theedges go under the corner hooks.
Note: Do not load paper above the maximum height line ( ).Exceeding the line will cause a paper misfeed.
6) Gently push the paper tray back into the copier.Note: After loading copy paper, to cancel the blinking “P”
without restarting copying, press the clear ( ) key.The “P” in the display will go out and the ready ( ) in-dicator will light up.
Paper guide (B) Paper guide (A)
AR-F151
5 – 3
8. Connecting the Telephone Line CordPlug one end of the telephone line cord into the jack on the unitmarked “LINE” .Plug the other side into a standard (RJ11C)single-line telephone wall jack. Be sure not to plug this line cordinto the “TEL” jack. The “TEL” jack is used to attach an exten-sion telephone or answering machine to the unit. (See “Con-necting Other Devices” in this chapter for details.)
Note: If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning orpower surges, we recommend that you install surgeprotectors for the power and telephone lines. Surgeprotectors can be purchased from your dealer or at mosttelephone specialty stores.
9. Connecting Other DevicesIf desired, an answering machine or external telephone can beconnected to the unit through the telephone jack, labeled “TEL”,on the rear of the unit.
Connecting an answering machine to the unit allows you toreceive both voice and fax messages when you are out. Touse this feature, first change the outgoing message of youranswering machine, and then set the reception mode of theunit to “A.M”. (Answering Machine mode) when you go out.
Note: If you are using distinctive ringing with an answeringmachine, you do not need to follow the proceduredescribed below. (Please note that when distinctive ring-ing is used, the answering machine must be connectedto a separate wall jack, not to your fax.)
The outgoing message of your answering machine should bechanged to inform callers who want to send a fax to press theirFAX START key.
Comments:1) It is advisable to keep the length of the message under 10
seconds. If it is too long, you may have difficulty receivingfaxes sent by automatic dialing.
2) Your callers can even leave a voice message and send afax message on the same call. Modify your outgoing mes-sage to explain that this can be done by pressing their FAXSTART key after leaving their voice message.
You can connect an extension phone to the unit to make andreceive calls like any other extension phone on your line.Even if you pick up the extension phone and hear a fax tone,the unit will automatically cut in and take over the line. Note,however, that if you also have a PC modem on the sameline, you must turn on the Remote Reception function, anddeactivate the Fax Signal Receive function. See “Setting Upthe Unit for Use with a PC Modem” and “Using the RemoteReception Function” in Chapter 2).
Note: The Remote Reception function is initially set to “ON”.
10. POWER TO COPIER1) Ensure that the power switch of the copier is in the OFF
position. Insert the attached power cord into the power cordsocket at the rear of the copier.
2) Plug the other end of the power cord into the nearest outlet.
LINE
TEL
AR-F151
5 – 4
[6] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS1. Outline of operationThe outline of operation is described referring to the basic configuration.
(Basic configuration)
(Outline of copy operation)
Setting conditions1) Set copy conditions such as the copy quantity and the copy density with the operation section, and press the COPY button. The information
on copy conditions is sent to the MCU.
Image scanning2) When the COPY button is pressed, the scanner section starts scanning of images.
The light from the copy lamp is reflected by the document and passed through the lens to the CCD.
Photo signal/Electric signal conversion3) The image is converted into electrical signals by the CCD circuit and passed to the MCU.
Image process4) The document image signal sent from the CCD circuit is processed under the revised conditions and sent to the LSU (laser unit) as print data.
Electric signal/Photo signal (laser beam) conversion5) The LSU emits laser beams according to the print data.
(Electrical signals are converted into photo signals.)6) The laser beams are radiated through the polygon mirror and various lenses to the OPC drum.
Printing7) Electrostatic latent images are formed on the OPC drum according to the laser beams, and the latent images are developed to be visible im-
ages (toner images).8) Meanwhile the paper is fed to the image transfer section in synchronization with the image lead edge.9) After the transfer of toner images onto the paper, the toner images are fused to the paper by the fusing section. The copied paper is discharged
onto the exit tray.
Operationsection
Scanner sectionCCD
MCU (Main control/image process section)
Laser beamPaper exit
Fusing section
Paper transport section
Manual paperfeed section
Cassette paperfeed section
Printer section
LSU (Laser unit)Laser diode, Polygon mirror lens
Process section
AR-F151
6 – 1
2. Scanner section
A. How to scan documentsThe scanner has sensors that are arranged in a line. These sensors scan acertain area of a document at a time and deliver outputs sequentially. Whenthe line is finished, the next line is scanned, and this procedure is repeated.The figure below shows the case where the latter two sections of an imagewhich are scanned are shown with solid lines and the former two sectionswhich are being transmitted are shown with dotted lines.The direction of this line is called “main scanning direction,” and the scanningdirection “sub scanning direction.”In the figure above, one line is divided into 4 sections. Actually, however, oneline is divided into thousands of sections. For scanning, the light receiving ele-ment called CCD is used.The basic resolution indicates the scanner capacity. The basic resolution is ex-pressed in dpi (dot/inch) which shows the number of light emitting elements perinch on the document.The basic resolution of this machine is 400dpi.In the sub scanning direction, at the same time, the motor that drives the op-tical system is controlled to scan the image at the basic resolution.
B. Basic structure of scanner section
1 Copy lamp (Xenon lamp) 2 Reflector (light conversion plate) 3 No. 1 mirror
4 No. 2 mirror 5 No. 3 mirror 6 Lens
7 No. 2/3 mirror unit 8 Copy lamp unit 9 CCD
10 Mirror motor 11 MHPS (Mirror home position sensor)
The scanner unit performs scanning in the digital optical system.The light from the light source (Xenon lamp) is reflected by a document and passed through three mirrors and reduction lenses to the CCD element(image sensor) where images are formed. This system is known as the reduction image sensor system. Photo energy on the CCD element is con-verted into electrical signals (analog signals). (Photo-electric conversion). The output signals (analog signals) are converted into digital signals (A/Dconversion) and passed to the MCU (main control/image process section). The resolution at that time is 400dpi.The mirror unit in the scanner section is driven by the mirror motor.The MHPS is provided to detect the home position of the copy lamp unit.
(6)(5)
(4)
(3)
(2)(1)
(10)
(11)
(9)
(8)
(7)
1
2
3
4
5
5 4 3 2 1
Sub scanning direction
Sensor scanning area
Main scanning direction
Original
Image data sent to the ICU PWB
To MCU PWB
3. Laser unitThe image data sent from the MCU (image process circuit) is sent tothe LSU (laser unit), where it is converted into laser beams.
A. Basic structureThe LSU unit is the writing section of the digital optical system.The semiconductor laser is used as the light source, and images areformed on the OPC drum by the polygon mirror and fθ lens, etc.The laser beams are passed through the collimator lens, the cylindricallens, the polygon mirror, the fθ lens, and the mirror to form images onthe OPC drum in the main scanning direction. The laser emitting PWBis provided with the APC (auto power control) in order to eliminate fluc-tuations in the laser power. The BF PWB works for measurement of thelaser writing start point.
(1)(2)(3)
(4)
(5)
: Laser beampath for BF PWB
AR-F151
6 – 2
No. Component Function
(1) Semiconductor laser Generates laser beams.
(2) Collimator lensConverges laser beams inparallel.
(3)Polygon mirror,polygon motor
Reflects laser beams at aconstant rpm.
(4)BD (Mirror, lens,PWB)
Detects start timing of laserscanning.
(5) fθ lens
Converges laser beams at aspot on the drum.
Makes the laser scanningspeeds at both ends of thedrum same as each other.(Refer to the figure below.)
Makes the laser scanning speeds at both ends of the drum same aseach other.
B. Laser beam path
C. Composition
Effective scanning width: 216mm (max.)
Resolution: 600dpi
Beam diameter: 75um in the main scanningdirection, 80um in the sub scanningdirection
Image surface power:0.20 ±0.03mW (Laser wavelength780 – 795nm)
Polygon motor section:Brushless motor 20.787rpmNo. of mirror surfaces: 6 surfaces
4. Fuser section
A. General descriptionGeneral block diagram (cross section)
Top view
(1) Heat rollerA pressure roller is used for the heat roller and a silicone rubber rolleris used for the lower heat roller for better toner fusing performance andpaper separation.
(2) Separator pawlThree separator pawls are used on the upper heat roller. The separatorpawls are teflon coated to reduce friction with the roller and prevent asmear on the paper caused by the separator pawl.
a ≠ b ≠ ca b c
d = e = fd e f
fθ LENS
Heat rollerThermistor
Thermal fuse
Heater lamp
Separator pawl
Separator pawl
PPD2
Thermal fuse
Thermistor
Heat roller
Paper guide
Pressure roller
AR-F151
6 – 3
(3) Thermal control1. The heater lamp, thermistor, main PWB, DC power supply PWB,
and triac within the power supply unit are used to control thetemperature in the fuser unit.To prevent against abnormally high temperature in the fuser unit, athermal breaker and thermal fuse are used for safety purposes.
2. The surface temperature of the upper heat roller is set to 165˚C ∼190˚C. The surface temperature during the power save mode is setto 100˚C.
3. The self-check function comes active when one of the followingmalfunctions occurs, and an "H" is displayed on the multicopy win-dow.
a. When the heat roller surface temperature rises above 240˚C.b. When the heat roller surface temperature drops below 100˚C
during the copy cycle.c. Open thermistord. Open thermal fusee. When the heat roller temperature does not reach 190˚C within
27 second after supplying the power.
(4) Fusing resistorFusing resistorThis model is provided with a fusing resistor in the fusing section to im-prove transfer efficiency.General descriptions are made in the following.
General descriptionsSince the upper heat roller is conductive when copy paper is highlymoistured and the distance between the transfer unit and the fusingunit is short, the transfer current leaks through the copy paper, theupper heat roller and the discharging brush.
Saftey device(Thermal breaker, thermalfuse)
Triac (in thepower supply unit)
Level of the thermistor iscontrolled by the main PWB.
With th e signal from themain PWB, the triac iscontrolled on and o ff.(power supply PWB )
Heated by the heaterlamp.(950W)
The surface temperatureof the upper heat roller issensed by the thermistor.
5. Paper feed section and paper transport sectionA. Paper transport path and general operations
(1) Scanner unit (6) Main charger (11) Pickup roller
(2) Copy lamp (7) Heat roller (12) Manual paper feed tray
(3) Lens unit (8) Pressure roller (13) Manual paper feed roller
(4) LSU (Laser unit) (9) Drum (14) PS roller unit
(5) Paper exit roller (10) Transfer unit (15) Paper feed roller
Paper feed is made in two ways; the tray paper feed and the manual paper feed. The tray is of universal-type, and has the capacity of 250 sheets.The front loading system allow you to install or remove the tray from the front cabinet.The general descriptions on the tray paper feed and the manual paper feed are given below.
(2) (4)(1) (3)(5) (6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)(11)
(13) (12)(14)(15)
AR-F151
6 – 4
(1) Cassette paper feed operation1) The figure below shows the positions of the pick-up roller, the paper
feed clutch sleeve, and the paper feed latch in the initial statewithout pressing the COPY button after lighting the ready lamp.The paper feed latch is in contact with the projection of the clutchsleeve.
2) When the COPY button is pressed, the main drive motor startsrotating to drive each drive gear.The pick-up drive gear also is driven at that time. Since, however,the paper feed latch is in contact with the projection of the clutchsleeve, rotation of the drive gear is not transmitted to the pick-uproller, which does not rotate therefore.
3) After about 0.1 sec from when the main motor start rotating, thetray paper feed solenoid (PFS) turns on at a moment.This disengages the paper feed latch from the projection of theclutch sleeve, transmitting rotation of the pick-up drive gear to thepaper feed roller shaft, rotating the pick-up roller to feed the paper.
4) After more than half rotation of the pick-up roller, the paper feedlatch is brought in contact with the projection of the clutch sleeve,stopping rotation of the pick-up roller.
5) At this time, the paper is fed passed the paper entry detectionswitch (PPD1), and detected by it. After about 0.15 sec from detec-tion of paper by PPD1, the tray paper feed solenoid (PFS) turns onso that the clutch sleeve projection comes into contact with thepaper feed latch to stop the pick-up roller. Then the pick-up rollerrotates for about 0.15 sec so that the lead edge of the paper isevenly pressed on the resist roller, preventing against skew feed-ing.
6) To release the resist roller, the tray paper feed solenoid and theresist solenoid are turned on by the paper start signal to disengagethe resist start latch from the clutch sleeve projection, transmittingrotation of the resist drive gear to the resist roller shaft. Thus thepaper is transported by the resist roller.
7) After the resist roller starts rotating, the paper is passed through thepre-transfer guide to the transfer section. Images are transferred onthe paper, which is separated from the OPC drum by the drumcurve and the separation section.
8) The paper separated from the drum is passed through the fusingpaper guide, the heat roller (fusing section), POD (paper out detec-tor) to the copy tray.
OFF
PFS
OFF
RRS
OFF
PFS
OFF
RRS
ON
PFS
OFF
RRS
OFF
PFS
ON
RRS
AR-F151
6 – 5
(2) Manual multi paper feed operation1) Before paper feed operation, the manual paper feed solenoid
(MPFS) is turned OFF as shown in the figure below.
2) When the PRINT button is pressed, the manual paper feedsolenoid (MPFS) turns on to disengage the manual paper feed latchA from the manual paper feed clutch sleeve A, rotating the manualpaper feed roller and the manual take-up roller. At the same time,the manual paper feed stopper opens and the manual take-up rolleris pressed to the surface of the paper to start paper feeding.
3) When pawl C of the manual paper feed clutch sleeve is hung on themanual feed latch, the manual feed stopper falls and the manualtake-up roller rises. At that time, the manual paper feed roller isrotating.
4) The lead edge of the transported paper is pressed on the resistroller by the transport roller. Then the paper is stopped temporarilyto make synchronization with the lead edge of the image on theOPC drum.The operations hereinafter are the same as the paper feed opera-tions from the tray. (Refer to A-5 ∼ 8.)
5) The solenoid turns off to close the gate and return to the initialstate.
(3) Conditions of occurrence of paper misfeeda. When the power is turned on:
PPD or POD is ON when the power is turned on.b. Copy operation
a. PPD1 jam 1) PPD1 does not turn off within 4 secafter turning on the resist roller.
b. PPD2 jam 1) PPD2 is off immediately after turning onthe resist roller.
2) PPD2 does not turn off within 1.2 secafter turning off the resist roller.
OFMPFS
F
C A
ON
MPFS
A
C
ON
MPFS
A
C
OF
MPFS
F
A
C
AR-F151
6 – 6
c. POD jam 1) POD does not turn on within 2.9 secafter turning on the resist roller.
2) POD does not turn off within 1.5 sec ∼2.7 sec after turning off PPD2.
6. Process unit new drum detection mechanism1) When the power is turned on, the detection gear 38T is rotated in
the arrow direction by the detection gear 20T to push the micros-witch (process detection switch) installed to the machine sensorcover, making a judgement as a new drum.
2) When the detection gear 38T turns one rotation, there is no gearany more and it stops.The latch section of the 38T gear is latched and fixed with theprojection of the process cover.
Gear 20T
Process detection switch
Gear 38T
Gear notch
Gear pawl
Projection
Gear notch
Gear pawl
Projection
7. FAX-SPF section (AR-F151 only)A. OutlineThe SPF (Single Path Feeder) is installed to the AR-F151 as a standard provision, and it automatically copies up to 30 sheets of documents of asame size. (Only one set of copies)
B. Document transport path and basic composition
(1) Pickup roller (2) Sheet of document for paper feed (3) Set detection ACT
(4) Paper stopper (5) Document feed roller (6) Separation sheet
(7) Paper entry sensor (8) PS roller D (9) Transport follower roller
(10) Paper exit roller (11) Paper exit follower roller (12) Document tray
AR-F151
6 – 7
C. Operational descriptions
D. Cases where a document jam is causeda. When SPPD is ON (document remaining) when the power is turned on.b. When SPPD is not turned ON within about 1.5 sec (at 100% copy) after starting the document feed operation.c. When SPPD is not turned on within about 4.7 sec (at 100% copy) after turning on SPPD.d. When the SPF document jam release door or the OC cover is opened during document transport (SPF motor rotating).
SPID ON
PSW ON
MIRM rotation
MM rotation
CPFS ON
SPFM rotation
SPUS ON
Document set
Document set sensor
Document feed unit lamp ON
PPD ON
RRC ON SPPD ON
POD ON
Copy start
The scanner is shiftedto the exposure position.
(Copier side)
Main motor rotation
Paper feed
Synchronization
(Transfer)
(Fusing) (Document exit)
Paper transport
(Exposure)
In the zooming mode, the magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction (paper transport direction) is adjustedby changing the document transport speed.
(Paper exit)
SPF motor rotation
Document feed
Document transport sensor
Document transport
(SPF side)
Time chart (Tray feed)
AR-F151
6 – 8
Gate OFF
Lower Side of Gate
Gate ON
Gate ON
Upper Side of Gate
Gate ON
Gate OFF
8. D-D (Duplex to Duplex) modepaper/document transport (AR-155 only)
A. Initial stateSet duplex documents on the document tray.Set paper on the cassette. (In the duplex mode, the manual feed traycannot be selected.)
B. Front copyDocument transport: The document feed roller feeds the document
from the paper feed roller to the PS roller.→ The document is exposed in the exposure
section, and sent to the document exit sectionby the transport/paper exit roller.
→ R-SPF gate solenoid ON→ The document is sent to the intermediate tray
(but not discharged completely.)→ The document is stopped once, then
switchback operation is performed. (To theback copy)
Paper transport: The document is passed through the paper feedroller and the PS roller by the paper feed rollerand the images on the front surface are trans-ferred.→ The paper is passed through the fusing sec-
tion and the lower side of the gate section tothe paper exit tray side, (but not dischargedcompletely.)
→ It is stopped once and switchback operationis performed. (To the back copy)
C. Back copyDocument transport: By switchback operation, the document is sent
through the PS roller to the exposure section,where the back of the document is exposed.→ It is sent to the document exit section by the
transport roller and the paper exit roller.→ R-SPF gate solenoid ON. The document is
sent to the intermediate tray, (but not dis-charged completely.)
→ It is stopped once and switchback operationis performed.
→ It is sent through the PS roller and the ex-posure section (without exposure operation)to the document exit section.
→ R-SPF gate solenoid OFF→ The document is discharged to the document
exit tray.Paper transport: Switchback operation is performed.
→ The paper is sent through the upper side ofthe gate section and the duplex transport sec-tion, and the PS roller, and the images on theback are transferred.
→ It is sent through the fusing section and dis-charged to the paper exit tray.
Switchback operation is made after back copying in order to dischargedocuments according to the setting.Set document Documents after discharge,
1with empty feed
4without empty feed
32 3 43 2 14 1 2
There are following job modes as well as D-D mode.
S - S (Simplex to Simplex)S - D (Simplex to Duplex), Rotation copy mode (The back images are
rotated 180˚.)S - D (Simplex to Duplex), Copy mode without rotationD - S (Duplex to Simplex)
Rotation copy mode:The front and the back are in upside down each other.Copy mode without rotation:The front and the back are not in upside down.
AR-F151
6 – 9
9. FAX-OPERATION FLOWCHART (AR-F151 only)
TD
ER DR
DL
WT
TD1
TD
Line out routine
CML signal OFF
Beep alam END beep
CML signal OFF
Send DCN
Communicatinon error flag ON
Send DCN
WT
FLOW-VE1
Start
RX
Cl signal received?
CML ON
Button pressed? Auto dial
AU
CML ON
OFF HOOK? OFF HOOK?
CML ON
Documents exist?
START key pressed?
RX TX
No No
No
No
No No
YesYes
Yes
Yes
YesYes
AR-F151
6 – 10
TX
TX3
TX1
Tum on TEL LED
Command received?
DIS or DTC
Polling mode?
Set mode
ER
RX1
Insert document
Send DCS
Make 75msec delay
Send traning
Send TCF
Response received?
DIS?
DTC?
FTT?
CFR?
Document on?
Send traning?
Send image information
Send RTC
75msec delay
TX2
ER
T1 elapsed?
TD
TD
TX6
TD1
TD
TX1
3 retrys?
3 retrys?
Fall back possible?
TD1
Tx3
3 times?
Send EOM
Response received?
PIN or PIP
MCF
RTP
RTN
TX6
TD1
TX2
3 times?
TD
RTN
RTP
MCF
PIN or PIP
Response received?
Send MPS
Mode change?
Last document
Send EOP
Response received? 3 times?
TD1
TD
DL
TX7RTN
RTP
MCF
PIN or PIP
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES NO
YESNO
YES
NO
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
YESNO
NONO
YESYES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NONO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YESNO
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
FLOW-VE-2
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
NO
YES
AR-F151
6 – 11
FLOW-VE-3
RX
2sec delay
Send CED
75ms delay
Polling mode
Send (NSF) DIS
RX1
ER
T1 elapsed?
TD
TX1
Send (NSC) DTC?
TX2
Send DCN
CML OFF
Beep
STOP
EOMRX1
DTC
DIS
DCS
Enough Memory?
Set mode on this side
Receive training TCF
TCF good?
Send CFR
Set T2
Set communication error flag
ER TL2
RX3
Send RTN Send RTP
Line good?
Image quality good?
Send MCF
RX2
ER
EOM
EOP
MPS
PR1-Q
Command received?
T2 elapsed?
Message carrier received?
Send FTTRX2
Message in received?
RTC received?
Receive message
Memory Full?
NO
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
3 sec msx. NO
YES
YES
NO
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NOResponse received?
Send (NSF) (CSI)-DIS 2times
Answer procedure
YES
AR-F151
6 – 12
1 T4 elapsed?NO
NO
FLOW-VE-4
Response received?
Flag?
Flag received?
FCS error?
CRP?
RCN
Option response?
Retum "YES"Retum "NO"
1ER
NONO
3sec elapsed? Signal end?
200ms elapsed?NO
1
Signal end?
200ms elapsed?
1TD
3sec elapsed?NONO
NO
DR
2
NO
NO
NO
YES
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
Process againstoption response
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
YES
Retum "NO"
Retum "YES"
3sec elapsed?
200ms elapsed?
Signal end?
Flag?
3sec elapsed?Signal end?
ER
DR
YES
YES
DCN
FCS error?
Option response?
Process againstoption response
CRP?
200ms elapsed?
Response CRP
Reset T2
Frame received?
YES
YES
NO
NONO
NOYES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
Command received?
NO
NONONO
NO
NO
AR-F151
6 – 13
Auto dial sending
Enter
Relay ON
Dial Tone?
OVER 3sec?
Recall
Pulse or tone
Signal send byMODEM
RegistrationTEL end
Pulse send byrelay
Pause 2sec
Send CNG
Busy or ReorderTone?
Recall
Preambles
CED?
45sec
Recall Phase B
NO
NOYES
NO
Tone Pulse
YES
YES
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
AR-F151
6 – 14
[7] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLYBefore disassembly, be sure to disconnect the power cord for safety.The disassembly and assembly procedures are described for the fol-lowing sections:1. High voltage section2. Operation panel section3. Optical section4. Fusing section5. Tray paper feed/transport section6. Manual paper feed section7. Rear frame section8. Power section9. SPF section10. 2nd cassette section11. DUP motor section12. Reverse roller section13. RSPF section14. FAX MCU PWB section15. FAX-SPF section
1. High voltage sectionA. List
No. Part name Ref.
1 Transfer charger unit
2 Charger wire
B. Disassembly procedure(1) Press the side cover open/close button and open the side cover.
(2) Push up the lock pawls (2 positions) of the side cover, and removethe transfer charger.
C. Assembly procedureFor assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
D. Charger wire cleaning(1) Remove the charger cleaner from the manual paper feed unit.
2)
1)
1)Transfercharger
Lock pawl rear
Lock pawl front
1)
2)
1)
AR-F151
7 – 1
(2) Set the charger cleaner to the transfer unit, and move it reciprocal-ly a few times in the arrow direction shown in the figure below.
E. Charger wire replacement(1) Remove the TC cover and remove the screw.(2) Remove the spring and remove the charger wire.(3) Install a new charger wire by reversing the procedures (1) and (2).
At that time, be careful of the following items. The rest of the charger wire must be within 1.5mm. The spring hook section (charger wire winding section) must be
in the range of the projection section. Be careful not to twist the charger wire.
2. Operation panel sectionA. List
No. Part name Ref.
1 Operation panel unit
2 Operation PWB
B. Disassembly procedure(1) Remove the screws (4 pcs.), the harness, and the operation panel
unit.
(2) Remove the screws (3 pcs.) and the PWB holder.(3) Remove the screws (3 pcs.) and the operation PWB.
1)
2)
3)4)
1mm
1.5mm
1)
1)
2)
3)
Charger wire
Protrusion
1)
2)
3)
1)
1)
4)
3)
1)
2)
3)
3)
Note that there are 13 pawls
AR-F151
7 – 2
C. Assembly procedureFor assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure
3. Optical sectionA. List
NO. Part name Ref.
1 Copy lamp unit
2 Copy lamp
3 Lens unit
B. Disassembly procedure(1) Remove the parts as shown below.
(2) Remove the screws (2pcs.), and remove the copy lamp unit fromthe mirror base drive wire.
(3) Pull the copy lamp unit toward you to remove the harness.
(4) Remove the screw (4 pc) and remove the cover.
2)1)
9)
1)
3)4)
6)
8)
10)
7)
5)
Hook
1)
2)3)
1)
2)
2)
3)
3)
4)
4)
1)
2)
3)
AR-F151
7 – 3
(5) Remove the screws (2 pcs.), the harness, and the optical unit.
When installing the lens unit, refer to “8-6. Lens unit installation refer-ence.”
C. Assembly procedureBasically reverse the disassembly procedure.The mirror base drive wire and the lens drive wire stretching methodsare described below.a. Mirror base drive wire stretching
1. Hook the metal fixture of the mirror base drive wire on theprojection of the optical base plate.
2. Pass the wire through the external groove of the double pulley.(At that time, check that No. 2/3 mirror unit is in contact with themirror base positioning plate.)
3. Hold so that the winding pulley groove is up, and wind the mirrorbase drive wire 9 turns.
4. Put the 8th turn of the mirror base drive wire in the winding pul-ley groove and fix with a screw.
5. Pass the wire under Mo. 2/3 mirror unit plate and wind it aroundpulley A.
6. Pass the wire through the internal groove of the double pulley,and pass through pulley B.
7. Hook the spring hook on the optical base plate.
After installing the mirror base drive wire, be sure to perform mainscanning direction image distortion adjustment.
4. Fusing sectionA. List
No. Part name Ref.
1 Thermistor
2 PPD2 sensor
3 Heater lamp
4 Pressure roller
5 Heat roller
B. Disassembly procedure(1) Remove the connectors (3 pcs.) of the rear cabinet.(2) Open the side cover, remove two screws, and remove the fusing
unit.
(3) Cut the binding band, remove the screw, and remove the thermis-tor.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6
3
2
7
3
6
7
5 1
1
2
4
6
2
5
66
6
2
Wind closely
Wind closely
6
3
2
7
3
6
7
5 1
1
2
4
6
2
5
66
6
2
Wind closely
Wind closely
1)
2)
3)Thermistor
1)
2)3)
2)
AR-F151
7 – 4
(4) Remove the screw and remove the U-turn guide.
Pressure roller section disassembly(5) Remove the three screws, remove the fusing cover lower on the
right side, and open the heat roller section.
(6) Remove the screw and remove the PPD2 sensor.
(7) Remove the plate spring on the right and remove the heater lamp.
(8) Remove the spring and remove the separation pawls (3 pcs.).
(9) Remove the E-ring and remove the reverse gate.
1)
2)
1)
5)
5)
6)
6)
4)3)
2)
1)
2)PPD2 sensor
1)
2)
Hearter lamp
3)
1)
2)
2)
1)
3)
AR-F151
7 – 5
(10) Remove the pressure release levers on the right and the leftsides.
(11) Remove the pressure roller, the pressure bearing, and the spring.Note: Apply grease to the sections specified with .
Heat roller disassembly
(Continued from procedure (4).)(5) Remove screws, remove the fusing cover, and open the heat roller
section.
(6) Remove the C-ring and the fusing bearing, and remove the heatroller.
(7) Remove the parts from the heat roller.Note: Apply grease to the sections specified with .
(8) Remove two screws and remove the thermo unit.
C. Assembly procedureFor assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
1)
1)
1)
2)
2)
1)
3)
3)
Pressure roller
1)
2)
2)
3)
3)
1)2) 3) Heat roller
1)
2)3)
1)
2)
3)
AR-F151
7 – 6
5. Tray paper feed/transport sectionA. List
No. Part name Ref.
1 PPD1 sensor PWB
2 LSU unit
3 Intermediate frame unit
4 Paper feed roller
B. Disassembly procedure(1) Remove six connectors and screws of the main PWB, and lift the
optical unit and the main PWB to remove.
(2) Remove the PWB insulation mylar and remove the paper transportdetection sensor (PPD2).
(3) Remove two screws and remove the toner motor.
(4) Remove two springs and open the intermediate frame unit.
2)
3)
2)
2)
2)
1)
1)
1)
3)
2)
1)
2)
1)
2)
AR-F151
7 – 7
(5) Remove the pulleys on the both sides and remove the paper exitroller.
(6) Pull out the paper exit roller knob and remove the belt.
(7) Release the belt pulley (a) lock and remove the belt pulley bearing.
(8) Remove the paper exit roller.
4)
2)
1)3)
1)
2)
2)3)
1)
AR-F151
7 – 8
(9) Remove the harness guide.
(10) Remove five screws and remove the main drive plate and thebelt.
(11) Remove the parts as shown below, and remove the pressurerelease solenoid and the paper feed solenoid.
(12) Remove six screws and remove the LSU unit.1)
3)
2)
1)
CAUTION:Attachthe gearssecurely
3)
3)
1)
1)
2)
2)
4)
4)
1)
1)
2)
AR-F151
7 – 9
(13) Remove two screws and remove the fusing connector.(14) Remove five screws and the connector, and lift the intermediate
frame unit to remove.
(15) Remove the screw and the E-ring, and remove the PS semi-cir-cular earth plate and the PS roller unit.
(16) Remove the E-ring and remove the spring clutch from the PSroller unit.
(17) Remove three screws and remove the TC front paper guide.
(18) Remove the screw and the connector, and remove the PPD1sensor PWB.2)
2)
3)
4)
1)
5)
4)
4)
1)
2)
3)
PS roller unit
PS semi-circulerearth plate
5)
4)
4)
1)
2)
3)
PS roller unit
PS semi-circulerearth plate
1)
2)
1)
2)
AR-F151
7 – 10
(19) Remove two E-rings and remove the paper feed roller.(20) Remove three E-rings and remove the clutch unit.
C. Assembly procedureFor assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
6. Manual paper feed sectionA. List
No. Part name Ref.
1 Manual transport roller
2 Cassette detection switch
3 PPD1 sensor PWB
4 Side door detection unit
B. Disassembly procedure
Single unit(1) Remove the screw and remove the single upper cover.
4)
5)
1)
2)
3)
4)
Back
Front
Clutch unit
Paper feedroller
1)
2)
AR-F151
7 – 11
(2) Remove the screw and remove the side door detection unit.
(3) Remove three screws and remove the single manual feed upperframe.
(4) Remove the PPD1 sensor PWB.
(5) Remove the E-ring and remove the manual paper feed transportroller.
1)
2)
Back Wire treatment
1)
2)
1)
3)
1) 2)
Wire treatment
3)
3)
4)
1)
2)
AR-F151
7 – 12
(6) Remove the cassette detection switch.
(7) Remove the multi cover.
Multi unit(1) Remove the screw and remove the multi upper cover.
(2) Remove the screw and remove the side door detection unit.
1)
2)
3)
3)
Wire treatment
1)
Multi cover
2)
1)
1)
2)
Red
Orange
Back Wire treatment
AR-F151
7 – 13
(3) Remove three screws and remove the multi paper feed upperframe.
(4) Remove two screws and remove the multi feed bracket unit fromthe multi paper feed upper frame.
(5) Remove three E-rings and remove the manual paper feed rollerB9.
(6) Remove the pick-up roller.
1)
2)
1)
2)
2)
1) 1)
2)
1) 1)
1)
3)
L O C K
TO
K
2)
1)
AR-F151
7 – 14
(7) Cut the binding band and remove the multi paper feed solenoid.
C. Assembly procedureFor assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
D. Pressure plate holder attachment(1) Attach the pressure plate holder so that the resin section is not
covered with the seal M1-N.
7. Rear frame section A. List
No. Part name Ref.
1 Mirror motor
2 Main motor
3 Exhaust fan motor
B. Disassembly procedure(1) Remove three screws and remove the rear cabinet.
(2) Remove two screws, the harness, and the mirror motor.
1)
2)3)Multi paper feedsolnoid
Pressure plateholder
Seal M1-N
Attachmentreference
Attachmentreference
1)
2)1)
1)
2)
1)
2)
3)
AR-F151
7 – 15
(3) Remove two screws and one harness, and remove the mainmotor.
(4) Remove two screws and one connector, and remove the exhaustfan motor.
C. Assembly procedureFor assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
8. Power sectionA. List
No. Part name Ref.
1 Power PWB
B. Disassembly procedure(1) Remove two screws and one connector, and remove the power
PWB.
C. Assembly procedureFor assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
9. SPF sectionNo. Part name Ref.
A Sensor PWB
B Pickup solenoid
C Clutch
D Manual paper feed roller, pickup roller
E Belt
F SPF motor
G Paper entry sensor
H PS roller
I Paper exit roller
Pickup unit removal1) Remove three fixing pawls from the bottom of the machine.2) Remove the front cover and the rear cover.
3)
2)
1)
3)
1)
2)3)
1)2)
1
2
2
AR-F151
7 – 16
1) Remove the belt, the paper feed frame SP, and two harnesses.2) Remove the pickup unit.
∗ When installing the parts, be careful of the hole position of the paperframe SP.
A. Sensor PWB1) Remove two screws from the bottom of the pickup unit.2) Remove the upper cover.
1) Remove two screws.2) Remove the sensor PWB.3) Remove the harness.
B. Pickup solenoid1) Remove two screws.2) Remove the pickup solenoid
∗ When installing, hang iron core A on the solenoid arm.
C. Clutch1) Remove the E-ring.2) Remove the pulley and bush.3) Slide the bush in the arrow direction.4) Lift the clutch, and 5) remove the clutch.
1) Remove the E-ring.2) Remove the parts.
1
1
34
32
11
2
1
1
11
2
3
12
A
1
5
2
43
1
2
AR-F151
7 – 17
D. Manual paper feed roller, pickup roller1) Lift the paper stopper.2) Slide the takeup roller unit.3) Slide the bush in the arrow direction.4) Remove the takeup roller unit.
∗ When installing the takeup roller, hang the projection of the takeuproller unit on the solenoid arm.
1) Remove the parts.2) Remove the manual paper feed roller.3) Remove the pickup roller.4) Remove the parts.
Transport unit removal1) Remove two screws.2) Remove the document tray unit.3) Remove five screws.4) Remove the transport unit.
E. Belt1) Remove the belt.
F. SPF motor1) Remove the harness.2) Remove four screws.3) Remove the drive unit.4) Remove the belt.5) Remove two screws.6) Remove the SPF motor.
G. Paper entry sensor1) Loosen the screw.2) Open the paper exit PG.3) Remove the paper entry sensor.4) Remove the harness.
1
42
3
A
1
2
3 1
1
4
1
2
1
3
3
3
3
4
1
3
12
2
4
5
5
6
1
4
2
3
AR-F151
7 – 18
H. PS roller1) Remove the parts.2) Remove the PS roller.
I. Paper exit roller1) Remove the parts.2) Remove the paper exit roller.
10. 2nd cassette sectionNo. Part name Ref.
A Paper sensor
B Cassette detection SW
C Paper feed solenoid
D Transport roller
E Paper feed clutch
F 2nd paper feed roller
Paper feed unit removal1) Remove the screw.2) Remove the rear cover.∗ When installing, engage the pawl and install the unit.
1) Open the right cabinet.2) Remove three screws.3) Remove one connector.4) While tilting down the 2nd connection arm A, pull and remove the
paper feed unit toward you.
∗ When installing, securely insert two bosses C on the machine sideand two bosses D on the paper feed unit side. Be sure to fix theearth B.
∗ Insert the 2nd page feed.
A. Paper sensor1) Remove the pawl.2) Remove the paper sensor.3) Remove the harness.
1
1
2
1
2
1
12A
1
2
4
B
A
D
D
C
3
2
3
1
AR-F151
7 – 19
B. Cassette detection SW1) Remove the pawl.2) Remove the cassette detection SW.3) Remove the harness.
C. Paper feed solenoid1) Remove the screw.2) Remove the connector.3) Remove the paper feed solenoid.
D. Transport roller1) Remove two E-rings.2) Remove the transport roller.
∗ Install so that the earth spring A is brought into contact over bearingB.
E. Paper feed clutch1) Remove the E-ring.2) Remove the paper feed clutch.3) Remove the parts.
∗ When installing, fit the cut surface A.
F. 2nd paper feed roller1) Remove the E-ring and the parts.2) Remove the 2nd paper feed roller.
∗ When installing, hang the 2nd connection arm on the 2nd connec-tion arm SP B. Be sure to install so that the earth spring C is in con-tact under the bearing D.
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
2
1
3AB
A
1
2
3
B
1
2
1
CD
A
AR-F151
7 – 20
11. DUP motor section (AR-155 only)A. Remove the rear cabinet.1) Remove four screws.2) Remove the rear cabinet.
B. Remove the shield plate.1) Remove six screws.2) Remove the open/close detection unit, and the earth wire.3) Remove the shield plate.
C. Remove the main PWB.1) Remove six screws.2) Remove connectors.3) Remove the main PWB.
D. Remove the DUP motor.1) Remove two screws.2) Remove the DUP motor cover.3) Remove the DUP motor.
Note: When reassembling, be sure to engage the DUP motor gearwith the belt on the main body side.
12. Reverse roller section (AR-155 only)A. Remove the reverse unit.1) Remove four screws2) Remove the spring, and the earth wire3) Remove the reverse unit.
B. Remove the reverse roller.1) Bend the reverse roller and remove it.
2
1
1
1
1
2
23
3
1
2
2
22
22
2
12
3
1
1
2
3
1
AR-F151
7 – 21
13. RSPF section (AR-155 only)A. RSPF(1) Remove the rear cabinet.1) Remove four screws.2) Remove the rear cabinet.
(2) Remove the shield plate.1) Remove six screws.2) Remove the open/close detection unit, and the earth wire.3) Remove the shield plate.
(3) Remove the RSPF.1) Remove the connector and the cable.2) Remove the RSPF.
B. Intermediate tray1) Remove the intermediate tray.
C. Upper cover1) Remove four screws from the bottom of the main body.2) Remove the upper cover.
2
1
1
1
1
2
23
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
AR-F151
7 – 22
D. Pickup unit1) Remove the belt, the paper feed frame spring, and two harnesses.2) Remove the pickup unit.
NOTE: When reassembling, be careful of the hole position for thepaper feed frame spring.
E. Upper cover of the pickup unit.1) Remove two screws from the bottom of the pickup unit.2) Remove the upper cover.
F. Sensor PWB1) Remove two screws.2) Remove the sensor PWB.3) Remove the harness.
G. Pickup solenoid1) Remove two screws.2) Remove the pickup solenoid.
NOTE: When reassembling, hang the iron core on the solenoid arm.
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
11
2
3
12
A
AR-F151
7 – 23
H. Clutch(1) Remove the clutch unit.1) Remove the E-ring.2) Remove the pulley and the bush.3) Slide the bush in the arrow direction.4) Lift the clutch pawl.5) Remove the clutch unit.
(2) Remove the clutch1) Remove the E-ring.2) Remove the parts.
I. Manual paper feed roller, pickup roller(1) Remove the pickup unit.1) Lift the paper stopper.2) Slide the takeup roller unit.3) Slide the bush in the arrow direction.4) Remove the takeup roller.
NOTE: When reassembling, hang the convex portion of the roller uniton the solenoid arm.
(2) Remove the Manual paper feed roller, pickup roller.1) Remove the parts.2) Remove the manual paper feed roller.3) Remove the pickup roller.4) Remove the parts.
1
5
2
43
1
2
1
42
3
A
1
2
31
1
4
AR-F151
7 – 24
J. Transport unit removal1) Remove the harness.2) Remove two screws.3) Remove the document tray unit.4) Remove five screws.5) Remove the transport unit.
K. Belt 11) Remove the belt.
L. Belt 21) Remove three screws.2) Remove the drive unit.3) Remove
NOTE: When reassembling, hang the belt on the boss.
M. SPF motor1) Remove the harness.2) Remove two screws.3) Remove the SPF motor.
N. Solenoid1) Remove the harness.2) Remove two screws.3) Remove the solenoid.
2
34
1
2
4
44
5
1
12
3
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
AR-F151
7 – 25
O. Clutch1) Cut the band with nippers.2) Remove the harness.3) Remove the clutch.
P. PS roller(1) Remove the parts.1) Remove the two screws.2) Remove the parts.
(2) Remove the PS roller.1) Loosen the screw.2) Open the paper exit PG.3) Remove the parts.4) Remove the PS roller.
Q. Paper entry sensor1) Loosen the screw.2) Open the paper exit PG.3) Remove the paper entry sensor.4) Remove the harness.
1
1
2
3
1
21
2 1
3
3
4
1
4
2
3
AR-F151
7 – 26
R. Transport roller1.(1) Remove the parts.1) Remove the parts.
(2) Remove the parts.1) Loosen the screw.2) Open the paper exit PG.3) Remove the parts.
(3) Remove the transport roller.1) Remove the paper exit PG.2) Remove the transport roller.
S. Paper exit roller(1) Remove the parts.1) Remove two screws.2) Remove the parts.
(2) Remove the paper feed PG upper.1) Remove two screws.2) Remove the paper feed PG upper.
(3) Remove the paper exit roller.1) Remove the parts.2) Remove the paper exit roller.
1
1
1
12
3
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
AR-F151
7 – 27
T. Solenoid(1) Remove the reverse gate1) Remove the ring2) Remove the reverse gate
NOTE: When reassembling, be careful of the groove and the holepositions of the spring.
NOTE: When reassembling, hang 2) on the solenoid.
(2) Remove the solenoid.1) Remove the screw.2) Remove the solenoid.
14. FAX, MCU PWB section (AR-F151only)
A. Remove the rear cover.1) Remove four screws.2) Hold the SPF sensor.3) Remove the rear cover.
B. Remove the PWB cover FAX2.1) Remove five screws.2) Remove the PWB cover FAX2.
C. Remove the FAX PWB.Remove the connector.1) Remove seven screws.2) Remove the FAX PWB.
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
3
1
2
1
21
1
1
1
12
1
1
1
AR-F151
7 – 28
D. Remove the PWB cover FAX.1) Remove six screws.2) Remove the PWB cover FAX.
E. Remove the MCU PWB.Disconnect the connectors.1) Remove seven screws.2) Remove the MCU PWB.
15. FAX-SPF section (AR-F151 only)A. Remove the front and the rear covers.1) Disengage three pawls.2) Remove the front and the rear covers.
B. Remove the metal fixtures.1) Disconnect the connector.2) Remove four screws.3) Remove the metal fixtures F and R.
C. Remove the FAX operation panel.1) Remove the belt, the screw, and two connectors.2) Remove the FAX operation panel.3) Remove two screws.4) Remove U-turn PG.
Wiring
2
1
1
1
1
2 1
1
1
2
2
1
21
2
3
3
3
4
32
1
1
1
AR-F151
7 – 29
D. Remove the FAX operation panel unit.1) Remove five screws.2) Remove the FAX operation panel unit.
E. Remove the Fax panel PWB.1) Remove eleven screws.2) Remove the FAX panel PWB.3) Remove the connector.
F. Remove the FAX sensor PWB.1) Remove two screws.2) Remove the FAX sensor PWB.3) Remove the connector.
G. Remove the PU solenoid1) Remove two screws.2) Remove the PU solenoid.
H. Remove the clutch unit.1) Remove the E-ring.2) the pulley, and the bushing. 3) Slide the bushing in the arrow direction.4) Lift the clutch pawl. 5) Remove the clutch unit.
I. Remove the clutch1) Remove the E-ring.2) Remove the parts.
2
11
3
1
2
11
2
3
1
2
A
1
5
2
4
3
1
2
AR-F151
7 – 30
J. Remove the pickup unit.1) Lift the paper stopper.2) Slide the pickup roller unit in the arrow direction.3) Slide the bushing.4) Remove the pickup roller unit.
(Note) When installing, hang the projection of the roller unit on thesolenoid arm.
K. Remove the manual feed roller and the pickuproller.
1) Remove the parts.2) Remove the manual feed roller.3) Remove the pickup roller and the parts.
L. Remove the transport unit.1) Remove the connector.2) Remove two screws.3) Remove the document tray unit.4) Remove four screws.5) Remove the transport unit.
M. Remove the belt.1) Remove the belt.
N. Remove the SPF motor.1) Remove the connector.2) Remove four screws.3) Remove the drive frame.4) Remove the belt.5) Remove two screws.6) Remove the SPF motor.
(Note) When installing, attach the belt as shown in the figure.
12
1
3
3
3 3
4
1
3
12
2
4
5
5
6
1
42
3
A
1
2
31
1
4
AR-F151
7 – 31
O. Remove the paper entry sensor.1) Loosen the screw.2) Open the paper exit PG.3) Remove the paper entry sensor.4) Remove the connector.
P. Remove the PS roller.1) Remove the parts.2) Remove the PS roller.
Q. Remove the paper exit roller.1) Remove the parts.2) Remove the paper exit roller.
16. Procedures after replacement of FAXROM (AR-F151 only)
After replacement of FAX ROM, perform the following procedures. Perform the FAX software switch clear and the FAX image
memory clear.
1) FAX software clear procedureOn the Fax operation panel: FUNCTION → 9 → ∗ → 8 → # →ENTER → 0 → 2 → 1
2) FAX image memory clear procedureOn the FAX operation panel: FUNCTION → 9 → ∗ → 8 → # →ENTER → 1 → 0 → 1
(Note)When the ROM version is upgraded, the area used by each jobfor D-RAM memory area may vary. Therefore, this proceduremust be performed after repalcement of ROM to stabilize theoperation. Perform this procedure immediately after turning OFF/ON thepower after replacement of ROM.
1
4
2
3
1
1
2
1
2
1
AR-F151
7 – 32
[8] Adjustment1. Optical sectionA. Image distortion adjustmentThere are following two types of image distortion.
Horizontal image distortion Vertical image distortion
In this machine, the image distortion is adjusted by changing the paral-lelism of mirrors (copy lamp unit, No. 2/3 mirror unit).
(1) Horizontal image distortion adjustmenta. Summary
Parallelism of mirrors can be made by installing the copy lamp unitand No. 2/3 mirror unit to the reference position. However, it mustbe checked by making a copy, and must be adjusted if necessary.
b. Cases when the adjustment is required
1) When the copy lamp unit and No.2/3 mirror unit are disas-sembled or their part is replaced.
2) When the copy lamp unit and No.2/3 mirror unit drive section isdisassembled or its part is replaced.
3) When the copy image is distorted as shown below:
c. Necessary tools Screwdriver (+) Hex wrench Scale Test chart for distortion adjustment (Make a chart shown below
by yourself.)Draw a rectangle on a paper (B4 or 8 1/2″ × 14″) as shownbelow.Be sure to make four right angles.
d. Adjustment procedure
1) Remove the right cabinet (manual paper feed unit), the docu-ment reference plate.
2) Remove the document glass.
3) Loosen the fixing screw of the copy lamp unit wire.
4) Manually turn the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit drive gear tobring No.2/3 mirror unit into contact with No.2/3 mirror unitpositioning plate. When No.2/3 mirror unit makes contact withNo.2/3 mirror unit positioning plate in the rear frame side simul-taneously, the mechanical parallelism of No.2/3 mirror unit isproper. If one side of No.2/3 mirror unit makes contact with No.2/3 mir-ror unit positioning plate and the other side does not, the paral-lelism is improper. If the parallelism is improper, perform the procedure of step 5).
Document Copy A Copy B
L
L
LL
L = 10mm
1)
2)3)
Fixing Screws
AR-F151
8 – 1
5) Loosen the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit drive pulleysetscrew in the side where No.2/3 mirror unit does not makecontact with No.2/3 mirror unit positioning plate.
6) Without moving the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit drive pul-ley shaft, manually turn the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unitdrive pulley in the same direction of the loosened setscrew.When it makes contact with No.2/3 mirror unit positioning plate,tighten and fix the setscrew.
7) Manually turn the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit drive gear tobring No.2/3 mirror unit into contact with the positioning plate,and perform the procedure of step 4).Repeat procedures of steps 4) to 7) until the parallelism ofNo.2/3 mirror unit is properly set.
8) With No.2/3 mirror unit positioning plate in contact with No.2/3mirror unit, bring the copy lamp unit into contact with the rightframe and fix the copy lamp unit to the drive wire.Procedures 1) to 8) are for adjustment of mechanical horizontalparallelism. The copy lamp unit and No.2/3 mirror are fixed tothe specified positions and the mechanical horizontal parallelismof No.2/3 mirror is adjusted.Then the optical horizontal parallelism must be adjusted in thefollowing procedures.
9) Set the image distortion check chart on the document table, andmake a reduction copy (75%) on an A4 or 11″ × 8 1/2″ paperwith the document cover open.
Set screw
Scanner unit drive pulley
Copy lamp unit projection
50mm
Image distortion check chart
AR-F151
8 – 2
10) Check the horizontal image distortion.If LL = LR, there is no horizontal distortion
11) If LL is not equal to LR, perform the following procedure.Loosen the setscrew of the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unitdrive pulley in the front or the rear frame.
12) Without moving the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit drive pul-ley shaft, manually turn the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unitdrive pulley whose setscrew was loosened, and adjust theparallelism of copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit.
13) Tighten the set screw of the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unitdrive pulley.
14) Check the image distortion in the same manner as step 10).Repeat procedures 11) to 14) until horizontal image distortionis eliminated.
(2) Vertical image distortion adjustmenta. Summary
In this adjustment, the left and right balance is adjusted by changingthe left and right balance of the No. 2 scanner unit frame on thefront frame side.
b. Note Horizontal image distortion adjustment
c. Cases when the adjustment is required
1) When the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit drive section is dis-assembled or its part is replaced.
2) When the copy image is distorted as follows:
d. Necessary tools Screwdriver (+) Screwdriver (–) Scale Test chart for distortion adjustment (Make by yourself.)
Draw a rectangle on A4 or 8 1/2″ × 11″ paper as shown below:Be sure to make four right angles.
e. Adjustment procedure
1) Set the test chart for image distortion adjustment on the docu-ment glass, and make a normal copy on a paper of A4 or 8 1/2″× 11″.
2) Check image distortion in the right and the left sides.If the both vertical lines are in parallel with each other, the right-left distortion balance is proper. (However, there may be somedistortion.)
2) If all the four angles are right angles, there in no distortion andthe following procedures are not required.
LL LR
LL and LR: Distance between the copy image horizontal line and the edge of the black background.
Black background
Set screw
Scanner unit drive pulley
Document Copy C Copy D
L
L
LL
L = 10mm
Greater distortion Smaller distortion
AR-F151
8 – 3
3) If the right-left distortion balance is improper, loosen the fixingscrew of No.2/3 mirror unit rail to change and adjust the right-leftbalance of No.2/3 mirror unit rail.
(Note)
If the distortion in the lead edge side (when viewed in the papertransport direction) is greater, change the height of the left rail ofNo.2/3 mirror unit. If the distortion in the rear edge side (when viewed in the papertransport direction) is greater, change the height of the right railof No.2/3 mirror unit.
4) Make a copy to check the vertical image distortion.If the four angles are right angles, the adjustment is completed.
B. Copy magnification ratio adjustmentThe copy magnification ratio must be adjusted in the main scanningdirection and in the sub scanning direction. To adjust, use SIM 48-1.
(1) OutlineThe main scanning (front/rear) direction magnification ratio adjust-ment is made automatically or manually.
Automatic adjustment: The width of the reference line marked onthe shading correction plate is scanned to perform the main scan-ning (front/rear) direction magnification ratio adjustment automat-ically.
Manual adjustment: The adjustment is made by manual key opera-tions. (In either of the automatic and manual adjustments, the zoomdata register set value is changed for adjustment.)
The magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is adjusted bychanging the mirror base (scanner) scanning speed.
(2) Main scanning direction magnification ratio adjustment
a. NoteBefore performing this adjustment, the following adjustments musthave been completed. If not, this adjustment cannot be performedproperly.
Image distortion adjustment The lens unit must be installed in the reference position.
b. Cases when the adjustment is required
1) When the lens and the mirror unit are disassembled or the partis replaced.
2) When the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit drive section is dis-assembled or the part is replaced.
3) When the main PWB is replaced.
4) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced.
5) When “U2” trouble occurs.
6) When the copy image distortion adjustment is performed.
c. Necessary tools Screwdriver (+) Scale
d. Adjustment procedure
1) Set the scale vertically on the document table. (Use a long scalefor precise adjustment.)
2) Set the copy magnification ratio to 100%.
3) Make a copy on A4 or 81⁄2″ × 11″ paper.
Change the height of the right side of the rail.
Change the height of the left side of the rail.
AR-F151
8 – 4
4) Measure the length of the copied scale image. 5) Calculate the main scanning direction magnification ratio.Main scanning direction magnification ratio
= Copy image dimensions Original dimension
× 100 (%)
100 110 120 130 150140mm1/2mm
JAPAN
HARDDENCDSTAINLESS
Shizuoka
100 110 120 130 150140mm1/2mm
JAPAN
HARDDENCDSTAINLESS
Shizuoka
110
10 20
10 20
(When a 100mm scale is used as the original.)
Paper feeddirection
Reference Comparison point
Original (Scale)
Copy
6) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specifiedrange. If it is not within the specified range, perform the followingprocedures.
7) Execute SIM 48-1 to select the main scanning direction copymagnification ratio adjustment mode.To select the adjustment mode, use the copy mode select key.
In the case of the automatic adjustment, when the PRINT switch ispressed, the mirror base unit moves to the white plate for shadingto scan the width of the reference line, calculating the correctionvalue and displaying and storing this value.After execution of the automatic adjustment, go out from the simula-tion mode and make a copy to check the magnification ratio.If the magnification ratio is not in the specified range (100 ±1.0%),manually adjust as follows.
Adjustment mode Lighting lamp
Main scanning direction autocopy magnification ratioadjustment
Auto exposure lampON
Main scanning direction manualcopy magnification ratioadjustment
Manual exposure lampON
Sub scanning direction copymagnification ratio adjustment
Photo exposure lampON
8) Set the adjustment mode to Manual with the copy mode selectkey.
9) Enter the new set value of main scanning direction copy mag-nification ratio with the copy quantity set key, and press theCOPY button.
10) Change the set value and repeat the adjustment until the ratiois within the speoified range.When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification rationis changed by 0.1%.
(3) Sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio
a. NoteBefore performing this adjustment, the following adjustments musthave been completed. If not, this adjustment cannot be performedproperly.
Image distortion adjustment Must be installed to the lens unit reference position.
b. Cases when the adjustment is required
1) When the lens and the mirror unit are disassembled or the partis replaced.
2) When the scanner unit drive section is disassembled or the partis replaced.
3) When the main PWB is replaced.
4) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced.
5) When “U2” trouble occurs.
6) When the copy image distortion adjustment is performed.
c. Necessary tools Screwdriver (+) Scale
d. Adjustment procedure
1) Set the scale on the document table as shown below. (Use along scale for precise adjustment.)
2) Set the copy magnification ratio to 100%.
3) Make a copy on A4 or 81⁄2″ × 11″ paper.
4) Measure the length of the copied scale image.
5) Calculate the sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio.Sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio
= Copy image dimension Original dimension
× 100 (%)
AR-F151
8 – 5
100 110 120 130 150140mm1/2mm
JAPAN
HARDDENCDSTAINLESS
Shizuoka
100 110 120 130 150140mm1/2mm
JAPAN
HARDDENCDSTAINLESS
Shizuoka
110
10 20
10 20
Original (Scale)
Paper feeddirection
Reference Comparison point Copy
Lens unit number
(–) direction
Reference line (0)
(+) direction
6) Check that the actual copy magnification ratio is within thespecified range. (100 ± 1.0%).If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-cedures.
7) Execute SIM 48-1 to select the sub scanning direction copymagnification ratio adjustment mode.To select the adjustment mode, use the copy mode select key.(Photo exposure lamp ON)
8) Enter the new set value of sub scanning direction copy mag-nification ratio with the copy quantity set key, and press theCOPY button.
Repeat procedures 1) — 8) until the sub scanning direction actualcopy magnification ratio in 100% copying is within the specifiedrange.
When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification ration ischanged by 0.1%.
C. Lens unit attachment referenceAttach the lens unit so that the lens unit number on the lens adjustmentplate is aligned with the scribe line on the base plate.
Example: Lens unit number –2.8Attach the lens unit at 2 scales in the paper exit directionfrom the reference line.
Note: Never touch the other screws than the unit attachmentscrew.The lens unit is supplied only in a whole unit.
D. Image position adjustmentThere are following five kinds of image position adjustments, which aremade by laser control except for the image scan start position adjust-ment. For the adjustments, SIM 50 – 01 and SIM 50 – 10 are used.
No. Adjustment item Simulation
1 Print start position 50 – 01
2 Image lead edge void amount 50 – 01
3 Image scan start position 50 – 01
4 Image rear edge void amount 50 – 01
5 Center offset 50 – 10
To select the adjustment mode with SIM 50 – 01, use the copy densityselect key.The relationship between the adjustment modes and the lighting lampsare as shown in the table below.
Adjustment mode Lighting lamp
Print start position Auto (AE) lamp
Image lead edge void amount Manual (TEXT) lamp
Image scan start position Photo lamp
Image rear edge void amountAuto, Manual, Photolamps
To select the adjustment mode with SIM 50 – 10, use the copy modeselect key.
The relationship between the adjustment modes and the lightinglamps are as shown in the table below.
Machine with the multi manual paper feed unit
Adjustment mode Lighting lamp
Print center offset (cassette) Auto, Cassette
Print center offset (manual feed) Auto, Manual
Document center offset Auto, Manual
Machine with the single manual paper feed unit
Print center offset (cassette) Auto, Cassette
Print center offset (manual feed) Auto
Document center offset Auto, Manual
AR-F151
8 – 6
5mm
10mm
(Example)Distance between paper leadedge and image: H = 5mm
Image loss:R = 3mm
B4 or 8 1/2″ × 14″ paper
A4 size rear edge
Scale image
Paper rear edge
Void amount (Standard value: 2 – 3mm)
(1) Lead edge adjustment1) Set a scale to the center of the paper lead edge guide as shown
below, and cover it with B4 or 8 1/2″ × 14″ paper.
2) Execute SIM 50 – 013) Set the print start position (AE lamp ON) (A), the lead edge void
amount (TEXT lamp ON) (B), and the scan start position (PHOTOlamp ON) (C) to 0, and make a copy of a scale at 100%.
4) Measure the image loss amount (R mm) of the scale image.Set C = 10 × R (mm). (Example: Set the value of C to 30.)When the value of C is increased by 10, the image loss isdecreased by 1mm. (Default: 50)
5) Measure the distance (H mm) between the paper lead edge andthe image print start position.Set A = 10 × H (mm). (Example: Set the value of A to 50.)When the value of A is increased by 10, the image lead edge isshifted to the paper lead edge by 1mm. (Default: 50)
6) Set the lead edge void amount to B = 50 (2.5mm).When the value of B is increased by 10, the void amount is in-creased by about 1mm. For 25 or less, however, the void amountbecomes zero. (Default: 50)
(2) Image rear edge void amount adjustment1) Set a scale to the rear edge section of A4 or 11″ × 8 1/2″ paper
size as shown in the figure below, and cover it with B4 or 8 1/2″ ×14″ paper.
2) Execute SIM 50 – 01 to select the image rear edge void amount ad-justment mode.The set adjustment value is displayed on the copy quantity display.
3) Make a copy and measure the void amount of image rear edge.
4) If the measurement value is out of the specified range, change theset value and repeat the adjustment procedure.The default value is 50.Note: The rear edge void cannot be checked with the first sheet
after entering the simulation mode, the first sheet after turn-ing off/on the power, or the first sheet after inserting the cas-sette. Use the second or later sheet to check the rear edgevoid.
(3) Center offset adjustment1) Set the self-made test chart for the center position adjustment so
that its center line is aligned with the center mark of the documentguide.
Test chart for the center position adjustmentDraw a line at the center of A4 or 8 1/2″ × 11″ paper in thepaper transport direction.
2) Execute SIM 50 – 10 to select the print center offset (cassettepaper feed) adjustment mode.The set adjustment value is displayed on the copy quantity display.
3) Make a copy and check that the copied center line is properly posi-tioned.The standard value is 0 ± 2mm from the paper center.
Document guide
Center
Copy paper(A4 or 8 1/2″ × 11″)
(Copy A)
(Copy B)
2.0mm or less
2.0mm or less
Copy image
Copy paperfolding line
Copy image
Copy paperfolding line
Shift
Shift
(Paper feed direction)
AR-F151
8 – 7
4) If the measured value is out of the specified range, change the setvalue and repeat the adjustment procedure.When the set value is increased by 1, the copy image is shifted by0.1mm toward the rear frame.
For the manual paper feed, change the manual paper feed ad-justment mode and perform the similar procedures.
Since the document center offset is automatically adjusted bythe CCD which scan the reference lines (F/R) on the back ofdocument guide, there is no need to adjust manually.
2. Copy density adjustmentA. Copy density adjustment timingThe copy density adjustment must be performed in the following cases: When maintenance is performed. When the developing bias/grid bias voltage is adjusted. When the optical section is cleaned. When a part in the optical section is replaced. When the optical section is disassembled. When the OPC drum is replaced. When the main control PWB is replaced. When the EEPROM on the main control PWB is replaced. When the memory trouble (U2) occurs.
B. Note for copy density adjustment1) Arrangement before execution of the copy density adjustment Clean the optical section. Clean or replace the charger wire. Check that the voltage at the high voltage section and the develop-
ing bias voltage are in the specified range.
C. Necessary tool for copy density adjustment One of the following test charts:
UKOG-0162FCZZ, UKOG-0089CSZZ, KODAK GRAY SCALE B4 (14″ × 8 1/2″) white paper The user program AE setting should be “3.”
Test chart comparison table
UKOG-0162FCZZDENSITY No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
UKOG-0089CSZZDENSITY No.
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.9 0
KODAK GRAYSCALE
1 2 3 4 19 A
D. Features of copy density adjustmentFor the copy density adjustment, the image data shift function providedin the image process LSI is used.
List of the adjustment modes
Auto Mode Brightness 1 step only
Manual ModeBrightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only thecenter brightness is made.
Photo ModeBrightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only thecenter brightness is made.
Manual T/Smode
Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only thecenter brightness is made.
T/S Auto mode Brightness 1 step only
E. Copy density adjustment procedureUse SIM 46-01 to set the copy density for each copy mode. For selection of modes, use the copy mode select key.
(1) Test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) setting1) Place the test chart so that its edge is aligned with the A4 (Letter)
reference line on the document table. Then place a B4 (14″ × 81/2″) white paper on the test chart and close the document cover.
(2) Perform the adjustment in each mode.1) Execute SIM 46-1.
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the exposure mode select key.Set the exposure level to 3 for all adjustment. (Except for the automode.)
Adjustmentmode
Exposure modedisplay lamp
Ex-posurelevel
Sharp gray chartadjustment level
Auto mode Auto lamp ON —“3” is slightlycopied.
Manual mode Manual lamp ON 3“3” is slightlycopied.
Photo mode Photo lamp ON 3“3” is slightlycopied.
Manual T/Smode
Manual lamp/Photolamp ON
3“4” is slightlycopied.
Auto T/Smode
Auto lamp/Photolamp ON
3“4” is slightlycopied.
1 10 W2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Test chart
White paper
(1) (2)
(1) Mode select key/display lamp
(2) Exposure level select key/display lamp
AR-F151
8 – 8
3) Make a copy. Check the adjustment level (shown in the above table) of the ex-posure test chart (Sharp Gray Scale).
Sharp Gray Scale adjustment level
Non tonersave mode
Toner savemode
(When too bright): Decrease the value displayed on the copyquantity display.
(When too dark): Increase the value displayed on the copy quan-tity display.
* The value can be set in the range of 1 — 99.
3. High voltage adjustmentA. Main charger (Grid bias)Note:
Use a digital multi meter with internal resistance of 10MΩ ormore measurement.
After adjusting the grid LOW output, adjust the HIGH output.Do not reverse the sequence.
Procedures1. Set the digital multi meter range to DC700V.2. Set the positive side of the test rod to the connector CN11-3 (GRID)
of high voltage section of the power PWB and set the negative sideto the frame ground (radiating plate).
3. Execute SIM 8-3. (The main charger output is supplied for 30 secin the grid voltage LOW output mode.)
4. Adjust the control volume (VR-141) so that the output voltage is –400 ±20V.
5. Execute SIM 8-2. (The main charger output is supplied for 30 secin the grid voltage HIGH output mode.)
6. Adjust the control volume (VR-142) so that the output voltage is 580±10V.
B. DV bias adjustmentNote:
A digital multi meter with internal resistance of 1GΩ must beuse for correct adjustment.
Procedures1. Set the digital multi meter range to DC500V. 2. Set the positive side of the test rod to the connector CN-10-1 (DV
BIAS) and set the negative side to the connector CN10-2 (FG).3. Execute SIM 8-1. (The developing bias is outputted for 30 sec.)4. Adjust the control volume (VR-121) so that the output voltage is –
400 ±5V.
4. Duplex adjustmentA. Adjusting the paper reverse position in memory
for duplex copyingThis step adjusts the front surface printing (odd-number pages of adocument set) in the S-D mode copying and the leading edge positionof an image on even-number pages in the D-S mode.That is, it covers the adjustment of the second surface printing mode(image loss at the front edge of an image) in which image data is oncestored in memory.The image data is read, starting from its front end in the documentdelivery direction (Reference direction of document setting in the OCmode)and stored in memory.This stored image data is printed starting at the printing start position,in the order of last-stored data to the first-stored data.In other words, the front edge image loss of the image can be adjustedby changing the document read end position.
(Adjustment procedure)1) Preparing test chart (Draw a scale at the rear end of one side of
a sheet of A4 white paper or letter paper)
1 10 W2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Slightly copied.
Not copied.
1 10 W2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Slightly copied.
Not copied.
5 10
AR-F151
8 – 9
2) Set the test chart so that the scale is positioned as shown below,in the S-D mode and the D-S mode.
3) Execute simulation 50-18 to make a copy and check the front edgeimage loss at the area where the scale is printed.Adjust the setting so that the front edge image loss is less than 4.0mm in the R-SPF mode.An increase of 1 in setting represents an increase of 0.1 mm inimage loss.
B. Adjusting trailing edge void in duplex copyinmode
This is the adjustment of the first surface printing mode (rear end void)in duplex copying.In a duplex copying operation, the paper is delivered starting from therear end of the first printing surface. It is therefore necessary to makea void area at the rear end on the first printing surface to prevent paperjam at the fusing part.There are two adjustment modes:1) Image cut rear end void quantity (R-SPF) 50-19(AE)
The size (length) of a document read from the R-SPF is detected,the image at the trailing edge of the first printing surface is cut tomake a void area. (The adjustment of void quantity at the timewhen the cassette paper size is not recognized.)
2) Paper trailing edge void quantity 50-19 (TEXT)This adjustment is made when the cassette paper size is recog-nized. The trailing edge void quantity can be adjusted by changingthe trailing edge image laser OFF timing.
The paper void quantity should be first adjusted before the image cuttrailing edge void quantity (R-SPF) is adjusted.
(Adjustment procedure)(1) Paper trailing edge void quantity1) Preparing test chart (Draw a scale at the rear end of one side of
a sheet of A/4 white paper or letter paper)2) Set the test chart on the document glass as shown below.
3) Using the user simulation [18], set the paper size of the first cas-sette.
Letter paper: 4A4 paper: 3
4) Execute simulation 50-19 to turn on the TEXT lamp and make theprinting mode in OC-D mode.Make a copy of the test chart to check the void area of the scaleon the image.
Adjust the setting so that the void area is 4 - 5 mm.An increase in 1 of setting represents 0.1 mm in void area.
(2) Image cut trailing edge void quantity (R-SPF)1) Set the test chart so that the scale is positioned as shown below.
2) Execute simulation 50-19 to turn on the AE lamp and make theprinting mode in the D-D mode.
3) Remove and reinsert the cassette.NOTE: Make sure to carry out this step before making a copy
during this adjustment.4) Make a copy and check the void area of the scale on the image.
Adjust the setting so that the void area is 2 - 4 mm.An increase of 1 in setting represents an increase of 0.1 mm invoid area.l Void position to be checked
Scale (S-D mode) Scale (D-S mode)
5 10
The front edge of thescale on test chart
Front edge of paper
Void area
less than 4 mm
2nd printing surface where scale is printed (lower side)
Document guide The trailing edge has a scale
Table glass
Scale (D-D mode)
The trailing edge void on the first printing surface is shown above.
Paper
Void position to be check
AR-F151
8 – 10
5. Density sectionA. FAX mode density adjustment (Overall mode)
(<FAX mode> SIM 46-12)1) Set the test chart (TRAP23109SCZZ <CCITT #3 chart>) on the
OC table as shown below, and close the OC cover.
2) Switch to the FAX mode and execute SIM 46-12.3) After warming up, shading is performed and the current density
level is displayed on the lower two digits of the display sectionin standard and auto density mode.
4) Enter the set value with the 10-key to adjust the FAX image den-sity.
5) Make a copy, and adjust so that the following adjustmentspecification is satisfied.
When an adjustment is made in this mode, the exposure level for eachcommunication mode and each density mode are automatically ad-justed accordingly.
<Adjustment specifications>
Densitymode
Resolutionmode
SIM
CCITT #3chart
outputresult
Set valueSet
range
Auto Standard FAXmode46-12
“3” isslightlycopied.
The greaterthe setvalue is, thegreater thedensity is,and viceversa.
1 – 99
B. FAX mode density adjustment (Individual mode)(<FAX mode> SIM 46-14 – 16)
1) Set the test chart (TRAP23109SCZZ CCITT #3 chart) on the OCtable as shown below, and close the OC cover.
2) Switch to the FAX mode and execute SIM 46-14 to 46-16depending on the adjustment mode.
3) After warming up, shading is performed and the current densitylevel is displayed on the lower two digits of the display section.
4) Enter the set value with the 10-key to adjust the FAX image den-sity.
5) Make a copy, and adjust the density with the copy as a refer-ence.
<Adjustment specifications>
Reso-lutionmode
Densitychangeover
SIM Set valueSet
range
Fine Switched withthe densityselect key.
FAXmode46-14
The greater theset value is, thegreater thedensity is, andvice versa.
1 – 99
Superfine
Switched withthe densityselect key.
FAXmode46-15
Ultrafine
Switched withthe densityselect key.
FAXmode46-16
A4
A4
Glass holding plate
A4
A4
Glass holding plate
AR-F151
8 – 11
6. Communication sectionNote: These items are factory adjusted when shipping according to
FCC standards. Therefore, do not change the setting in themarket.
A. Dial test (<FAX mode> SIM 66-13)(1) Dial pulse transmission test
1) Execute SIM 66-13 in FAX mode.2) Execute the dial pulse mode according to the instructions on the
LCD display.
SELECT SIGNAL1:PULSE 2:DTMF
3) Set the make time.
INPUT MAKE TIME(0–15)
4) Select the dial to be transmitted.Default: 0123456789#(After deleting with the clear key, it can be set to any desiredvalue.)
5) Transmission is started from the line.
SEND yyPPS xxm s1:YES 2:NO
SENDING yyPPS xxm s
SIM Soft SWInitialvalue
Set value
Dialpulsemaketime
10PPS
FAXmode66-13
SW67-1 – 4
40ms(14)
SW set value:0 – 15Make time:25 – 41ms
1msstep(Binaryinput)
(2) DTMF signal transmission level adjustment1) Execute SIM 66-13 in the FAX mode.2) Execute the DTMF mode according to the instructions on the
LCD display.
SELECT SIGNAL1:PULSE 2:DTMF
3) Select the signal transmission level.The signal transmission level is classified into two groups: thehigh group, and the low group.Transmission can be made with either of default and the softSW set value.
SELECT HIGH LEVEL1:DEFAULT 2:SOFT SW.
SELECT LOW LEVEL1:DEFAULT 2:SOFT SW.
4) The transmission level can be set when the following menu isdisplayed on the LCD. (et value 1 = 0.5dB change)
INPUT VALUE(0–15)
(This value is returned to the original value when the simulationmode is canceled.)
5) Select the dial signal to be transmitted.Default: 0123456789#(After deleting with the clear key, it can be set to any desired value.)
6) Start transmission from the line.
H:xx L:yy1:YES 2:NO
SENDING DTMF
xx: High group soft SW set valueyy: Low group soft SW set value
SIM Soft SWInitialvalue
Set value
DTMFtrans-missionlevel
Highgroup
(FAXmode)66-13(Testonly)
SW53-1 – 4
3.5dB(7)
SW setvalue: 0 –15Transmis-sion level: 0– 7.5db
0.5msstep(Binaryinput)
Lowgroup
SW53-5 – 8
3.5dB(7)
AR-F151
8 – 12
[9] SIMULATION, FAX SOFTWARE SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES1. List of simulationsThe simulations for the AR-F151 (with Fax functions) are shown in bold fonts.
SimNo.
Kind ofmain code
Subcode
Operation
01 Opticalsystem
01 Mirror scan operation
02 SPFIndividualloadoperation
02030405
0607
SPF sensor status displayMotor ONPaper feed solenoid ONPressure release solenoid ON(RSPF)Resist clutch ON (RSPF)Gate solenoid ON (RSPF)
05 Lamp ONcheck
0102
03
Operation panel display checkFusing lamp ON + Cooling fanHIGH/LOW speedCopy lamp ON
06 Machineindividualloadoperation
0102
Paper feed solenoid ONResist solenoid ON
07 Aging 01
06
Warm up display and aging withjamIntermittent aging
08 Highvoltageoutput check
01020306
Developing biasMain charger (Grid high)Grid voltage (Low)Transfer charger
10 Other None Toner motor aging
14 Troublereset
None Cancel troubles other than U2
16 U2 troublereset
None Cancel of U2 trouble
20 Maintenance counterclear
01 Maintenance counter clear
21 Countersetup(Whenmaintenance)
01 Maintenance cycle setup
22 Counterdisplay
0102040508121417182021222324
Maintenance counter displayMaintenance preset value displayJam total counter displayTotal counter displaySPF counter displayDrum counter displayP-ROM version displayCopy counter displayPrinter counter displayFAX print counter displayScanner counter displaySPF jam total counter displayFAX reception counter displayFAX transmission counterdisplay
24 Specialcounterclear
010407080910
111314
Jam total counter clearSPF counter clearDrum counter clearCopy counter clearPrinter counter clearFAX transmission/receptioncounter clearFAX print counter clearScanner counter clearSPF jam total counter clear
25 Main motorON
01
10
Main motor system ON + Coolingfan low speed (For the duplexmodel, the duplex motor issimultaneously turned on.)Polygon motor ON
SimNo.
Kind ofmain code
Subcode
Operation
26 Varioussetup
0102030406072030
383940424344
47
Manual feed setupSPF setupSecond cassette setupMachine duplex setupDestination setupMachine conditions checkRear edge void setupCE mark conformity controlON/OFF setupCancel of stop at drum life overMemory capacity setupPolygon motor OFF time setupTransfer ON timing control setupSide void setupSPF document rear edge readsetup (SC only)FAX document rear edge scansetup
30 Sensoroperationcheck(Standardprovision)
01 Paper sensor status display
43 Fusingtemperaturesetup
010405
09
Normal copyFusing temperature setup 2Duplex mode fusing temperaturesetupPostcard size paper fusing controlsetup
46 Exposureadjustment
011213
14
15
16
Copy density adjustmentFAX density overall adjustmentFAX density adjustment (Normalmode)FAX density adjustment (Smallcharacter mode)FAX density adjustment (Finemode)FAX density adjustment (Fine(300dpi) mode)
48 Magnification ratiocorrection
01 Front/rear scan direction
50 Lead edgeadjustment
01
10
18
19
Lead edge image positionadjustmentPaper lead edge/rear edge voidadjustmentPaper center offset +OC/Document center offset +SPF document center offsetMemory reverse positionadjustmentDuplex copy rear edge voidadjustment
51 Timingadjustment
0206
Resist quantity adjustmentSPF exposure correction
61 Lasersystemoperation
03 Polygon motor check(HSYNC output check)
63 Shading 01 Shading check
64 Self print 01 Self print only with the engine (1by 2 mode)
66 FAX PWBcheck
None Simulation on the FAX panel(For details, refer to the FAXsimulation.)
AR-F151
9 – 1
2. Contents of simulations (new or revised simulations only)Input method: Clear key → Exposure Select key → Clear key → Exposure Select key
Main code Sub code Content
01 01 Mirror scan operation(Operation/Procedure)1. When this simulation is executed, the mirror home position is detected.
2. When the _START key is pressed, scanning is executed at the speed corresponding to the currently set copymagnification ratio.The copy magnification ratio can be arbitrarily set with the magnification ratio select key/zoom key.
02 02 SPF sensor status displayON/OFF of the sensors in the SPF can be checked with the following lamps.
03 Motor ON(Operation/Procedure)When the start key is pressed, the SPF motor rotates for 10 sec at the speed corresponding to the currently setmagnification ratio.
04 Paper feed solenoid ON(Operation/Procedure)When the start key is pressed, the SPF paper feed solenoid repeats ON (500 ms) and OFF (500 ms) 20 times.
05 Pressure release solenoid ON (RSPF)(Operation/Procedure)When the start key is pressed, the RSPF document transport solenoid (SPFS) repeats ON (500 ms) and OFF(500 ms) 20 times.
06 Resist clutch ON (RSPF)(Operation/Procedure)When the start key is pressed, the RSPF resist clutch (SRRC) repeats ON (500 ms) and OFF (500 ms) 20times.
07 Gate solenoid ON (RSPF)(Operation/Procedure)When the start key is pressed, the RSPF gate solenoid (SGS) repeats ON (500 ms) and OFF (500 ms) 20times.
05 01 Operation panel display checkWhen the PRINT switch is pressed, the LED on the operation panel is lighted for 5 sec. The LED on the FAXpanel and the LCD balck background are displayed simultaneously.
02 Fusing lamp ON + cooling fan HIGH/LOW speed(Operation/Procedure)When the START key is pressed, the fusing lamp repeats ON (500ms) and OFF (500msec) 5 times.During this period, the cooling fan rotates in the high speed mode. After completion of the operation, the coolingfan rotates in the low speed mode.
03 Copy lamp ON(Operation/Procedure)When the START key is pressed, the copy lamp is lighted for 5 sec.
06 01 Paper feed solenoid ON(Operation/Procedure)When the START key is pressed, the paper feed solenoid selected by the tray select key repeats ON (500ms)and OFF (500ms) 20 times.
02 Resist solenoid ON(Operation/Procedure)When the START key is pressed, the resist solenoid (RRS) repeats ON (500ms) and OFF (500ms) 20 times.
Sensor name Display lampMirror home position sensor OPC drum cartridge replacement lamp
Display SensorDeveloper cartridge replacement lamp Document set detection (SPID)Jam lamp SPF document transport detection (SPPD)Photoconductor cartridge replacement lamp SPF cover open detection (SCOD)SPF jam lamp SPF open/close detection (SDSW)
FAX document size detectionPaper size detection
SPF lamp FAX/SPF B4 size detection (SB4D)
AR-F151
9 – 2
Main code Sub code Content
07 01 Warm-up display and aging with jam(Operation/Procedure)1. When the simulation is executed, warming up is started.2. Warm-up time is counted and displayed every second on the copy quantity display.3. After completion of warm-up, the time count is stopped and the ready lamp is lighted.4. Press the clear key to clear the warm-up time display, set the copy quantity, and press the START key, andthe machine will copy the set quantity repeatedly.
06 Intermittent aging(Operation/Procedure)1. When the simulation is executed, warming up is started.2. After completion of warm-up, the ready lamp is lighted.3. Set the copy quantity and press the START key, and the machine will copy the set quantity repeatedly.4. After 3 sec of the interval time from completion of copying the set quantity, the machine will resume copying.5. The above operation 4 is repeated.
08 01 Developing bias(Operation/Procedure)When the START key is pressed, the developing bias is outputted for 30 sec.
02 Main charger (Grid high)(Operation/Procedure)When the START key is pressed, the main charger output is supplied for 30 sec in the grid voltage HIGH mode.
03 Grid voltage (Low)(Operation/Procedure)When the START key is pressed, the main charger output is supplied for 30 sec in the grid voltage LOW mode.
06 Transfer charger(Operation/Procedure)When the START key is pressed, the transfer charger output is supplied for 30 sec.
10 None Toner motor aging(Operation/Procedure)When the START key is pressed, the toner motor output is supplied for 30 sec.
14 None Cancel of troubles other than U2(Operation/Procedure)After canceling the trouble, the simulation is also automatically canceled.
16 None Cancel of U2 trouble(Operation/Procedure)1. When the START key is pressed, the EEPROM total counter check sum is rewritten and the trouble iscanceled.2. After canceling the trouble, the simulation is also automatically canceled.
20 01 Maintenance counter clearWhen the PRINT switch is pressed, the maintenance counter value is cleared and the value of 000000 isdisplayed.
21 01 Maintenance cycle setupThe currently set maintenance cycle code is displayed (initial display), and the set data is stored.
22 01 Maintenance counter displayThe display method is the same as the total count value display.
02 Maintenance preset value displayThe value corresponding to the code set with SIM 21-01 is displayed. The display method is the same as thetotal count value display.
04 Jam total counter displayThe display method is the same as the total count value display.
05 Total counter displayThe total count value is dispalyed in 3 digits × 2 times repeatedly.<Display example: 12345>012 → Blank → 345 → Blank → 0120.7s 0.3s 0.7s 1.0s 0.7s
Code Setup0 3,000 sheets1 6,000 sheets2 9,000 sheets3 13,000 sheets4 18,000 sheets5 Free (999,999 sheets) ∗ Default
AR-F151
9 – 3
Main code Sub code Content
22 08 SPF counter displayThe display method is the same as the total count value display.
12 Drum counter displayThe display method is the same as the total count value display.
14 P-ROM versiondisplayThe P-ROM version is displayed in 3 digits on the value display section.(AR, DM, PCL models: 100% Zoom lamp display)
17 Copy counter displayThe display method is the same as the total count value display.
18 Printer counter displayThe display method is the same as the total count value display.
20 Fax print counter displayThe display method is the same as the total count value display.
21 Scanner counter displayThe display method is the same as the total count value display.
22 SPF jam total counter displayThe display method is the same as the total count value display.
23 FAX reception counter displayThe display method is the same as the total count value display.
24 FAX transmission counter displayThe display method is the same as the total count value display.
24 01 Jam total counter clearWhen the PRINT switch is pressed, the jam total count value is reset to 0.
04 SPF counter clearWhen the PRINT switch is pressed, the SPF count value is reset to 0.
07 Drum counter clearWhen the PRINT switch is pressed, the drum count value is reset to 0.
08 Copy counter clearWhen the PRINT switch is pressed, the copy count value is reset to 0.
09 Printer counter clearWhen the PRINT switch is pressed, the printer count value is reset to 0.
10 FAX transmission/reception counter clearWhen the PRINT switch is pressed, the FAX transmission/reception count value is reset to 0.
11 FAX print couter clearWhen the PRINT switch is pressed, the Fax print-out count value is reset to 0.
13 Scanner counter clearWhen the PRINT switch is pressed, the scanner count value is reset to 0.
14 SPF jam total counter clearWhen the PRINT switch is pressed, the SPF jam total count value is reset to 0.
25 01 Main motor system ON + Cooling fan low speed (For the duplex model, the duplex motor is simultaneouslyturned on.)(Operation/Procedure)When the START key is pressed, the main motor is rotated for 30 sec.To save toner consumption, the different operations are executed depending on installation of the developing unit.⋅ When the developing unit is installed, the developing bias, the main charger, and the grid are also outputted.⋅ When the developing unit is not installed, only the motor is rotated.∗ Do not turn on the door open/close switch forcibly to execute this simulation.
10 Polygon motor ON(Operation/Procedure)When the START key is pressed, the polygon motor is operated for 30sec.
26 01 Manual feed setup(Operation/Procedure)1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set bypass code number is displayed.2. Enter the code number corresponding to the bypass and press the START key, and the setting will be changed.
Code number Bypass0 Single bypass1 Multi bypass
AR-F151
9 – 4
Main code Sub code Content
26 02 SPF setupWhen this simulation is executed, the currently set SPF code number is displayed. Enter the code number of theSPF to be set and press the PRINT switch. The setup is changed.
03 Second cassette setup(Operation/Procedure)1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number of the second cassette is displayed.2. Enter the code number and press the start key. The setting is changed.
04 Machine duplex setup(Operation/procedure)1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set duplex code number is displayed.2. Enter the code number corresponding to the duplex and press the ENTER key, and the setup will be changed.
06 Destination setup(Operation/Procedure)1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set destination code number is displayed.2. Enter the code number corresponding to the destination and press the START key, and the setting will be changed.
07 Machine conditions check(Operation/Procedure)When this simulation is executed, the current machine setting is displayed.
20 Rear edge void setup(Operation/Procedure)1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number of rear edge void setting is displayed.2. Enter the code number of rear edge void setting and press the START key, and the setting will be changed.
30 CE mark conformity control ON/OFF setup(Operation/Procedure)1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number of CE mark application is displayed.2. Enter the code number of CE mark application and press the START key, and the setting will be changed.
Code No. SPF0 Without SPF1 With SPF (Setup is required when installing FAX.)2 With RSPF
Code number Second cassette0 Without second cassette1 With second cassette
Code number Duplex0 Without Duplex1 With Duplex
Code number Destination0 Inch series1 EX AB series2 Japan AB series
CPM Copy quantity display10 cpm 1012 cpm 1215 cpm 15
The machine type is shown with the lamp display.AL series: NoneAR-A series: AE mode lamp ONAR-B series: TEXT mode lamp ONDM series: Photo mode lamp ON
Code number Rear edge void setting0 Rear edge void allowed1 Rear edge void not allowed
Code number CE mark application setting0 CE mark application control OFF1 CE mark application control ON
AR-F151
9 – 5
Main code Sub code Content
26 38 Cancel of stop at drum life over(Operation/Procedure)1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed.2. Enter the code number and press the START key, and the setting will be changed.
39 Memory capacity setup(Operation/Procedure)1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed.2. Enter the code number and press the START key, and the setting will be changed.
40 Polygon motor OFF time setup(Operation/Procedure)1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed.2. Enter the code number and press the START key, and the setting will be changed.
42 Transfer ON timing control setup(Operation / Procedure)1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed.2. Enter the code number and press the START key, and the setting will be changed. (For any number different from the following ones, the default time is automatically set.)
Code number Setting0 Stop at drum life over1 Stop cancel at drum life over
Code number Setting0 No memory1 4 Mbyte2 6 Mbyte
Code number Setting0 0 sec1 30 sec2 60 sec3 90 sec
Code number Setting0 Default (330 msec)1 –40 msec2 –30 msec3 –20 msec4 –10 msec5 Default (330 msec)6 +10 msec7 +20 msec8 +30 msec9 +40 msec
AR-F151
9 – 6
Main code Sub code Content
26 43 Side void setup(Operation/Procedure)1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number of the side void amount is displayed.2. Enter the code number and press the start key. The setting is changed.
44 SPF document rear edge read setup + Fax document rear edge scan setup.
When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed. Enter the desired code numberand press the START key, and the display will be changed. The document rear edge scanning area in SPFreduction (less than 100%) copy is changed.
The code number is changeable in the range of 0 – 8.The default value is 4, and 2 mm of the document rear edge is cut.When the value is changed by 1, the area is changed by 1 mm.
47 FAX document rear edge scan setupWhen this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed. Enter the desired code numberand press the print switch, and the setup is switched. The scan area at the rear edge of FAX original with SPFis changed according to the entered code number.Code number is in the range of 0 – 8.The default is 4. When set to the default, the area of about 2 mm from the rear edge of the original is cut out.When the value is changed by 1, the dimension is changed by about 1 mm.
30 01 Paper sensor status displayThe paper sensor status is displayed with the lamps on the operation panel.
43 01 Fusing temperature setup (Normal copy)(Operation/Procedure)1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed.2. Enter the code number and press the START key, and the setting will be changed.
Code number Setting0 0 mm1 0.5 mm2 1.0 mm3 1.5 mm4 2.0 mm *Default5 2.5 mm6 3.0 mm7 3.5 mm8 4.0 mm9 4.5 mm10 5.0 mm
Display SensorDeveloper cartridge replacement lamp Paper detection before resist (PPD1)JAM lamp Fusing section paper detection (PPD2)Photoconductor cartridge replacement lamp Paper exit paper detection (POD)2nd cassette lamp 2nd CS paper detection (PPD3)Zoom lamp New drum cartridge detection (PUIS)AE lamp Single manual feed paper detection (MFD) Exposure level 1 (Light) lamp Main cassette A4 width detection (PSW1)Exposure level 5 (Dark) lamp 2nd cassette A4 width detection (PSW2)
Code number Set temperature (˚C)0 1751 1802 1853 1904 195 (∗ Default)5 200
AR-F151
9 – 7
Main code Sub code Content
43 04 Fusing temperature setup 2(Operation/Procedure)1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed.2. Enter the code number and press the START key, and the setting will be changed.
05 Duplex mode fusing temperature setup(Operation/Procedure)1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed.2. Enter the code number corresponding to the duplex and press the START key. The setting is changed accordingly.
∗ The above shift temperature set by this simulation is added to the fusing temperature of single copy.
09 Postcard size paper fusing control setup
46 01 Copy density adjustment(Outline)Used to adjust the copy density in each copy mode.(The copy density can be set by changing the set value ofASIC GAMMA ADJUST register.)Setting in each copy mode is performed at exposure level 3. When the copy density (exposure) is adjustedarbitrarily, the max, and min. exposure levels are automatically calculated and set. (The change amounts(gradient, change amount) at level 1 – 5 are predetermined.)(Operation/Procedure)1. When this simulation is executed, warming up and shading are performed and the current set value is displayed in two digits.2. Press the copy mode select key to select each setting mode and setting display. ∗ The copy mode setting is indicated with the following lamps as shown below.3. Change the setting with the value up-down key and press the START key, and a copy will be made with the entered set value.4. Press the clear key to store the set value and exit the simulation.
Code number Set temperature (˚C)0 1551 1602 1653 170 (∗ Default)4 1755 180
Code number Shift temperature (˚C)0 ±0˚C1 –8˚C2 –6˚C3 –4˚C4 –2˚C5 ±0˚C6 +2˚C7 +4˚C8 +6˚C9 +8˚C
Code number Setup0 Cancel (Default)1 Setup
Copy mode Display lampAE mode AE mode lampTEXT mode TEXT mode lampPHOTO mode PHOTO mode lampTS mode (TEXT) TEXT mode lamp & PHOTO mode lampTS mode (AE) AE mode lamp & PHOTO mode lamp
AR-F151
9 – 8
Main code Sub code Content
46 01
The value displayed after execution of this simulation can be set in the range of 0 – 99 with 50 as the centervalue.When the text mode set value is Gat3, for example, the GAMMA ADJUST register value set at Exp1 is:Text Exp1 = Gat3 – 50 – 24When 40 is set to Gat3, Text Exp1 = 40 – 50 – 24 = –34Then set the GAMMA ADJUST register set value to –34.Perform the same procedure for each mode and each Exp.∗ The above table may subject to change.∗ For the gradient, there is a similar table, though not specified here. The value set with SIM 46, however, is not reflected.∗ The AE mode Exp selection is not specified, but corresponds to the grades for AE exposure selection in the former models.
12 FAX density overall adjustmentUsed to set the normal mode density setup value added with each FAX resolution mode correction value toeach FAX resolution mode collectively.(Operating procedure)When this simulation is executed, warming up and shading are performed and the currently set value isdisplayed in 2 digits. (Center value: 50)Change the set value with the value up-down key and press the PRINT switch. The entered value is stored andthe simulation is terminated.During this mode, the resolution mode cannot be selected.
The range of values dispalyed after execution of this simulation is 0 - 99 with 50 as the center.
∗ when reading FAX, the AE denisty can be selected in three levels (Dark, Normal, Light). However, in thismode, copying is made in Normal. (There is no manual setup in reading FAX.)
13 FAX density adjustment (Normal mode)Used to set the denisty set value in the normal mode individually.(Operating procedure)Same as the FAX density overall adjustment.
14 FAX denisty adjustment (Small character mode)Used to set the denisty set value in the small character mode individually.(Operating procedure)Same as the FAX density overall adjustment.Since, however, the small character mode has the Text document mode and the Photo document mode,changeover can be made with the copy mode select key and the set value of the selected mode is displayed onthe copy quantity display. The copy mode setup is made as shown below.
15 FAX density adjustment (Fine mode)Used to set the denisty set value in the fine mode individually.(Operating procedure)Same as the FAX density overall adjustment.
16 FAX density adjustment (Fine (300dpi) mode)Used to set the denisty set value in the fine (300dpi) mode individually.(Operating procedure)Same as the FAX density overall adjustment.
Relationship between the displayed values and the GAMMA ADJUST register
Exp1 Exp2 Exp3 Exp4 Exp5AE –24 –12 0 +12 +24TEXT –24 –12 0 +12 +24PHOTO –24 –12 0 +12 +24T/S –24 –12 0 +12 +24
Mode Display lampText document mode AE mode lampPhoto document mode Photo mode lamp
AR-F151
9 – 9
Main code Sub code Content
48 01 Front/rear scan direction(Outline)
(1) Front/rear scanning direction magnification ratio auto correction: (Performed by changing the set value ofZOOM DATA register for asic.) The width of the reference line marked on the shading correction plate isscanned to perform the front/rear direction magnification ratio adjustment automatically. (Performed bychanging the set value of ZOOM DATA register for ASIC.)
(2) Front/rear scanning direction magnification ratio manual correction: Used to set the front/rear (main scanning)direction magnification ratio by key operations. (Performed by changing the set value of ZOOM DATAregister for ASIC.)
(3) Scanning direction magnification ratio correction: The scanning direction magnification ratio in the OC mode isset by key operations. (Performed by changing the scanning speed.)
(4) SPF mode scanning direction magnification ratio correction: The scanning direction magnification ratio in theOC mode is set by key operations. (Performed by changing the scanning speed.)
(Operation/Procedure)1. When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed in two digits. (Center value: 50)
2. When the copy mode select key is pressed, the setting mode and the setting display are changedsequentially.∗ The selected adjustment mode is indicated by the lamps as follows:
3. In the front/rear scanning direction adjustment, when the START key is pressed, the mirror base unit movesto the white plate for shading and the width of the reference line is read and the correction value iscalculated and displayed and the value is stored.In the case of the manual adjustment, enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the START key.Then the entered value is stored and a copy is made. (An increase of 1 in the set value corresponds to anincrease of 1&.)
4. Press the clear key to store the set value and exit the simulation.
In the front-rear direction magnification ratio correction:
(1) The result of calculation of the scan correction value is ±5% or less, “- -” is displayed.(Cause) The white plate reference position error or the lens unit installing error
(2) In case of a scanning error of the reference line, the JAM lamp is turned on.(Cause) CCD error or no white plate∗) If the automatic correction of magnification ratio does not work properly, adjust and correct manually.
50 01 Lead edge image position adjustment + Paper lead edge/rear edge void adjustment(Outline)This adjustment is used to adjust the copy image position and lead edge/rear edge void amount on the copypaper by adjusting the image scan start position and the print start position (resist roller ON timing) at 100%.(Operation/Procedure)
1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set value is displayed in two digits. (Center value: 50)
2. When the copy mode select key is pressed, each setting mode and the display are changed.
∗ The selected adjustment mode is indicated by the lamps as shown in the table below.
3. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the start key. The set value is stored and a copy ismade. (When the set value is increased by 1, the void amount is shifted by 0.1 mm.)
4. When the clear key is pressed, the set value is stored and the simulation mode is terminated.
Adjustment mode Lamps ONFront/rear direction magnification ratio auto correction AE lampFront/rear direction magnification ratio manual correction TEXT lampScanning direction magnification ratio correction PHOTO lampSPF mode scanning direction magnification ratio correction AE, TEXT, PHOTO lamps
Adjustment mode Lighting lampsPrint start position (Main cassette) AE, Main cassette lampsPrint start position (2nd cassette) AE, 2nd lampsPrint start position (Manual paper feed) AE, Manual feed lampsImage lead edge void quantity TEXT lampImage scan start position PHOTO lampImage rear edge void quantity AE, TEXT, PHOTO lampsSPF image scan start position AE, TEXT lamps
AR-F151
9 – 10
Main code Sub code Content
50 1 (Adjustment method)
1. Set the print start position (A: AE ON), the lead edge void amount (B: TEXT ON), the scanning start position(C: PHOTO ON) to zero and make a copy of a scale at 100%.
2. Measure the image loss R (mm) of the scale.Set as C = 10 × R (mm). (Example: Set to 30.)
∗ When C is increased by 10, the image loss is decreasedby 1 mm. (Default: 5)
3. Measure the distance H (mm) from the paper lead edge tothe image print start position.Set as A = 10 × R (mm). (Example: Set to 50.)
∗ When the value of A is increased by 10, the image leadedge is shifted toward the paper lead edge by 1 mm.(Default: 50)
4. Set the lead edge void amount as B = 50 (2.5 mm).(Default: 50)
∗ When the value of B is increased by 10, the void isincreased by about 1 mm.(For 25 or less, however, the void amount becomes zero.)
The SPF adjustment is made by adjusting the SPF image scan start position immediately after turning on thepower.
10 Paper center offset + OC/Document center offset + SPF document center offset(Outline)The center offset position of copy image on the copy paper and that of document scan are adjusted byadjusting the scan left margin of ASIC and the print left margin register set value.(Operation/Procedure)
1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set value is displayed.
2. For a machine with a multi manual paper feed unit installed, when the copy mode select key is pressed, eachset mode and display are changed.For a machine with a single manual paper feed unit installed, when the copy mode select key is pressed,each set mode and display are changed.
Machine with a multi manual paper feed unit
Machine with a single manual paper feed unit
Adjustment mode Display lampPrint center offset (Main cassette paper feed) AE, main cassette lampPrint center offset (2nd cassette paper feed) AE, 2nd cassette lampPrint center offset (Manual paper feed) AE, Manual paper feed lampOC/Document center offset AE, TEXT lampSPF/Document center offset AE, TEXT, PHOTO lamp
Distance from the paperlead edge to the imageH = 5mm
Image lossR = 3mm
(Example)
Adjustment mode Display lampPrint center offset (Main cassette paper feed) AE, Main cassette lampPrint center offset (Manual paper feed) AE lamp (Blinking)OC/Document center offset AE, TEXT lampSPF/Document center offset AE, TEXT, PHOTO lamp
AR-F151
9 – 11
Main code Sub code Content
50 18 Memory reverse position adjustment in duplex copyWhen this simulation is executed, the currently set correction value is displayed. Enter the desired correctionvalue with the 10-key and press the print key. The entered value is stored. (The correction value ranges from 1to 99. 0 or 50 for zero correction.)Front print in the S-D mode and even page print in the D-S mode are performed with reverse memory operationfrom the rear of the original. When, therefore, the print position adjustment of the output image is required,perform the adjustment as follows:The image direction in reverse memory copy is shown in Fig. 1. When the original scanning is made in thearrow direction, output images are printed from the rear edge of scanning.If, therefore, the print lead edge is shifted, set the reference chart so that the reference position is in the rearand use this simulation to change the simulation set value so that the lead edge of print images comes in theproper position. Printing is started at the print start position and executed from the final memory image data to the head data.By changing the position of the end data stored in memory with the simulation set value, the image lead edgeposition is adjusted and the read edge position of scanning is changed.Therefore, the end position of scanning is changed by the simulation set value to change the position of the enddata stored in memory. The image lead edge is adjusted in this manner.
19 Duplex copy rear edge void adjustmentUsed to adjust the rear edge void in duplex copy.(Operating procedure)When this simulation is executed, the currently set value is displayed in 2 digits.When the copy mode select key is pressed, the set mode and the display are switched sequentially.Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the print key, and the entered value is stored and a copyis made. When the clear key is pressed, the entered value is stored and the simulation mode is terminated.(When the set value is increased by 1, the void is increased by about 0.1mm.)
Original transport directionLead edge of scanning
Paper transport direction
Print lead edgeLead edge void (1)Print start position
Rear edge voidPrint rear edge
End position of scanning (Default: Scan cut by void(1))
Rear edge of scanningScanning direction
Adjustment mode Lamp ONImage cut rear edge void (RSPF) AE lampPaper rear edge void TEXT lamp
AR-F151
9 – 12
Main code Sub code Content
51 02 Resist quantity adjustmentUsed to adjust the contact pressure of paper onto the copier resist roller and the RSPF resist roller.(Operation/Procedure)
1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set value is displayed.
2. In a machine with the multi paper feed unit installed, press the copy mode select key, and each setting modeand display are changed sequentially.In a machine with the single paper feed unit installed, press the copy mode select key, and each settingmode and display are changed sequentially.∗ The selected adjustment mode is indicated by the lamps as follows:
3. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the SORT key. Then the set value is stored and a copyis made.
4. Press the clear key to store the set value and exit the simulation.
∗ Machine with the multi manual paper feed
∗ Machine with the single manual paper feed
06 SPF exposure correction(Outline)The APF exposure correction amount is adjusted by adjusting the change in Vref voltage for the OC mode.(Operation/Procedure)
1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set value is displayed.
2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the start key. The entered value is stored and a copy ismade.
∗ When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the D/A output is changed by +1 digit (dark) for OCexposure. When it is changed by –1, the output is changed by –1 digit (light).
3. When the clear key is pressed, the entered value is stored and the simulation mode is terminated.
61 03 Polygon motor check (HSYNC output check)(Operation/Procedure)When the START key is pressed, HSYNC is performed and the polygon motor is rotated for 30 sec.At that time, the Zoom lamp is lighted for 100msec e3very time when HSYNC is detected.
63 01 Shading check(Outline)Used to display the detection level of the white plate for shading. (Vref of AD conversion IC is fixed.)(Operation/Procedure)When the START key is pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the white plate for shading and Vref+ voltage ofAD conversion IC is set to 4.5V and Vref- voltage to 0.5V, and the copy lamp is lighted.This state is kept for 10 sec, and the level of one pixel at the center is detected every second to display on thevalue display section.
64 1 Self print only with the engine (1 by 2 mode)(Outline)Used to print in the 1 by 2 mode by ignoring the state of the optical system.(Operation/Procedure)
1. When this simulation is executed, warming up is made and the ready lamp is lighted.
2. Select with the cassette select key and press the start key. Paper is fed from the selected cassette andprinting is performed.
In the 1 by 2 mode, one line is printed and two lines are not printed.
66 None Simulation on the FAX panel (For details, refer to the FAX simulation.)
Adjustment mode Display lampMain cassette paper feed AE, Main cassette lamp2nd cassette paper feed AE, 2nd cassette lampManual paper feed AE, Manual paper feed lampRSPF document feed (front) AE, TEXT, PHOTO lampRSPF document feed (back) AE, TEXT lampDuplex back TEXT, PHOTO lamp
Adjustment mode Display lampMain cassette paper feed AE, Main cassette lampManual paper feed AE blinking (Main cassette lamp ON)RSPF document feed (front) AE, TEXT, PHOTO lampRSPF document feed (back) AE, TEXT lampDuplex back TEXT, PHOTO lamp
AR-F151
9 – 13
3. FAX simulations (AR-F151 only)A. Entering the FAX simulation modeThere are following two ways of entering the Fax simulation mode. They differ only in the key sequence and the operations of the simulation arethe same in either mode.For key operations in the FAX simulation mode, use the LCD display and the FAX panel.During Fax operations, the Fax simulation cannot be entered.
(1) From the FAX panel
Procedure Procedure Position Operation
1 Press FUNCTION, 9, ∗, 8, #, 7. Fax Panel ROM version is displayed on the LCD.
2 Press ENTER. Fax Panel FAX enters the simulation mode.The machine is in the normal display.
3 Press ← / → proper times. Fax Panel Each mode name is displayed on the LCD sequentially.
4 Press ENTER. Fax Panel The mode is determined.
5 Procedure in each mode Fax Panel Operations in each mode
Instead of above procedures 3 and 4, press the code (2 digits) of the target mode to enter the mode directly.
(2) From the COPIER panel
Procedure Procedure Position Operation
1 Press Clear, Exposure, Clear,Exposure.
Copier Panel Waiting for simulation code.FAX is in the normal display.
2 Enter the main code of 66 with10Up/1Up keys.
Copier Panel “66” is displayed on 7SEG LED.
3 Press START key. Copier Panel The machine exits the simulation mode, and the FAX enters thesimulation mode.
4 Press ← / → proper times. Fax Panel Each mode name is displayed on the LCD sequentially.
5 Press ENTER. Fax Panel The mode is determined.
6 Procedure in each mode Fax Panel Operations in each mode
Instead of above procedures 4 and 5, press the code number (2 digits) of the target mode to enter the mode directly.
B. List of functions
Mode#
Mode Details of functionsLCD display
(Mode name)
01 Soft switch settingmode
This mode is used to change the soft switch setup. The available soft switchesare SW1 to SW30. The contents of soft switches are backed up.For details of soft switches, refer to “Software Switch for FAX.”
01:SOFT SWITCH
02 Soft switch clearmode (Only thesetup is cleared.)
This mode is used to reset the soft switch setup (including the user option setup)to the default.Since, however, some of soft switches have the adjustment values, the area forthe adjustment values is excluded from the targets.
02:SOFT SW CLEAR
03 ROM & RAMcheck mode
This mode is used to perform ROM check sum and RAM read/write test.The result is shown with the buzzer and the LCD.No error: NO ERROR/ No buzzerROM error : ROM ERROR / Buzzer onceRAM error : RAM ERROR / Buzzer twice
03:ROM/RAM CHECK
AR-F151
9 – 14
04 Signal send mode This mode is used to send various signals to the line. The FAX signal is sent inthe level set with the soft switch.There are the following kinds of signals:
04:SIGNAL SEND
10 Image memoryclear mode (Onlythe image data iscleared.)
This mode is used to clear the image data memory (DRAM). 10:IMAGE MEM CLEAR
14 Dial test /adjustment mode(Pulse 10 pps)
This mode is used to dial in dial pulse (10PPS) and to set the pulse make ratioadjustment value.The range of make ratio variable range: -8% ∼ +7%The setup is reflected on the adjustment value area of the soft switch.The dialed number is fixed to “1590.”
14:DIAL TEST 10 PPS
16 Dial test mode(Tone)
This mode is used to dial with DTMF.The number to be dialed is fixed to “123456789∗0#”.
16:DIAL TEST TONE
21 Print out softswitch mode
This mode is used to print the report on the current soft switch setup. 21:PRINT SOFT SW
42 FAX Panel checkmode
This mode is used to check the keys and the LED on the FAX panel.When any key on the FAX panel other than the STOP key is pressed, the nameof the pressed key is displayed on the LCD.The LED’s on the FAX panel are lighted one by one sequentially.When any change is made on a sensor in the SPF section, the sensor name aswell as its ON/OFF status is displayed on the LCD.
42:FAX PANEL TEST
43 Signal detect mode This mode is used to detect signals in the line, and the detected signal name isdisplayed on the LCD. The signals to be detected are CNG, DTMF, and silent.The detection conditions conform to the soft switch setup.
43:SIG. DETECT
44 Long distancecomm. Select mode
This mode is used to specify the other party FAX numbers registered in the one-touch/speed dial, with which communication errors occur frequently due to poorline conditionsTo the specified parties, the max. transmission speed is compulsorily reduced tostabilize the communication line.The speed is available in 9600BPS and 4800BPS.
44:LONG DIST COMM
C. Operating procedures in each mode(1) Soft SW change method
Procedure LCD Operation
1 Press FUNCTION, 9, ∗, 8, #, 7. DIAGNOSTIC MODEROM VERSION = <version>
2 Press ENTER. DIAGNOSTIC MODESELECT MENU(← →)
3 Press 0, 1. SW # =
4 Enter the SW No. (2 digits) to be changed. SW # = 10
5 Press ← / → to shift the cursor to the bit to bechanged. (The left edge is Bit No. 1.)
SW10 = 00010101bit # = 12345678
6 Press FUNCTION to highlight the bit in the cursorposition.
SW10 = 10010101bit # = 12345678
7 Press ENTER to register. SW # = Return to Step 3.Press STOP to exit from the mode.
1 No signal ( OFF HOOK state)2 DTMF (0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,*,#)3 14400 bps (V.17) (00000000b, 11111111b, 01010101b)4 12000 bps (V.17) (00000000b, 11111111b, 01010101b)5 9600 bps (V.17) (00000000b, 11111111b, 01010101b)6 7200 bps (V.17) (00000000b, 11111111b, 01010101b)7 9600 bps (V.29) (00000000b, 11111111b, 01010101b)8 7200 bps (V.29) (00000000b, 11111111b, 01010101b)9 4800 bps (V27ter) (00000000b, 11111111b, 01010101b)
10 2400 bps (V27ter) (00000000b, 11111111b, 01010101b)11 300 bps (FLAG) (00000000b, 11111111b, 01010101b)12 2100 Hz (CED)13 1100 Hz (CNG)
AR-F151
9 – 15
(2) Soft switch clear mode
Procedure LCD Operation
1 Press FUNCTION, 9, ∗, 8, #, 7. DIAGNOSTIC MODEROM VERSION = <version>
2 Press ENTER. DIAGNOSTIC MODESELECT MENU(← →)
3 Press 0, 2. 02:SOFT SW CLEAR1:OK 2:CANCEL
4 Press 1. DIAGNOSTIC MODESELECT MENU(← →)
The soft switches setup is reset to the default,and this mode is terminated.
(3) ROM & RAM check mode
Procedure LCD Operation
1 Press FUNCTION, 9, ∗, 8, #, 7. DIAGNOSTIC MODEROM VERSION = <version>
2 Press ENTER. DIAGNOSTIC MODESELECT MENU(← →)
3 Press 0, 3. 03:ROM/RAM CHECK
4 (Normal case) ROM/RAM OK
(RAM error) RAM ERROR Two short beeps
(ROM error) ROM ERROR One short beep
(4) Signal send mode
Procedure LCD Operation
1 Press FUNCTION, 9, ∗, 8, #, 7. DIAGNOSTIC MODEROM VERSION = <version>
2 Press ENTER. DIAGNOSTIC MODESELECT MENU(← →)
3 Press 0, 4. 04:SIGNAL SENDSELECT SIGNAL
4 Press ← or → repeatedly to select the targetsignal.
<signal type>PRESS ENTER KEY
For <signal type>, refer to TABLE-3.
5 When the target signal is displayed, press ENTER. mode # = 1 → 10mode # = 2 → 20mode # = 3 ∼ 6 → 30mode # = 7 → 40
10 1:NO SIGNAL The relay is turned ON.
11 Press STOP. 04:SIGNAL SENDSELECT SIGNAL
The relay is turned OFF.“NO SIGNAL” mode is terminated.
12 (To terminate this mode)Press STOP.
This mode is terminated.
20 2:DTMFDTMF # =
21 Press any NUM key(0 ∼ 9) or ∗ or #. 2:DTMFDTMF # = <pressed key>
The DTMF signal corresponding to thepressed key is sent.
22 Press STOP. 2:DTMFDTMF # =
23 (To continue)Go to 21.
(To change the signal kind)Press STOP.
04:SIGNAL SENDSELECT SIGNAL
(To terminate this mode)Press STOP twice.
This mode is terminated.
30 <signal type>SELECT SPEED
31 Press ← or → to select the target speed. <signal speed>PRESS ENTER KEY
For <signal speed>, refer to TABLE-4.
AR-F151
9 – 16
Procedure LCD Operation
32 When the target speed is displayed, press ENTER. <signal speed>SELECT DATA
33 Press ← or → to select the target data to be sent. <data>PRESS ENTER KEY
For <data>, refer to TABLE-5.
34 When the target data is displayed, press ENTER. <signal speed><data>
The selected signal is sent.
35 Press STOP. <signal speed>SELECT DATA
Signal send stop
36 (To change data only)Go to 33.
(To change speed)Press STOP.
<signal type>SELECT SPEED
(To change the signal kind)Press STOP twice.
04:SIGNAL SENDSELECT SIGNAL
(To terminate this mode)Press STOP 3 times.
This mode is terminated.
40 7:TONESELECT FREQUENCY
41 Press ← or → to select the target frequency. <signal freq.>PRESS ENTER KEY
For <signal freq.>, refer to TABLE-4.
42 When the target frequency is displayed, pressENTER.
<signal freq.> The selected signal is sent.
43 Press STOP. 7:TONESELECT FREQUENCY
Signal send stop
44 (To change the frequency only)Go to 41.
(To change the signal kind)Press STOP.
04:SIGNAL SENDSELECT SIGNAL
(To terminate this mode)Press STOP twice.
This mode is terminated.
TABLE-3: Signals in the Signal send mode
MODE # MENU DISPLAY
1 No signal 1:NO SIGNAL
2 DTMF 2:DTMF
3 V.17 3:V.17
4 V.29 4:V.29
5 V27ter 5:V27ter
6 FLAG 6:FLAG
7 Tone (CED/CNG) 7:TONE
TABLE-4: Speed/Frequency in the Signal send mode
MODE # MENU ITEM 1 MENU ITEM 2 MENU ITEM 3 MENU ITEM 4
3 1:V.17 14400BPS 2:V.17 12000BPS 3:V.17 9600BPS 4:V.17 7200BPS
4 1:V.29 9600BPS 2:V.29 7200BPS
5 1:V27ter 4800BPS 2:V27ter 2400BPS
6 1:FLAG 300BPS
7 1:TONE 2100Hz 2:TONE 1100Hz
TABLE-5: Data which is sent in the Signal send mode
MODE # MENU (DATA) DISPLAY
1 00000000b 1:00000000b
2 11111111b 2:11111111b
3 01010101b 3:01010101b
AR-F151
9 – 17
(5) Image memory clear mode
Procedure LCD Operation
1 Press FUNCTION, 9, ∗, 8, #, 7. DIAGNOSTIC MODEROM VERSION =<version>
2 Press ENTER. DIAGNOSTIC MODESELECT MENU(← →)
3 Press 1, 0. 10:IMAGE MEM CLEAR1:OK 2:CANCEL
4 Press 1. DIAGNOSTIC MODESELECT MENU(← →)
The image data are cleared and this mode isterminated.
(6) Dial test / adjustment mode (Pulse 10PPS)
Procedure LCD Operation
1 Press FUNCTION, 9, ∗, 8, #, 7. DIAGNOSTIC MODEROM VERSION =<version>
2 Press ENTER. DIAGNOSTIC MODESELECT MENU(← →)
3 Press 1, 4. 14:DIAL TEST 10 PPSMAKE RATIO = ##%
The current make ratio setup is displayed on ##.
4 Press ← or →.(If there is no need to adjust, no need to press.)
14:DIAL TEST 10 PPSMAKE RATIO = ##%
Press ← to decrease by 1%.Press → to increase by 1%.
5 Press ENTER. “1590” is dialed.
6 (Adjustment/test end)Press STOP.
This mode is terminated.
(To continue adjustment/test)Return to 4.
(7) Dial test mode (Tone)
Procedure LCD Operation
1 Press FUNCTION, 9, ∗, 8, #, 7. DIAGNOSTIC MODEROM VERSION =<version>
2 Press ENTER. DIAGNOSTIC MODESELECT MENU(← →)
3 Press 1, 6. 16:DIAL TEST TONE “123456789∗0#” is dialed.This mode is terminated.
(8) Print out soft switch mode
Procedure LCD Operation
1 Press FUNCTION, 9, ∗, 8, #, 7. DIAGNOSTIC MODEROM VERSION =<version>
2 Press ENTER. DIAGNOSTIC MODESELECT MENU(← →)
3 Press 2, 1. 21:PRINT SOFT SW The soft switch list is printed.This mode is terminated.
AR-F151
9 – 18
(9) Panel check mode
Procedure LCD Operation
1 Press FUNCTION, 9, ∗, 8, #, 7. DIAGNOSTIC MODEROM VERSION =<version>
2 Press ENTER. DIAGNOSTIC MODESELECT MENU(← →)
3 Press 4, 2. 42:FAX PANEL TEST
4 Press any key. 42:FAX PANEL TEST<key name>
The name of the pressed key is displayed in thelower stage of the LCD.
5 Press STOP. This mode is terminated.
(10) Signal detect mode
Procedure LCD Operation
1 Press FUNCTION, 9, ∗, 8, #, 7. DIAGNOSTIC MODEROM VERSION =<version>
2 Press ENTER. DIAGNOSTIC MODESELECT MENU(← →)
3 Press 4, 3. 43:SIG. DETECT
4 (When DTMF signal is detected) 43:SIG. DETECTDTMF:<number>
(When CNG signal is detected) 43:SIG. DETECTCNG
(When QUIET signal is detected) 43:SIG. DETECTQUIET
(To terminate this mode)Press STOP.
This mode is terminated.
(11) Long distance comm select mode
Procedure LCD Operation
1 Press FUNCTION, 9, ∗, 8, #, 7. DIAGNOSTIC MODEROM VERSION =<version>
2 Press ENTER. DIAGNOSTIC MODESELECT MENU(← →)
3 Press 4, 4. 44:LONG DIST COMM1:SET 2:CLEAR
To terminate this mode, press STOP.
4 Select the mode. To register → 10To cancel registration → 20
10 Press 1. SETENTER # OR RAPID
11 Press the desired one touch key or the speeddial (2 digits) to be registered.
SELECT SPEED1:9600BPS 2:4800BPS
12 Select the speed. (Press 1 or 2.) <Name or Number>STORED
13 Return to 3.
20 Press 2. CLEARENTER # OR RAPID
21 Press the desired one-touch key or speed dial (2digits) to be canceled.
<Name or Number>CLEARED
22 Return to 3.
Note: One-touch keys and speed dials which are not registered cannot be designated. When one-touch keys and speed dials which are registered are canceled, this setup is also canceled. The group key and the polling key cannot be designated.
AR-F151
9 – 19
4. Software switch for FAX (AR-F151 only)A. Software Switch ListThis machine is provided with the following software switches for the use by a serviceman.The setup items of SW21 and later correspond to user setup one-to-one.Since SW17 ∼ 20 are assigned to adjustment values, they are not cleared by Memory Clear.
SWNo.
BitNo.
ITEM Soft SW setting and function Factory Setting
1 1 300dpi reception enable Used to set enable/disable of 300 × 300dpi reception. 0
2 200 × 400dpi reception enable Used to set enable/disable of 200 × 400dpi reception. 1
345
Max. modem speed in reception Used to limit the max. reception speed of Modem to14400bps, 12000bps, 9600bps, 7200bps, 4800bps, 2400bps.
110
678
Max. modem speed in sending Used to limit the max. sending speed of Modem to14400bps, 12000bps, 9600bps, 7200bps, 4800bps, 2400bps.
110
2 1234
Silent detection threshold value Used to set the threshold value of silent detection in theanswering and recording mode.
Threshold = 8 × Bit1 + 4 × Bit2 + 2 × Bit3 + 1 × Bit4Factory setting = 8
1000
5678
Silent detection start time Used to set the silent detection start time in the answeringand recording mode. The time set with this switch is thatfrom connection of the line to silent detection start.
TIME = 8 × Bit5 + 4 × Bit6 + 2 × Bit7 + 1 × Bit8 secFactory setting = 8 × 0 + 4 × 1 + 2 × 0 + 1 × 1 = 5 sec
0101
3 1234
CNG detection threshold value(AUTO, MANUAL mode)
Used to set the threshold value of CNG signal detection.
Threshold = 8 × Bit1 + 4 × Bit2 + 2 × Bit3 + 1 × Bit4Factory setting = 7
0111
5678
CNG detection threshold value(A. M. mode)
Used to set the required number of times of CNG detectionfor recognition of CNG signal one time.
Threshold = 8 × Bit1 + 4 × Bit2 + 2 × Bit3 + 1 × Bit4Factory setting = 3
0011
1 : Enable 0 : Disable
1 : Enable 0 : Disable
BitNo.
14400BPS
12000BPS
9600BPS
7200BPS
4800BPS
2400BPS
3 1 1 0 0 0 04 1 0 1 1 0 05 ∗ ∗ 1 0 1 0
BitNo.
14400BPS
12000BPS
9600BPS
7200BPS
4800BPS
2400BPS
6 1 1 0 0 0 07 1 0 1 1 0 08 ∗ ∗ 1 0 1 0
AR-F151
9 – 20
SWNo.
BitNo.
ITEM Soft SW setting and function Factory Setting
4 12
Silent detection end time Used to set the silent detection end time in the answeringand recording mode. The time set with this switch is thatfrom the last call sound to the silent detection end.
01
34
Number of times of CNG detection
Number of times = 2 × Bit5 + 1 × Bit6 + 1Factory setting = 2 × 1 + 1 × 0 + 1 = 3 times
10
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
8 Answering and recording modesignal detection filter
Used to select the CNG signal detection filter in theanswering and recording mode.
0
5 1 Max. reception length Used to set or not to set the max. reception length of FAXdocuments. When this function is enabled, a reception lengthof 1.5m or above is treated as a communication error.
0
2 Reserved 0
3 Reserved 0
45
Line monitor When this function is enabled, the sound of the line underFAX session can be heard.
00
6 Protocol monitor (LCD) When this function is enabled, the signal name under FAXsession is displayed on the LCD in real time.
0
78
Protocol monitor (Report) When this function is enabled, the detailed report oncommunication is provided after completion of FAX sendingor reception.
00
6 1234
Signal send level This mode is used to set the FAX signal send level.The effective set range is –1 dBm to –16 dBm.The values are mere estimation figures because they areaffected by DAA.
LEVEL = –8 × Bit1 –4 × Bit2 –2 × Bit3 –0 × Bit4 –1 dBmFactory setting = –9 dBm (Set for each destination)(When modem speed ≥ 7200 bps :If setting is –1 or –2 dBm , the level is forced to –3 dBm.)
1000
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Dial tone detection Used to set ON/OFF of dial tone detection before dialing forFAX sending.When this function is set to ON, dialing is started afterdetection of the dial tone.When this function is set to OFF, dialing is started after theset time of “Interval between OFF-HOOK and dial send”regardless of dial tone detection.
1
Bit No. No limit 60sec 45sec 30sec1 1 1 0 02 1 0 1 0
1 : Type 2 0 : Type 1
1 : No limit 0 : 1.5 m
Bit No. Always ON Error Only OFF4 1 0 05 ∗ 1 0
1 : ON 0 : OFF
Bit No. Always ON Error Only OFF7 1 0 08 ∗ 1 0
1 : ON 0 : OFF
AR-F151
9 – 21
SWNo.
BitNo.
ITEM Soft SW setting and function Factory Setting
6 8 Busy tone detection Used to set ON/OFF of busy tone detection. When thisfunction is set to ON, if busy tone is detected, transmissionis interrupted and the machine enters the recall mode.
1
7 1234
Reception sensitivity offset Used to set the FAX signal reception level offset. The setrange is –8dBm to +7dBm.The values are mere estimation figures because they areaffected by DAA.When “Auto reception sensitivity adjustment” is set to Enable,this setup is disabled.
Sensitivity offset =–8 × Bit1 + 4 × Bit2 + 2 × Bit3 + Bit4 dBmFactory setting = 0 dBm
0000
5 Auto reception sensitivityadjustment
When this function is set to Enable, the Modem automaticallyadjusts the received signal gain.
1
67
TransmissionLine Equalizer
Used to select the frequency characteristics in the signalsend level.This function is provided to absorb the difference infrequency characteristics between lines.When communication errors occur frequently, anotherequalizer must be selected.
01
8 Reserved 0
8 1 Non-modulation carrier send in V.29 Non-modulation carriers are not required for V.29 Modemtransmission in ITU-TS standards. However, non-modulationcarriers can be sent in advance to image signals.This function is effective to avoid communication troublesdue to echoes in oversea communication.
0
2 CED tone signal interval Used to set the time interval between the CED signal andthe NSF signal.This function is effective to avoid communication troublesdue to echoes in oversea communication.
0
3 Communication error processwhen receiving RTN
Used to set the communication error process for receivedRTN when there is an error in transmitted image data andRTN is returned.
1
4 NSF receive acknowledge Used to select between DIS signal recognition at 2-timereception of DIS signal and DIS signal recognition at DISsignal reception after NSF signal.This function is effective to avoid communication troublesdue to echoes in oversea communication.
0
1 : ON 0 : OFF
1 : Enable 0 : Disable
Gain (dB) for 2000Hz
Frequency NoneEqualizer
1Equalizer
2Equalizer
3500 0 +1.2 –1.0 –1.5
1000 0 –0.4 –1.1 –4.11500 0 –0.4 –0.6 –3.62500 0 +0.7 +0.9 +2.43000 0 +2.5 +2.5 +4.9
Bit No. None Equalizer 1 Equalizer 2 Equalizer 36 0 0 1 17 0 1 0 1
1 : ON 0 : OFF
1 : 500 msec 0 : 75 msec
1 : Not transmission error 0 : Transmission error
1 : Twice0 : Once for NSF reception,
Twice for DIS reception
AR-F151
9 – 22
SWNo.
BitNo.
ITEM Soft SW setting and function Factory Setting
8 5 EOL detection timer Used to set the EOL (End of Life) detection time to 25sec or13sec. This function is effective to avoid a communicationerror due to long EOL of certain models.
0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
8 ECM Used to set ON/OFF of ECM. 1
9 12
Interval between OFF-HOOK anddial send
Used to set the delay from OFF-HOOK when starting dialingto actual send start of the dial signal.If the dial tone detection function is enabled, this setup isignored.
11
3 Reserved 0
4 Reserved 0
56
Reserved 00
78
Reserved 00
10 1 Reserved 0
2 FAST Used to set Enable/Disable of RMS (FAST) function. 0
3 Reserved 1
4 Basic resolution Used to select the basic resolution for scanning and printing. 0
5 Reserved 0
678
Language Used to select the language displayed on the LCD and thereport. The correspondence between language N and theactual language differs depending on the destination.
000
1 : 25 sec 0 : 5 sec
1 : ON 0 : OFF
Bit No. 0.5sec 1sec 2sec 3sec1 0 0 1 12 0 1 0 1
1 : Enable 0 : Disable
1 : Inch series 0 : Metric series
Language 1 Language 2 Language 3For NorthAmerica
AmericanEnglish
French Spanish
BitNo.
Lan-guage
1
Lan-guage
2
Lan-guage
3Reserved
6 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 17 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 18 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
AR-F151
9 – 23
SWNo.
BitNo.
ITEM Soft SW setting and function Factory Setting
11 1 Header Used to set the header attachment to the transmittingdocument.
0
2 Header in data transfer Used to set the header attachment to the transferringdocument.
0
3 Training (EQM) threshold value Used to select the threshold value to judge Success/Failureof training in reception of training.
0
4 Reserved 0
567
Non ECM error judgementthreshold value
010
8 Reserved 0
12 12345
Activity Report Auto Listing time Used to set the start time of Activity Report.Setup is made in the unit of one hour, and setup of minutescannot be made.
Print start time =Bit1 × 16 + Bit2 × 8 + Bit3 × 4 + Bit4 × 2 + Bit5 hour 00 minSet range = 0 ∼ 23Factory Setting = 00:00
00000
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
8 Reserved 0
13 1 Reserved 0
2 Reserved 0
3 Reserved 0
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
8 Reserved 0
14 1 Reserved 0
2 Reserved 0
3 Reserved 0
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
8 Reserved 0
15 1 Reserved 0
2 Reserved 0
3 Reserved 0
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
8 Reserved 0
1 : Not attached 0 : Attached
1 : Not attached 0 : Attached
1 : Easy to fall back 0 : Normal
Bit 5, 6, 7 RTP RTN000 32 64001 16 32010 12 24011 8 16100 6 12101 4 8
AR-F151
9 – 24
SWNo.
BitNo.
ITEM Soft SW setting and function Factory Setting
16 1 RING signal frequency check Used to select the allowable frequency range of RING signal.Used to perform a communication test by using a simpleswitchboard in production process.
1
2 Reserved 0
3 Reserved 0
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
8 Reserved 0
17 1234
Pulse dial signal make ratioadjustment(10PPS)
Used to adjust the make ratio of 10PPS pulse dial signal.The set range is –8% to +7%.
Offset = –8 × Bit1 + 4 × Bit2 + 2 × Bit3 + 1 × Bit4 %Factory setting = 0 %
0000
5678
Reserved 0000
18 1 Reserved 0
2 Reserved 0
3 Reserved 0
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
8 Reserved 0
19 1 Reserved 0
2 Reserved 0
3 Reserved 0
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
8 Reserved 0
20 1 Reserved 0
2 Reserved 0
3 Reserved 0
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
8 Reserved 0
21 12
Record paper size Used to set the reception document size and the reportoutput paper size. When set to Auto, the paper size isautomatically selected according to the data size and thereduction ration in reception.
11
1 : To be checked 0 : Not to be checked
Bit No. Letter Legal A4 AUTO1 0 0 1 12 0 1 0 1
AR-F151
9 – 25
SWNo.
BitNo.
ITEM Soft SW setting and function Factory Setting
21 3 Picture quality priority selection Used to set the default resolution in sending. 0
4 Reserved 0
5678
Number of reception start calls Used to set the number of calls before reception in the autoreception mode. The set range is 0 to 9 times.
Number = 8 × Bit5 + 4 × Bit6 + 2 × Bit7 + 1 × Bit8 ringsSet range : 0 –9
0010
22 1234
Number of auto reception select Used to set the number of calls before reception in themanual reception mode. This setup is used as a backupfunction when the external telephone does not respond. Theset range is OFF and 1 to 9 times.
Number = 8 × Bit1 + 4 × Bit2 + 2 × Bit3 + 1 × Bit4 ringsSet range : 0(= OFF), 1 –9
0000
5 Reserved 0
678
Result list print Used to set the printing conditions of the result list aftercompletion of communication.
001
23 1234
Number of recall times Used to set the number of times of recalls when sending isnot normally completed due to busy status of the other partyor a communication error.The set range is OFF and 1 to 14 times. For some causesof the communication error, however, the number of times ofrecalls must be set to a smaller level.
Recall Times = 8 × Bit1 + 4 × Bit2 + 2 × Bit3 + 1 × Bit4timesSet range : 0(= OFF), 1 –14
0010
5678
Recall interval Used to set the recall interval when a transmission is notnormally completed due to busy status of the other party ora communication error.The set range is 1 to 15 minutes.
Recall Interval = 8 × Bit5 + 4 × Bit6 + 2 × Bit7 + 1 × Bit8minSet range : 1 –15
0101
24 1234
Remote select number Used to select the first digit of the select request signalwhen selecting from the external telephone to FAX reception.The set range is 0 to 9.
Number = 8 × Bit1 + 4 × Bit2 + 2 × Bit3 + 1 × Bit4Set range : 0 – 9
0101
5 Remote reception Used to set whether “Remote select number” + “∗∗” from anexternal telephone is detected and switched to FAXreception or not.
1
6 FAX signal reception Used to set whether CNG signal is detected during OFF-HOOK and switched to FAX reception or not.
1
7 Auto cover paper Used to set whether a cover is attached to the last page inevery transmission or not.
0
8 Reserved 0
1 : Fine 0 : Standard
Bit No. Always Err/Tim Send Never Error6 0 0 0 0 17 0 0 1 1 08 0 1 0 1 0
1 : ON 0 : OFF
1 : ON 0 : OFF
1 : ON 0 : OFF
AR-F151
9 – 26
SWNo.
BitNo.
ITEM Soft SW setting and function Factory Setting
25 123
Record list auto print Used to set the interval of automatic printing of the recordlist.
000
4 Reserved 0
5 Reduction ratio in reception Used to set the magnification ratio of printing receiveddocuments. When AUTO is selected, the ratio isautomatically determined according to the received documentsize and the output paper.
0
6 Reserved 0
78
Communication end buzzer time Used to set the time of buzzer sound to notify the end ofcommunication.
00
26 123
Buzzer sound volume Used to set the sound volumes of all buzzers except for callring.
010
4 Key click sound Used to set whether the click sound is made or not whenpressing a key on the FAX panel.
1
567
Incoming Ring Volume Used to set the sound volume of call ring. 010
8 Reserved 0
27 123
Distinctive Ring Used to set the RING signal pattern to start FAX receptionwith Distinctive Ring.
110
4 Reserved 0
5 Footer Used to set ON/OFF of the footer attached under each pagedata when printing received documents.
0
6 Reserved 0
7 Telephone line kind Used to select the kind of telephone line (tone or pulse). Tone
8 Reserved
Bit No. OFF 1 day 2 days 4 days 1 week1 0 0 0 0 12 0 0 1 1 03 0 1 0 1 0
1 : 100% 0 : AUTO
Bit No. 3 Seconds 1 Second No Beep7 0 0 18 0 1 0
BitNo.
MAX HIGH MED LOW MIN OFF
1 0 0 0 0 1 12 0 0 1 1 0 03 0 1 0 1 0 1
1 : ON 0 : OFF
BitNo.
MAX HIGH MED LOW MIN OFF
5 0 0 0 0 1 16 0 0 1 1 0 07 0 1 0 1 0 1
BitNo.
1 2 3 4 5 Standard OFF
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 12 0 0 1 1 0 0 13 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
1 : ON 0 : OFF
1 : TONE 0 : PULSE
AR-F151
9 – 27
SWNo.
BitNo.
ITEM Soft SW setting and function Factory Setting
28 1234
Used to set the silent detection time in the answering andrecording mode.The set range is OFF and 1 to 10sec.
Time = 8 × Bit1 + 4 × Bit2 + 2 × Bit3 + 1 × Bit4 secEffective : 0(= OFF), 1 –10
0101
5 Answering and recording modeauto reception select
Used to set whether FAX reception is started or not after 6call rings if the answering function does not work for somereasons in the answering and recording mode.
0
6 Annoying FAX prevention function Used to set ON/OFF of the annoying FAX preventionfunction.
0
7 Polling function Used to set whether one-touch key “20” is used as thepolling key or not.
0
8 Reserved 0
29 12
Record paper size (Main Tray) Used to set the record paper size in the main tray. LTR
3 Reserved 0
29 45
Record paper size (2nd Tray) Used to set the record paper size in the 2nd tray. A4 for AB seriesLTR for Inch series
LTR
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
8 Index print Used to set whether marking is made to the lead edge ofpaper or not to identify the job when printing the receiveddata.
1
30 1 Reserved 0
2 Reserved 0
3 Reserved 0
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
8 Reserved 0
1 : ON 0 : OFF
1 : ON 0 : OFF
1 : ON 0 : OFF
Bit No. Letter Legal A4 Other1 0 0 1 12 0 1 0 1
Bit No. Letter Legal A4 Other4 0 0 1 15 0 1 0 1
1 : ON 0 : OFF
AR-F151
9 – 28
5. TROUBLE CODESA. Trouble codes list
Main code
Subcode
Trouble content Detail of trouble
E7 01Duplex model memory setup error,memory not-detected error
The memory is not set properly or the memory capacity is not set to the duplex setup(6M).Cancel method: Set SIM 26-39 code number to 2.
E7 03HSYNC not detected. LSU (laser diode, reception element, APC circuit) trouble
LSU drive circuit (ASIC) trouble
E7 04CCD white level trouble CCD drive circuit (CCD PWB, ASIC harness) trouble
Copy lamp lighting trouble (Copy lamp, invertor PWB)
E7 05 CCD black level trouble CCD drive circuit (CCD PWB, ASIC, harness) trouble
E7 12 Shading trouble (White correction) Dirt on white plate for scanning white level
E7 14ASIC connection trouble Improper connection between CPU and ASIC (pattern cut, improper connection of lead
pin)
E7 15 Copy lamp disconnection trouble Copy lamp or copy lamp drive circuit (invertor PWB) trouble Copy lamp disconnection
L1 00
Feeding is not completed withinthe specified time after startingfeeding.
When the mirror base is returned for the specified time (6 sec) in mirror initializingafter turning on the power, the mirror home position sensor (MHPS) does not turnOFF. Or when the mirror base is fed for the specified time (about 6 sec) after start ofcopy return, the mirror home position sensor (MHPS) does not turn OFF.
L3 00
Return is not completed within thespecified time.
When the mirror base is returned for the specified time (6 sec) in mirror initializingafter turning on the power, the mirror home position sensor (MHPS) does not turnON.Or when the mirror base is returned for the specified time (about 6 sec) after startof copy return, the mirror home position sensor (MHPS) does not turn ON.
L4 01 Main motor lock When the main motor encoder pulse is not detected for 100msec.
L6 10Polygon motor lock The lock signal (specified rpm signal) does not return within a certain time (about
20sec) from starting the polygon motor rotation
H2 00 Thermistor open detection The fusing thermistor is open.
H3 00Heat roller abnormally hightemperature
The fusing temperature rises above 240˚C.
H4 00Heat roller abnormally lowtemperature
The fusing temperature does not reach 185˚C within 27 sec of turning on the power,or the fusing temperature keeps at 140˚C.
U2 01 Counter sum check error When the counter check sum value stored in the EEPROM is abnormal.
U2 04EEPROM serial communicationerror
When a communication trouble occurs with the EEPROM.
F6 80Communication trouble with FAXPWB (Protocol)
Error in data reception from the FAX board to the MCU.Occurs when the message header of the message format is other than F.Cancel method: Turn OFF/ON the power.
F6 81
Communication trouble with FAXPWB (Parity)
Error in data reception from the FAX board to the MCU.Occurs when the odd number parity set with SMR (serial mode register) differs fromthe reception data.Cancel method: Turn OFF/ON the power.
F6 82
Communication trouble with FAXPWB (Overrun)
Error in data reception from the FAX board to the MCUOccurs when the next data reception is completed with RDRF (Receive Data RegisterFull) flag of SS (Reserial status register) set to 1.Cancel method: Turn OFF/ON the power.
F6 84Communication trouble with FAXPWB (Framing)
Error in data reception from the FAX board to the MCU.Occurs when the stop bit is 0. (The stop bit must be 1.)Cancel method: Turn OFF/ON the power.
F6 88Communication trouble with FAXPWB (Time-out)
Occurs when time is out without response in data communication between the FAXboard and the MCU.Cancel method: Turn OFF/ON the power.
F6 10FAX PWB trouble Communication trouble between the MCU and the FAX board or between the FAX
board and the FAX panelCancel method: Turn OFF/ON the power. Check connections.
AR-F151
9 – 29
[10] USER PROGRAMThe conditions of factory setting can be changed according to the use conditions.
Functions which can be set with the user program
Function Contents Factory setting
Auto clear. When a certain time is passed after completion of copying, this function returns to the initial state
automatically. The time to reach the initial state can be set in the range of 30 sec to 120 sec bythe unit of 30 sec. This function can be disabled.
60 sec
Pre-heat.
When the copier is left unused with the power ON, the power consumption is automatically reducedto about 40Wh/H (∗ Note).The time to start this function can be set in the range of 30 sec to 90 sec by the unit of 30 sec.This function cannot be disabled. 90 sec
When this function is operated, the pre-heat lamp on the operation panel lights up.To return to the initial state, press any key on the operation panel. (When the COPY button ispressed, a copy is made after returning to the initial state.)
Auto shut off passingtime.
When the copier is left unused with the power ON, the power consumption is automatically reducedto about 18Wh/H (∗ Note). The time to start this function can be set in the range of 2 min to 120min.
5 min When this function is operated, all the lamps except for the pre-heat lamp on the operation panel
turn off.To return to the initial state, press the COPY button.
Stream feeding. Only models with SPF. Set
Auto shut off setting Used to set or cancel this function. Set
∗Note: The power consumption values in pre-heat and auto shut off may be varied depending on the use conditions.
Change the setting.Example: Changing the time to operate the auto shut off function
(Change from 60 sec to 90 sec)
1. Press the right and the left exposure adjustmentkeys simultaneously to start setting.
Keep pressing the keys for five sec. Display lamps ( , , , blink simultaneously and “- -”
is displayed on the copy quantity display.
2. Select the function code with the 10-digit key(copy quantity set key).
The number of the selected function blinks on the digit of 10 on thecopy quantity display.
For auto clear, select “1.” For setting, refer to the following function codes.
Function name Function code
Auto clear 1
Pre-heat 2
Auto shut off passing time 3
Stream feeding 4
Auto shut off setting 5
[Cancel] If a wrong code is entered, press the clear key and enter thecorrect function code.
SPF only
3. Press the COPY button. The number blinking on the digit of 10 of the coyp quantity display
is lighted. The number of the current set code blinks on the digit of 1.
4. Select the setting code with 1-digit key (copyquantity set key).
To set to 90 sec, select “3.” For setting, refer to the following set codes.
Functionname
Set codeFunctionname
Set codeFunctionname
Set codeFunctionname
Set codeFunctionname
Set code
Auto clear
0 (Cancel)
Pre-heat
0 (30 sec)
Auto shutoff
0 (2 min)
Streamfeeding
0 (Cancel)
Auto shutoff setting
0 (Cancel)
1 (30 sec) 1 (60 sec) ∗1 (5 min) ∗1 (Setting) ∗1 (Setting)
∗2 (60 sec) ∗2 (90 sec) 2 (15 min)
3 (90 sec) 3 (30 min)
4 (120 sec) 4 (60 min)
5 (10 sec) 5 (120 min)
∗ : Factory setting The number of the selected set code blinks on the digit of 1 of the
copy quantity display.
[Cancel] When a wrong number of the function code is set, press theclear key and perform the procedure again from 2.
5. Press the COPY button. The number blinking on the digit of 1 of the copy quantity display
is lighted up. This means the setting is completed.
[Note] To set another function, press the clear key after completion ofthis operation and perform the procedure from 2.
6. Press either one of exposure adjustment keys ( or ) to complete the setting.
Display lamps ( , , , ) go off and the copy quantitydisplay returns to the normal state.
AR-F151
10 – 1
[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION1. Block diagramA. Overall block diagram
SR
AM
JIT
TE
RS
YN
C IC
AS
IC
CP
U
EP
RO
MS
RA
ME
EP
RO
MRE
SE
T I
C
5V
CN
5
CN
15
CN
9
CN
3C
N20
CN
23
CN
30
CN
26
To
ne
r M
oto
r
INT
ER
LO
CK
SW
ITC
H
HL
CN
3
Pow
er
UN
ITH
igh V
olta
ge
Contr
ol U
nit
24V1
2V 5
V
3.3
V GN
D
FM
MC
BIA
SH
LO
UT
GR
IDLT
C
PR
AC
PW
B
AC
IN
PU
T
CC
D
LS
U
MIR
RO
RM
OT
OR
VF
M
CP
FS
1R
RS
MP
FS
OP
E P
AN
EL
CO
PY
LA
MP
Duple
xM
oto
r(A
R-15
5 On
ly) CN
902 C
RU
Rese
tS
witc
h
Oth
er
Loads
AN
D
AN
D
Refe
rence
AN
D
AN
DA
ND
UA
RT
LA
SE
R
GD
I M
EM
OR
Y
Op
tion Op
tion
(AR
-F1
51
On
ly)
MC
U P
WB
CN
16
SPF(
AR-F
151)
,R-
SPF(
AR-1
55)
UNIT
FA
X P
WB
CR
SM
UN
IT
F-P
UM
A M
CU
PW
B O
vera
ll blo
ck d
iagra
m
MH
PS
RT
HT
CS
PO
DP
PD
1P
PD
2
MM
LD
MH
PS
CE
D1
DV
SE
LS
DO
D
PS
W2
PS
W1
CE
D2
GD
I/U
SB
UN
ITF
AX
OP
E P
WB
SP
EA
KE
R
Prin
ted
Vis
ua
l Da
ta
MA
INM
OT
OR
Oth
er
Inp
uts
AR-F151
11 – 1
B. MCU PWB unit
FA
X O
PE
PW
B
CN
5
FA
X P
WB
/SC
AN
ST
/PR
ST
AR
T/P
OF
F/F
RT
Set
c..
AR
-F15
1 M
CU
PW
B U
NIT
CN
23
PM
CLK
-A/P
MD
/VID
EO
S/H
/LD
EN
PM
RD
Y
GD
I-IN
/128
4-E
N
US
B-E
N
US
B-O
N
/FA
XP
RQ
/FA
XA
CK
/FA
XC
S/F
AX
RE
Qet
c..
LAS
ER
UN
IT(L
SU
)P
OLY
GO
NM
OT
OR
HS
YN
CG
DI/U
SB
UN
IT
CN
15C
N16
US
B-I
N
SP
PD
SP
IDS
B4D
GD
IM
EM
OR
Y/S
PU
S
/SG
S/S
RR
C /SP
FS
SP
F U
NIT
CC
DH
IC
CD
LO
CC
D P
WB
CN
30C
N31
SD
OD
etc.
.et
c..
CN
26C
RS
M U
NIT
PA
PE
RC
AS
SE
TT
E1
PA
PE
RC
AS
SE
TT
E2
TR
AY
EM
PT
YD
ET
EC
TO
R
PA
PE
R W
IDT
HD
ET
EC
TIO
N
PA
PE
R W
IDT
HD
ET
EC
TIO
N
PA
PE
R F
EE
DS
OLE
NO
ID
TR
AY
EM
PT
YD
ET
EC
TO
R
PA
PE
R F
EE
DS
OLE
NO
ID
CN
1
CN
6
CN
10
CN
7/C
ED
1
/CP
FS
1
/CE
D2
/CP
FS
2
PS
W1
PS
W2
IC3
IC10
3IC10
5
IC10
2IC10
4
IC3
IC11
1IC
106
IC8
IC10
5IC
8
IC9
CP
U(H
8S/2
350)
IC10
6
IC2
IC11
3
IC10
4
IC11
3
IC13
IC12
IC10
AS
IC(H
G73
CO
25FD
)
IC11
0
CN
3
CN
17
IC10
3IC
105
IC16
IC10
9
CN
17
IC10
5
/BIA
S
DV
SE
LD
V S
EN
SO
R
DE
VE
LOP
ING
BIA
S
FW
/PR
HIG
H V
OLT
AG
EC
ON
TRO
L U
NIT
HLO
UT
ELE
CT
RIC
SO
UR
CE
PO
WE
RR
ELA
Y
HE
AT
ER
LAM
P
TH
ER
MIS
TO
R
GR
ID C
ON
TR
OL
TRA
NS
FER
CH
AR
GE
R
MA
IN C
HA
RG
ER
IC3
IC8 F
TH
MA
NU
AL
PA
PE
RF
EE
D
PA
PE
RD
ET
EC
TO
R
PA
PE
R E
XIT
DE
TE
CT
OR
PA
PE
R F
EE
DS
OLE
NO
ID
RE
SIS
T R
OLL
ER
SO
LEN
OID
MF
D
/RR
SP
OD
/MP
FS
IC10
5
IC3
IC10
5
IC3
CN
22
CN
11
CN
12
IC10
3IC
108
IC11
3
CN
18C
N27 MH
PS
PS
WK
IN1
KIN
2
OP
-CLK
OP
-LA
TC
HO
P-D
AT
A
KE
YD
RS
T
MM
LD/M
M
IC8
IC10
6
CN
20
VF
MO
UT
/VF
MC
NT
IC2
IC3
IC10
5IC
12
CN
17
IC1
CN
9
TC
S
CN
28
TM
a-O
TM
b-O
CN
25C
N21
IC10
9IC
101
IC10
5
IC10
3
IC10
3
CN
13
CN
4
PP
D1
/CL
CN
14P
PD
2
RT
H-I
N
5V(D
SW
S)
24V
(DS
WS
)
OP
E P
WB
NE
W P
RO
CE
SS
UN
IT S
EN
SO
R
MA
INM
OTO
RLO
CK
DE
TEC
TOR
MA
INM
OTO
R
MIR
RO
RH
OM
EP
OS
ITIO
NS
EN
SO
R
MIR
RO
RM
OT
OR
TO
NE
RM
OT
OR
VE
NC
H R
ATI
ON
FAN
MO
TOR
TO
NE
RC
ON
TR
OL
SE
NS
OR
CO
PY
LAM
P
INT
ER
LOC
K
INT
ER
LOC
K
PA
PE
R D
ET
EC
TO
R2
(In
FU
SE
R U
NIT
)
PA
PE
R D
ET
EC
TO
R1
(Nea
r R
ES
IST
RO
LLE
R)
AR-F151
11 – 2
C. FAX PWB unit (AR-F151 only)
BT
50
1L
ithiu
mB
att
ery
IC5
05
LC
82
13
IC5
12
Ima
ge
ME
MO
RY
25
6kb
it S
RA
M
IC510
SC
AN
ME
MO
RY
16M
bit
DR
AM
C5
15
SU
PE
RC
ap
aci
tor
IC5
07
CP
UN
S F
X1
64
IC515
Mem
ory
16M
bit
DR
AM
LC
D P
WB
Ima
ge
BU
S
SP
EA
KE
R
Prin
t D
ate
CN
50
1
MC
UP
WB
12
V
3.3
V5
V
IC5
13
-12
V-5
V
SO
DS
IDS
CK
PA
NE
L R
ES
ET
FT
XD
FR
TS
PO
FF
RE
AD
YP
RS
TA
RT
etc
..
Sca
n D
ate
RE
AD
YF
AX
PR
OF
AX
CS
FA
XA
CK
FC
TS
etc
..1
2V
3.3
V
5V
C N 6 0 1
BZ
1
BU
ZO
N
VS
YN
C
PW
OF
F
RE
SE
T
IC5
08
PL
LC
GS
41
0
RE
SE
T
LC
AS
,UC
AS
SC
DA
CK
IC5
03
Sys
tem
con
tro
ller
NS
FX
20
0
IC504
Main
ME
MO
RY
16M
bit
DR
AM
IC5
02
EP
RO
M8
Mb
it
IC5
01
Co
nfig
ura
tion
RA
M6
4kb
it S
RA
M
IC6
02
Clo
ck I
CN
JM6
35
5
C N
IC5
06
I/F
AS
IC
FA
X P
WB
UN
IT
CP
U B
US
IC5
09
FA
XA
SIC
LD BUS
C N 5 0 3 5 0 1
IC601
IC5
14
Mod
em c
ircui
tse
cond
ary
side
of t
he li
ne
Sig
ma-
delta
circ
uit
IC60
6/IC
605
Del
ta-s
igm
a ci
rcui
tIC
606/
IC51
6/IC
607
Spe
aker
circ
uit
IC60
5/IC
609/
IC60
8
LIU
circ
uit p
rimar
ysi
de o
f the
line
Line
tran
s-fo
rmer
Pho
to c
oupl
er
DC
load
Cap
a-ci
tor R
ing
dete
ctio
n
Byp
ass
circ
uit
Rel
ay
Rel
ay
On-
hook
dete
ctio
nP
rote
ctio
nel
emen
tTe
leph
one
line
Ext
erna
lte
leph
one
com
mun
i-ca
tion
Line
jack
CN
502
(for
US
)
AR-F151
11 – 3
2. Circuit descriptionsA. Man PWB (MCU)
(1) CPU signal table
PINNo.
Signalcode
Input/output Operating
1 /CS1 Output Chip Select for SRAM
2 /CS0 Output Chip Select for EPROM
3 D-GND
4 D-GND
5 5V
6 A0 Output Address Bus (NC-pull up)
7 A1 Output Address Bus
8 A2 Output Address Bus
9 A3 Output Address Bus
10 D-GND
11 A4 Output Address Bus
12 A5 Output Address Bus
13 A6 Output Address Bus
14 A7 Output Address Bus
15 A8 Output Address Bus
16 A9 Output Address Bus
17 A10 Output Address Bus
18 A11 Output Address Bus
19 D-GND
20 A12 Output Address Bus
21 A13 Output Address Bus
22 A14 Output Address Bus
23 A15 Output Address Bus
24 A16 Output Address Bus
25 A17 Output Address Bus
26 A18 Output Address Bus
27 A19 Output Address Bus (NC-pull up)
28 D-GND
29 A20 Output Address Bus (NC-pull up)
30 NC-pull up
31 (SPPD)Interruptionlevel input
SPF Paper Pass Detector
32 USB-IN Input USB Connector-In Detect
33 (MHPS)Interruptionlevel input
Mirror Home Position Sensor
34/CPUSYNC
Interruptionlevel input
Horizontal Synchronous (fromG/A)
35 D-GND
36 D-GND
37 ZCInterruptionlevel input
Zero-cross signal
38 /ASICINTInterruptionlevel input
Intterupt from G/A
PINNo.
Signalcode
Input/output Operating
39 5V
40 D0Data
input/outputData Bus
41 D1Data
input/outputData Bus
42 D2Data
input/outputData Bus
43 D3Data
input/outputData Bus
44 D-GND
45 D4Data
input/outputData Bus
46 D5Data
input/outputData Bus
47 D6Data
input/outputData Bus
48 D7Data
input/outputData Bus
49 D8Data
input/outputData Bus
50 D9Data
input/outputData Bus
51 D10Data
input/outputData Bus
52 D11Data
input/outputData Bus
53 D-GND
54 D12Data
input/outputData Bus
55 D13Data
input/outputData Bus
56 D14Data
input/outputData Bus
57 D15Data
input/outputData Bus
58 5V
59(OP-DATA)
OutputData Signal for OperationPanel
60 FTXD Output TXD for Additional Board
61 FRTS Output RTS for Additional Board
62 FRXD Input RXD for Additional Board
63 (OP-CLK) Output Clock for Operation Panel
64 TMON OutputPower Supply Signal for TonerMotor Driver IC
65 D-GND
66 FCTS Input CTS for Additional Board
67 D-GND
68 D-GND
AR-F151
11 – 4
PINNo.
Signalcode
Input/output Operating
69 PSW Input Print switch input
70 KIN1 Input Key input 1
71 KIN2 Input Key input 2
72 TMCLK Timer output Clock for Toner Motor
73 /TMEN Output On-Off Control for Toner Motor
74 /POFF OutputPower Off Signal forAdditional Board
75 PMCLK Timer output Clock for Polygon Motor
76/PRSTART
Output Printing Start Signal
77 /SCANSP Output Scaning Stop Signal
78 /SCANST Output Scaning Start Signal
79 HLOutput(Timeroutput)
On-Off Control for HeatrerLamp
80WDTOVF-
Output Watchdog Timer
81 RES- Input Reset
82 Input pull up
83 Input pull up
84 5V
85 XTAL Clock
86 EXTAL Clock
87 D-GND
88 CPUCLK Output System Clock for G/A
89 5V
90 /AS Output pull up
91 /RD Output Read Signal
92 /HWR Output Write Signal (High Address)
93 /LWR Output Write Signal (Low Address)
94 SELIN3 Output Input select 3
95 SELIN2 Output Input select 2
96 SELIN1 Output Input select 1
97 PR Output Power relay control PR
98 RRS Output Resist roller solenoid RPC
99 D-GND
100 D-GND
101 SCLK Output Clock Line for EEPROM
102 SDA Output Data Line for EEPROM
103 A5V
104 Analog Reference Voltage-A5V
105 RTH Analog input Fusing Thermister
106
107 SIN1 Input Sensor input 1
108 SIN2 Input Sensor input 2
109 SIN3 Input Sensor input 3
PINNo.
Signalcode
Input/output Operating
110 SIN4 Input Sensor input 4
111 DAHAnalogoutput
Reference Voltage (High) forCCD
112 DALAnalogoutput
Reference Voltage (Low) forCCD
113 AN-GND
114 D-GND
115 DMT-3 Motor output Duplex Motor Excitement
116 DMT-2 Motor output Duplex Motor Excitement
117 DMT-1 Motor output Duplex Motor Excitement
118 DMT-0 Motor output Duplex Motor Excitement
119 MRMT3 Motor output Mirror Motor Excitement
120 MRMT2 Motor output Mirror Motor Excitement
121 MRMT1 Motor output Mirror Motor Excitement
122 MRMT0 Motor output Mirror Motor Excitement
123 InputCPU MODE SET <MODE 4> -GND
124 InputCPU MODE SET <MODE 4> -GND
125 InputCPU MODE SET <MODE 4> -Vcc
126 NC-pull up
127 DRST Input Drum reset detection
128 /CS2 Output Chip Select for ASIC
∗ The signals which are hatched are added or revised to or from theAL-1000.
AR-F151
11 – 5
(2) ASIC (Signal table)
PIN No. Signal name IN/OUT Connected to Description
1 /SCANSP IN CPU (I/O) Scanner process interrupt signal
2 /PRSTART IN CPU Print start trigger signal
3 /TMEN IN CPU Toner motor ON/OFF
4 TMCLK IN CPU Toner motor reference clock
5 3.3V Power
6 CPUAD7 IN CPU CPU address bus
7 CPUAD6 IN CPU CPU address bus
8 GND Power
9 CPUAD5 IN CPU CPU address bus
10 CPUAD4 IN CPU CPU address bus
11 CPUAD3 IN CPU CPU address bus
12 CPUAD2 IN CPU CPU address bus
13 CPUAD1 IN CPU CPU address bus
14 /CPUSYNC OUT CPU Horizontal synchronization signal
15 /ASICINT OUT CPU Interruption request signal
16 /CS2 IN CPU CPU chip select signal
17 /RESET IN RESET IC Reset signal
18 5V Power
19 GND Power
20 3.3V Power
21 GND Power
22 MDATA15 IN/OUT DRAM Data bus of DRAM (page memory)
23 MDATA14 IN/OUT DRAM Data bus of DRAM (page memory)
24 MDATA13 IN/OUT DRAM Data bus of DRAM (page memory)
25 MDATA12 IN/OUT DRAM Data bus of DRAM (page memory)
26 MDATA11 IN/OUT DRAM Data bus of DRAM (page memory)
27 MDATA10 IN/OUT DRAM Data bus of DRAM (page memory)
28 MDATA9 IN/OUT DRAM Data bus of DRAM (page memory)
29 MDATA8 IN/OUT DRAM Data bus of DRAM (page memory)
30 MDATA7 IN/OUT DRAM Data bus of DRAM (page memory)
31 3.3V Power
32 MDATA6 IN/OUT DRAM Data bus of DRAM (page memory)
33 MDATA5 IN/OUT DRAM Data bus of DRAM (page memory)
34 GND Power
35 MDATA4 IN/OUT DRAM Data bus of DRAM (page memory)
36 MDATA3 IN/OUT DRAM Data bus of DRAM (page memory)
37 MDATA2 IN/OUT DRAM Data bus of DRAM (page memory)
38 MDATA1 IN/OUT DRAM Data bus of DRAM (page memory)
39 MDATA0 IN/OUT DRAM Data bus of DRAM (page memory)
40 /RAS0 OUT DRAM RAS signal 0 of DRAM (page memory)
41 /RAS1 OUT DRAM RAS signal 1 of DRAM (page memory)
42 /RAS2 OUT DRAM RAS signal 2 of DRAM (page memory)
43 /RAS64 OUTDRAM control (forpanther)
(Reserved)
44 3.3V Power
45 /RAS16 OUTDRAM control (forpanther)
(Reserved)
46 MAD0 OUT DRAM Address bus of DRAM (page memory)
AR-F151
11 – 6
PIN No. Signal name IN/OUT Connected to Description
47 GND Power
48 MAD1 OUT DRAM Address bus of DRAM (page memory)
49 MAD2 OUT DRAM Address bus of DRAM (page memory)
50 MAD3 OUT DRAM Address bus of DRAM (page memory)
51 MAD4 OUT DRAM Address bus of DRAM (page memory)
52 MAD5 OUT DRAM Address bus of DRAM (page memory)
53 MAD6 OUT DRAM Address bus of DRAM (page memory)
54 MAD7 OUT DRAM Address bus of DRAM (page memory)
55 MAD8 OUT DRAM Address bus of DRAM (page memory)
56 MAD9 OUT DRAM Address bus of DRAM (page memory)
57 3.3V Power
58 MAD10 OUT DRAM Address bus of DRAM (page memory)
59 MAD11 OUT DRAM Address bus of DRAM (page memory)
60 GND Power
61 /CAS0 OUT DRAM CAS signal of DRAM (page memory)
62 /CAS1 OUT DRAM CAS signal of DRAM (page memory)
63 /OE OUT DRAM Read enable signal of DRAM (page memory)
64 /WE OUT DRAM Write enable signal of DRAM (page memory)
65 OUTD0 OUT FAX board data bus Transmission data 0 to expanded board
66 OUTD1 OUT FAX board data bus Transmission data 1 to expanded board
67 OUTD2 OUT FAX board data bus Transmission data 2 to expanded board
68 OUTD3 OUT FAX board data bus Transmission data 3 to expanded board
69 3.3V Power
70 OUTD4 OUT FAX board data bus Transmission data 4 to expanded board
71 OUTD5 OUT FAX board data bus Transmission data 5 to expanded board
72 GND Power
73 OUTD6 OUT FAX board data bus Transmission data 6 to expanded board
74 OUTD7 OUT FAX board data bus Transmission data 7 to expanded board
75 OUTD8 OUT FAX board data bus Transmission data 8 to expanded board
76 OUTD9 OUT FAX board data bus Transmission data 9 to expanded board
77 OUTD10 OUT FAX board data bus Transmission data 10 to expanded board
78 OUTD11 OUT FAX board data bus Transmission data 11 to expanded board
79 OUTD12 OUT FAX board data bus Transmission data 12 to expanded board
80 OUTD13 OUT FAX board data bus Transmission data 13 to expanded board
81 OUTD14 OUT FAX board data bus Transmission data 14 to expanded board
82 OUTD15 OUT FAX board data bus Transmission data 15 to expanded board
83 /HSYNC OUT PCL, FAX board Horizontal sync signal with print area output only
84 /PCLPRD IN PCL board Print video data (serial) from PCL board
85 /PCLREQ OUT PCL board DREQ signal to PCL board
86 /PCLACK IN PCL board ACK signal from PCL board
87 /PCLCS IN PCL board
88 3.3V Power
89 GND Power
90 5V Power
91 GND Power
92 /FAXPRD IN FAX board Print video data (serial) from FAX board
93 /FAXREQ OUT FAX board DREQ signal to FAX board
94 /FAXACK IN FAX board ACK signal from FAX board
95 3.3V Power
AR-F151
11 – 7
PIN No. Signal name IN/OUT Connected to Description
96 /FAXCS IN FAX board OUTD bus enable signal H bus impedance HIGH state
97 /ESPRD INElectric sort board ∗
(Reserved) (Reserved)
98 GND Power
99 /ESREQ OUTElectric sort board ∗
(Reserved) (Reserved)
100 /ESACK INElectric sort board ∗
(Reserved) (Reserved)
101 /ESCS INElectric sort board ∗
(Reserved) (Reserved)
102 PARAD0 IN/OUT 1284 board connector DATA bus (IEEE1284 communication port)
103 PARAD1 IN/OUT 1284 board connector DATA bus (IEEE1284 communication port)
104 PARAD2 IN/OUT 1284 board connector DATA bus (IEEE1284 communication port)
105 PARAD3 IN/OUT 1284 board connector DATA bus (IEEE1284 communication port)
106 PARAD4 IN/OUT 1284 board connector DATA bus (IEEE1284 communication port)
107 PARAD5 IN/OUT 1284 board connector DATA bus (IEEE1284 communication port)
108 5V Power
109 PARAD6 IN/OUT 1284 board connector DATA bus (IEEE1284 communication port)
110 PARAD7 IN/OUT 1284 board connector DATA bus (IEEE1284 communication port)
111 GND Power
112 /REV OUT 1284 board connector ECP mode I/O select (LOW:P → H)
113 INIT IN 1284 board connector INIT signal (IEEE1284 communication port)
114 /SLCTIN IN 1284 board connector /SLCTIN signal (IEEE1284 communication port)
115 /AUTOFD IN 1284 board connector /AUTOFD signal (IEEE1284 communication port)
116 /STB IN 1284 board connector /STB signal (IEEE1284 communication port)
117 /ACK OUT 1284 board connector /ACK signal (IEEE1284 communication port)
118 BUSY OUT 1284 board connector BUSY signal (IEEE1284 communication port)
119 PE OUT 1284 board connector PE signal (IEEE1284 communication port)
120 /FAULT OUT 1284 board connector /FAULT signal (IEEE1284 communication port)
121 5V Power
122 SLCT OUT 1284 board connector /SLCTIN signal (IEEE1284 communication port)
123 /TESTPIN0 IN TEST PIN High: Normal Low: Test
124 GND Power
125 PFCLK IN Transmitter Write clock
126 /TESTPIN1 IN TEST PIN High: Normal Low: Test
127 /SYNCEN OUTJITTERADJUSTMENT IC
Jitter adjustment IC trigger signal
128 SD10 IN/OUT SRAM (separation) Data line to SRAM before are separation
129 SD11 IN/OUT SRAM (separation) Data line to SRAM before are separation
130 SD12 IN/OUT SRAM (separation) Data line to SRAM before are separation
131 SD13 IN/OUT SRAM (separation) Data line to SRAM before are separation
132 SD14 IN/OUT SRAM (separation) Data line to SRAM before are separation
133 5V Power
134 SD15 IN/OUT SRAM (separation) Data line to SRAM before are separation
135 SD16 IN/OUT SRAM (separation) Data line to SRAM before are separation
136 GND Power
137 SD17 IN/OUT SRAM (separation) Data line to SRAM before are separation
138 SOE1 OUT SRAM (separation) Read enable line to SRAM before area separation
139 SWE1 OUT SRAM (separation) Write enable line to SRAM before area separation
140 SCS1 OUT SRAM (separation) Chip select line to SRAM before area separation
AR-F151
11 – 8
PIN No. Signal name IN/OUT Connected to Description
141 SOE0 OUT SRAM (separation) Read enable line to SRAM before area separation
142 SWE0 OUT SRAM (separation) Write enable line to SRAM before area separation
143 SCS0 OUT SRAM (separation) Chip select line to SRAM before area separation
144 SD00 IN/OUT SRAM (separation) Data line to SRAM before are separation
145 SD01 IN/OUT SRAM (separation) Data line to SRAM before are separation
146 5V Power
147 SD02 IN/OUT SRAM (separation) Data line to SRAM before are separation
148 SD03 IN/OUT SRAM (separation) Data line to SRAM before are separation
149 GND Power
150 SD04 IN/OUT SRAM (separation) Data line to SRAM before are separation
151 SD05 IN/OUT SRAM (separation) Data line to SRAM before are separation
152 SD06 IN/OUT SRAM (separation) Data line to SRAM before are separation
153 SD07 IN/OUT SRAM (separation) Data line to SRAM before are separation
154 SAD0 OUT SRAM (separation) Address line to SRAM before area separation
155 SAD1 OUT SRAM (separation) Address line to SRAM before area separation
156 SAD2 OUT SRAM (separation) Address line to SRAM before area separation
157 SAD3 OUT SRAM (separation) Address line to SRAM before area separation
158 SAD4 OUT SRAM (separation) Address line to SRAM before area separation
159 SAD5 OUT SRAM (separation) Address line to SRAM before area separation
160 SAD6 OUT SRAM (separation) Address line to SRAM before area separation
161 SAD7 OUT SRAM (separation) Address line to SRAM before area separation
162 GND Power
163 SAD8 OUT SRAM (separation) Address line to SRAM before area separation
164 SAD9 OUT SRAM (separation) Address line to SRAM before area separation
165 SAD10 OUT SRAM (separation) Address line to SRAM before area separation
166 SAD11 OUT SRAM (separation) Address line to SRAM before area separation
167 SAD12 OUT SRAM (separation) Address line to SRAM before area separation
168 SAD13 OUT SRAM (separation) Address line to SRAM before area separation
169 /f1 OUT CCD PWB CCD drive signal transfer clock (First phase)
170 /f2 OUT CCD PWB CCD drive signal transfer clock (Second phase)
171 /SH OUT CCD PWB CCD drive signal shift pulse
172 5V Power
173 RS OUT CCD PWB CCD drive signal reset pulse
174 SP OUT CCD PWB CCD drive signal sampling hold pulse
175 GND Power
176 CP OUT CCD PWB A/D conversion IC latch clock
177 BCLK OUT CCD PWB CCD shield output latch signal
178 IDIN0 INCCD PWB (ADconversion)
Image scan data (after 8bit A/D conversion)
179 IDIN1 INCCD PWB (ADconversion)
Image scan data (after 8bit A/D conversion)
180 IDIN2 INCCD PWB (ADconversion)
Image scan data (after 8bit A/D conversion)
181 IDIN3 INCCD PWB (ADconversion)
Image scan data (after 8bit A/D conversion)
182 IDIN4 INCCD PWB (ADconversion)
Image scan data (after 8bit A/D conversion)
183 IDIN5 INCCD PWB (ADconversion)
Image scan data (after 8bit A/D conversion)
184 IDIN6 INCCD PWB (ADconversion)
Image scan data (after 8bit A/D conversion)
AR-F151
11 – 9
PIN No. Signal name IN/OUT Connected to Description
185 5V Power
186 IDIN7 INCCD PWB (ADconversion)
Image scan data (after 8bit A/D conversion)
187 /SDCLK OUT CHECK Effective image area signal
188 GND Power
189 SFCLK IN Transmitter CCD drive clock (48MHz), Also used as an internal clock.
190 TEST port 0 IN AUTO SCAN TEST High: Normal Low: Test
191 /SYNC IN LSU Horizontal synchronization signal (HSYNC) from LSU
192 /LD OUT LSU Laser drive signal
193 /LEND OUT LSU Laser APC signal
194 USB-EN OUT GDI/USB PWB USB port enable signal
195 1284-EN OUT GDI/USB PWB 1284 port enable signal
196 PORTOUT26 OUT (Not used)
197 3.3V Power
198 PORTOUT25 OUT (Not used)
199 PORTOUT24 OUT (Not used)
200 GND Power
201 SGS OUT Tr array IC SPF gate solenoid
202 SRRC OUT Tr array IC SPF resist roller solenoid
203 SPUS OUT Tr array IC SPF PU solenoid
204 /READY OUT FAX PWB READY signal (Expansion PWB)
205 OP-LATCH OUT Tr array IC Latch signal for operation circuit. Data latch at LOW.
206 MRPS2 OUT Tr array IC Mirror speed control signal. Mirror speed 2 at LOW.
207 MRPS1 OUT Tr array IC Mirror speed control signal. Mirror speed 1 at LOW.
208 SPFS OUT Tr array IC SPF paper feed solenoid
209 SMSEL OUT Tr array IC SPF motor/Mirror motor select signal
210 3.3V Power
211 TC OUT Tr array IC Transfer charger control signal. ON at HIGH.
212 GRIDL OUT Tr array IC Main charger grid control signal. ON at HIGH.
213 GND Power
214 MC OUT Tr array IC Main charger control signal. ON at HIGH.
215 BIASL OUT Tr array IC DV bias voltage control signal. ON at HIGH.
216 BIASH OUT Tr array IC DV bias voltage control signal. ON at HIGH.
217 BIAS OUT Tr array IC DV bias output control signal. ON at HIGH.
218 CL OUT Tr array IC Copy lamp control signal. ON at HIGH.
219 VFMCNT OUT Tr array ICVentilation fan rotating speed control signal. Low speed at HIGH, highspeed at LOW.
220 VFM OUT Tr array IC Ventilation fan control signal. Fan ON at HIGH.
221 LDEN OUT Tr array IC Laser circuit control signal. Laser circuit ON at HIGH.
222 PMD OUT Tr array IC Polygon motor control signal. Polygon motor ON at HIGH.
223 5V Power
224 MM OUT Tr array IC Main motor control signal. Main motor ON at HIGH.
225 MPFS OUT Tr array ICManual paper feed solenoid control signal. Multi paper feed ON atHIGH.
226 GND Power
227 CPFS2 OUT Tr array ICSecond cassette paper feed solenoid control signal. Second cassettepaper feed at HIGH.
228 CPFS1 OUT Tr array ICCassette paper feed solenoid control signal. One-stage cassette paperfeed at HIGH.
229 TM OUT Tr array IC Toner motor drive output (+)
AR-F151
11 – 10
PIN No. Signal name IN/OUT Connected to Description
230 TM_ OUT Tr array IC Toner motor drive output (–)
231 CPUD15 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus
232 CPUD14 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus
233 CPUD13 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus
234 CPUD12 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus
235 CPUD11 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus
236 5V Power
237 CPUD10 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus
238 CPUD9 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus
239 GND Power
240 CPUD8 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus
241 CPUD7 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus
242 CPUD6 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus
243 CPUD5 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus
244 CPUD4 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus
245 CPUD3 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus
246 CPUD2 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus
247 CPUD1 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus
248 CPUD0 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus
249 3.3V Power
250 /CPUWR IN CPU CPU write signal
251 /CPURD IN CPU CPU read signal
252 GND Power
253 CPUCLK IN CPU CPU system clock
254 GND Power
255 TEST PORT1 IN AUTO SCAN TEST High: Normal Low: Test
256 /SCANST IN CPU (I/O) Scanner process start signal
∗ The signals which are hatched are added or revised to or from AL-1000.
(3) Expanded PWB interface sectionThe MCU PWB and the expanded PWB are connected by CN5 connector to make serial communication (UART).The FAX PWB uses signals in Table A, and the PCL PWB uses signals in Table B.Recognition of FAX PWB or PCL PWB:If /FREADY is LOW, the FAX PWB expansion is recognized.If /PREADY is LOW, the PCL PWB expansion is recognized.
OUTD6
OUTD1
OUTD13
/PCLPRD
/F-RESET
/FAXCS
OUTD8
OUTD11
/PCLACK
/PAGE
OUTD10
OUTD5
/PCLREQ
OUTD0
/FAXPRD
/PREADY
OUTD3
/FREADY
OUTD12
OUTD15
OUTD2
/FAXACK
OUTD14
OUTD9
/HSYNC
/FAXREQ
/PCLCS
OUTD4
OUTD7
FTXD
/FCTS
FRXD
/SCANST
/READY
/POFF
/PRSTART
/FRTS
12V
3.3V
5V
0.1u
C137
0.1u
C135
0.1u
C134
TX25-60P-23ST-H1
CN5
SBO-02SANL1
18p
C141
0.1u
C118
47u 25V
C3
0.1u
C119
47u 16V
C5
0.1u
C117
SBO-02SANL2
SBO-02SANL3
47u 16V
C2
18p
C143
10JR132
18p
C140
10JR13010JR128
10JR131
18p
C142
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
16
15
17
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
/FRTS
OUTD1
OUTD11
/FREADY
OUTD12
OUTD0
/FAXPRD
/PREADY
OUTD7
OUTD8
OUTD10
FRXD
/PCLCS
/FAXREQ
/FAXACK
F-RESET
/PCLREQ
/HSYNC
/PRLINE
/PCLACK
OUTD6
OUTD13
/FAXCS
/FCTS
FTXD
OUTD15
/POFF
OUTD4
/PCLPRD
OUTD3
OUTD9
/FPAGE
OUTD2
OUTD14
OUTD5
/SCLINE
/READY
(1-D2)
(5-E1)
(5-E1)
(5-E1)
(7-E2)(1-D4)
(1-E1)
(1-C1)
(5-A3)
(7-E2) (7-D1)
(7-E1)
(7-E1)
(7-E1) (7-E2)
(5-E2)
(5-E2)
(5-E2)
(5-E2)
(5-E2)
(5-E2)
(5-E2)
(5-E2)
(5-E2)
(5-E2)
(5-E2)
(5-E2)
(5-E2)
(5-E2)
(5-E2)
(5-E1)
(5-E2)
(5-E2)
(5-E2)
(5-E2)
(5-E2)
(5-E2)
PCL/FAX CN
AR-F151
11 – 11
Table A (Signals used in the FAX PWB)
PIN No.(CN5)
Signalname
IN/OUT Descriptions
3 /SCLINE OUT Effective input image area
6 FTXD OUT Serial communication data
7 /FRTS OUTSerial reception ready(Machine side)
12 /F-RESET OUT Reset signal
13 /HSYNC OUT Horizontal sync signal
14 ∼ 21,44 ∼ 51
OUTD1 ∼OUTD15
OUT Data to the expanded PWB
24 /FAXREQ OUT Data transfer REQ signal
25 /FAXCS IN OUTD bus enable signal
33 /PRLINE OUT Effective print area
34 /FPAGE IN Page data READY
35 /FREADY IN FAX PWB recognition signal
36 /READY OUTREADY signal on themachine side
37 FRXD IN Serial communication data
38 /FCTS INSerial reception READY(FAX side)
43 /POFF OUT Power OFF signal
54 /FAXPRD IN Video data from FAX PWB
55 /FAXACK IN Data transfer ACK signal
Table B (Signals used in PCL PWB)
PIN No.(CN5)
Signalname
IN/OUT Descriptions
5 /PREADY IN PCL PWB recognition signal
6 FTXD OUT Serial communication data
7 /FRTS OUTSerial reception READY(Machine side)
12 /F-RESET OUT Reset signal
13 /HSYNC OUT Horizontal sync signal
34 /FPAGE IN Page data READY
36 /READY OUTREADY signal on themachine side
37 FRXD IN Serial communication data
38 /FCTS INSerial reception READY(PCL side)
52 /PCLPRD IN Video data from PCL PWB
(4) 1284/USB circuit select control sectionThe GDI/USB PWB is connected to CN15 connector to control switch-ing between IEEE1284 port and USB port. If USB cable isn’t connected to the GDI/USB PWB, the /1284-EN signalbecomes LOW to allow the user of IEEE1284 port.
If USB cable is connected, the /USB-EN signal becomes LOW to allowthe use of USB port.Since USB has priority, when USB cable is connected, it is selected.That is, when USB cable is connected, IEEE1284 port (parallel port) isdisabled.
USB-IN
/1284-EN
USB-ON
/USB-EN
/GDI-IN
/ACK
PARAAD5
SLCT
PARAAD6
PARAAD7
/STB
PARAAD1
/REV
PARAAD3
PARAAD0
INIT
BUSY
/SLCTIN
/AUTOFD
PE
/FAULT
PARAAD2
PARAAD4
3.3V
5V
31FT-BT-VK-N
CN15
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
(5-A3)
(5-A3)
(1-B1)
(5-A3)
(5-D3)
(5-D2)
(5-D3)
(5-D3)
(2-D3)
(5-D2)
(5-D3)
(5-D3)
(5-D2)
(5-D3)
(5-D2)
(5-D3)
(5-D3)
(5-D2)
(5-D3)
(5-D3)
(5-D2)
(5-D2)
(5-D2)
GDI/USB CN
AR-F151
11 – 12
117HBE
118ADS
119DDIN
120AD0
121AD1
122AD2
123AD3
124AD4
125VCCD9
126AD5
127AD6
128AD7
129AD8
130AD9
131GNDD9
132AD10
1AD11
2AD12
3AD13
4AD14
5VCCD1
6AD15
7A16
8A17
9A18
10A19
11GNDD1
12A20
13A21
14A22
15A23
16PDO
17VCCD2
83 VCCA2
82 GNDA2
81 PTMP
80 SBG
79 SCVO
78 SVI
77 GNDA1
76 VCCA1
75 GNDD5
74 PMPH0
73 PMPH1
72 PMPH2
71 PMPH3
70 SMPH0
69 SMPH1
68 SMPH2
67 SMPH3
66 VCCD5
65 PEXT
64 PFAIL
63 SOSCO
62 SOSCI
61 RST
60 WDT
59 BUZCLK
58 DMRQ3
57 MWSI
56 URXD
55 UTEN
54 PIO0
53 PIO1
52 SNH
51 GNDD4
18
SDFD
BK
19
SDIN
20
SDO
UT
21
SLS
22
SCLK
1
23
SPD
W
24
MW
SK
25
GN
DD
2
26
DM
AK3
27
SDIS
28
DM
AK1
29
SCLK
2
30
STB3
31
STB2
32
VCC
D3
33
CTT
L
34
STB1
35
STB0
36
FOSC
I
37
FOSC
O
38
GN
DD
3
39
CC
LK
40
INT0
41
INT1
42
INT2
43
INT3
44
INTR
45
UR
EN
46
UTX
D
47
MW
SO
48
SBYP
S
49
PCLK
50
VCC
D4
TL/EE/11331-54
116
GN
DD
8
115
HO
LD
114
HLC
A
113
WE0
112
WE1
111
OE
110
SEL1
109
VCC
D8
108
SEL0
107
SEL3
106
RAS
0
105
RAS
1
104
CAS
103
CW
AIT
102
GN
DD
7
101
MA1
100
MA2
99
MA3
98
MA4
97
MA5
96
VCC
D7
95
MA6
94M
A793
MA8
92
MA9
91
MA1
0
90
GN
DD
6
89
MA1
1
88
MA1
2
87
MA1
3
86
MA1
4
85
MA1
5
84
VCC
D6
132-Pin FQFP Package
3. FAX PWB Functional block diagram (AR-F151 only)
4. LSI pin layout (AR-F151 only)(1) NSFX200 (IC503) pin layout
Speaker
LCD PWB
PWB
Prog.ROM
CPU Bus
FX164
Image.Memory
LC8213
Image. Bus
ASIC Buf. Mem.
Main MemoryFX200
NCU PSTN
PCL/FAX MCU LZ9FH19
SCANDATAMemory
PRINT DATA
AR-F151
11 – 13
NSFX200 (IC503) supplies
Signal Pin Numbers Descrlption
GNDA1 ∼ 2 77 82 Analog ground.
GNDD1 ∼ 9 11 25 38 51 75 90 102 116 131
Digital ground.
VCCA1 ∼ 2 76 83 Analog Power — 5V supplyfor analog circuits.
VCCD1 ∼ 9 5 17 32 50 66 84 96 109 125
Digital Power — 5V supplyfor digital circuits.
Input SignalsSignal Pin Numbers Description
CTTL 33 CPU Clock — CPU clock thatis used for clocking theNS32FX200.
DMRQ3 58 DMA Request — Input forDMA channel 3 request.
FOSCI 36 High-Speed Oscillator —(49.1520 MHz) Asynchronous.When an external oscillator isused, FOSCO should be leftunconnected or loaded withno more than 5 pF of straycapacitance.
HBE 117 High Byte Enable — Statussignal used to enable datatransfers on the mostsignificant byte of the data bus.
HLDA 114 Hold Acknowledge — Issuedby the CPU to indicate it hasreleased the bus in responseto a HOLD request.
INT0 ∼ 3 40 41 42 43
Interrupt In — Asynchronous.External maskable prioritizedinterrupt requests.
MWSI 57 General purpose input pin.
PFAIL 64 Power Fall Indication — Anasynchronous signal whichforces the NS32FX 200 intofreeze mode.
PTMP 81 Not used.
RST 61 Reset In — Asynhronousreset input from the CPU.
SBG 80 Not used.
SDIN 19 Sigma-Delta Data In —Asynchronous input from theSDC analog receiver.
SOSCI 62 Low-Speed Oscillator —(3.2768 kHz or 455 kHz)Asynchronous. When anexternal oscillator is used,SOSCO should be leftunconnected or loaded withno more than 5 pF of straycapacitance.
SVI 78 Scanner Video In — Analogcurrent from the scannersample and hold circuit.
URXD 56 UART Recelve —Asynchronous input or generalpurpose input pin.
UTEN 55 General purpose input pin.
Output Signals
Signal Pin Numbers Description
BUZCLK 59 Buzzer Clock —Programmable frequencyclock for the buzzer.
CAS 104 DRAM Column AddressStrobe — Column addressstrobe for DRAM banksrefresh.
CCLK 39 CPU Double Clock — FeedsCPU’S OSCIN. Asynchronous.
CWAIT 103 Continuous Walt — Lowextends the memory cycle ofthe CPU.
DMAK1 28 General purpose output pin.
DMAK3 26 DMA Acknowledge —Output for DMA channel 3acknowledge or generalpurpose output pin.
FOSCO 37 High-Speed Oscillator Out —Asynchronous.This line isused as the return path forthe crystal (if used).
HOLD 115 Hold Request — When low,HOLD requests the bus fromthe CPU to perform DMAoperations or to insert idlebus cycles.
INTR 44 Interrupt Request — Lowindicates that an interruptrequest is being output to theCPU.
MA1 ∼ 15 101 100 99 98 97 95 94 93 92 91 89 88 87 86 85
Memory Address Bus —Multiplexed DRAM address.
MWSK 24 General purpose output pin.
OE 111 Output Enable — Used bythe addressed device to gatethe data onto the data bus.
PDO 16 Not used.
PEXT 65 Not used.
PMPH0 ∼ 3 74 73 72 71
Output port.
RAS0 106 DRAM Row AddressStrobes — Row addressstrobe for DRAM banks 0and 1.
RAS1 105 RAS1 is not used.
SCLK1 22 General purpose output pin.
SCLK2/DAMK0 29 Scanner Clock 2 — Output,DMA Acknowledge-output forDMA channel 0 acknowledge.
SCVO 79 Scanner CompensatedVideo Out — Analog currentfor use by ABC or optionalvideo enhanement circuit.
SDFDBK 18 Sigma-Delta Feedback —Feedback input to the SDCanalog receiver.Asynchronous output signal.
AR-F151
11 – 14
Signal Pin Numbers Description
SDIS/DMAK2 27 General purpose output pin.
SDOUT 20 Sigma-Delta Data Out —Input to the SDC analogtransmitter.
SEL0 108 Zone Select — Used toadderss the device accordingto the selected zone.
SEL1 110
SEL3 107
SLS 21 General purpose output pin.
SMPH0 ∼ 3 70 69 68 67
Output port.
SOSCO 63 Low-Speed Oscillator Out — Asynchronous. This line isused as the return path forthe crystal (if used).
SPDW 23 General purpose output pin.
STB0-3 35 34 31 30
General purpose output pin.
WDT 60 WATCHDOG Trap — TrapsCPU execution whenWATCHDOG detects error.
WEO 113 Write Enable — Used by theaddressed device to get thedata from the data bus.WE0for even and WE1 for oddbytes.
WE1 112
Input/Output Signals
Signal Pin Numbers Description
A16 ∼ 23 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15
High Order Address Bus —The most significant eight bitsof the CPU address bus.
AD0 ∼ 15 120 121 122123 124 126127 128 129130 132 1 2 3 4 6
Address/Data bus —Multiplexed address/datainformation.
ADS 118 Address Strobe — Controlsmemory access, and signalsthe beginning of a bus cycle.
DDIN 119 Data Direction In —Indicates the direction of datatransfer during a bus cycle.
MWSO 47 General purpose I/O pin.
PCLK/DMRQ1 49 General purpose I/O pin.
PIO0-1 54 53 General Purpose I/O Pins.
SBYPS/DMRQ2 48 General purpose I/O pin.
SNH/DMRQ0 52 Sample and Hold — Outputto scanner sample and holdcircuit or DMA Request-inputfor DMA channel 0 reques.
UREN 45 General purpose I/O pin.
UTXD 46 UART Transmit — Output.
(2) NS32FX164 (IC507)
SuppllesVCC Power
+5 V positive supply.GND Ground.
Ground reference for both on-chip logic and outputdrivers.
Input SignalsRSTI Reset Input.
Schmitt triggered, asynchronous signal used to generate aCPU reset.Note: The reset signal is a true asynchronous input.
Therefore, no external synchronizing circuit isneeded.
HOLD Hold Request.When active, causes the CPU to release the bus for DMAor multiprocessing purposes.Note: If the HOLD signal is generated asynchronously, its
set up and hold times may be violated. In this case,it is recommended to synchronize it with CTTL tominimize the possibility of metastable states.TheCPU provides only one synchronization stage tominimize the HLDA latency. This is to avoid speeddegradations in cases of heavy HOLD activity (i.e.,DMA controller cycles interleaved with CPUcycles).
INT Interrupt.A low level on this pin requests a maskable interrupt. INTmust be kept asserted until the interrupt is acknowledged.
NMI Non-Maskable Interrupt.A High-to-Low transition on this signal requests a non-maskable interrupt.Note: INT and NMI are true asynchronous inputs. There-
fore, no external synchronizing circuit is needed.CWAIT Continuous Walt.
Causes the CPU to insert continuous wait states ifsampled low at the end of T2 and each following T-State.
OSCIN Crystal/External Clock Input.Input from a crystal or an external clock source.
9ST2
8ST3
7PFS
6DDIN
5ADS
4SPC
3VCC
2HBE
1HOLDA
68HOLD
67RSTO
66RES
65RES
64CWAIT
63GND
62OSCIN
61RSTI
27 A18
28 A17
29 A16
30 VCC
31 AD15
32 AD14
33 AD13
34 AD12
35 AD11
36 AD10
37 AD9
38 AD8
39 GND
40 AD7
41 AD6
42 AD5
43 AD4
10
GN
D
11
ST1
12
ST0
13
ILO
14
NM
I
15
INT
16
U/S
17
BPU
18
IAS
19
IOU
T
20
VCC
21
A23
22
A22
23
A21
24
A20
25
A19
26
GN
D
60
OSC
OU
T
59
TSO
58
WR
57
RD
56
GND
55
CTT
L1
54
VCC
53
DBE
52
GND
51
VCC
50
CTT
L2
49
FCLK
48
ALE
47
AD0
46
AD1
45
AD2
44
AD3
NS32FX164NS32FV16
NS32FX161
68-Pin PCC Package
AR-F151
11 – 15
Output SignalsA16 ∼ A23 ∗ High-Order Address Bits.
These are the most significant 8 bits of the memory ad-dress bus.
HBE ∗ High Byte Enable.Status signal used to enable data transfers on the mostsignificant byte of the data bus.
ST0 ∼ 3 Status.Not used.
U/S User/Supervisor.Not used.
ILO Interlocked Operation.Not used.
HLDA Hold Acknowledge.Activated by the CPU in response to the HOLD input to in-dicate CPU has released the bus.
PFS Program Flow Status.A pulse on this signal indicates the beginning of executionof instruction.
BPU BPU Cycle.Not used.
RSTO Reset Output.This signal becomes active when RSTI is low, initiating asystem reset.
RD Read Strobe.Activated during CPU or DMA read cycles to enable read-ing of data from memory or peripherals.
WR Write Strobe.Activated during CPU or DMA write cycles to enable writ-ing of data to memory or peripherals.
TSO Timing State Output.Not used.
DBE Data Buffers Enable.Used to control external data buffers. It is active when thedata buffers are to be enabled.
OSCOUT Crystal Output.Not used.
IAS SPecial Cycle Address Strobe.Not used.
CTTL1 – 2 System Clock.Output clock for bus timing. CTTL1 and CTTL2 must beexternally connected together.
FCLK Fast Clock.Not used.
ALE Address Latch Enable.Active high signal that can be used to control external ad-dress latches.
IOUT Interrupt OutputNot used.
Input-Output SignalsAD0 ∼ 15 * Address/Data Bus.
Multiplexed Address/Data Information. Bit 0 is the leastsignificant bit of each.
SPC Slave Processor Control.Not used.
DDIN * Data Direction.Status signal indicating the direction of the data transferduring a bus cycle. During HOLD acknowledge this signalbecomes an input and determines the activation of RD orWR.
ADS * Address StrobeControls address latches; signals the beginning of a buscycle. During HOLD acknowledge this signal becomes aninput and the CPU monitors it to detect the beginning ofa DMA cycle and generate the relevant strobe signals.When a DMA is used, ADS should be pulled up to VCC
through a 10 kΩ resistor.
(3) LC8213K (IC505) Pin LayoutI: Input pinO: Output pinB: Bidirectional pinP: Power pinNC: Not connected
No. Pin name Type
1 CS I
2 RD I
3 WR I
4 A2 I
5 A1 I
6 A0 I
7 VDD P
8 NC
9 D7 B
10 D6 B
11 D5 B
12 D4 B
13 VSS P
14 D3 B
15 D2 B
16 D1 B
17 D0 B
18 NC
19 NC
20 IREQ O
21 DREQ O
22 DACK I
23 NC
24 NC
25 NC
26 NC
27 RESET I
28 CLK I
29 VSS P
30 TEST4 I
31 VDD P
32 TEST3 I
33 TEST2 I
34 TEST1 I
35 TEST0 I
36 NC
37 BREQ O
38 BACK I
39 IDREQ I
40 IDACK O
No. Pin name Type
41 AEN O
42 AST O
43 MDEN O
44 MRD O
45 MWR O
46 IORD O
47 IOWR O
48 LDE O
49 UDE O
50 READY I
51 DTC O
52 VSS P
53 NC
54 MA23 O
55 MA22 O
56 MA21 O
57 MA20 O
58 MA19 O
59 MA18 O
60 MA17 O
61 MA16 O
62 MA/MD15 O
63 VSS P
64 MA/MD14 B
65 MA/MD13 B
66 MA/MD12 B
67 MA/MD11 B
68 MA/MD10 B
69 MA/MD9 B
70 MA/MD8 B
71 MA/MD7 B
72 VSS P
73 VDD P
74 MA/MD6 B
75 MA/MD5 B
76 MA/MD4 B
77 MA/MD3 B
78 MA/MD2 B
79 MA/MD1 B
80 MA/MD0 B
AR-F151
11 – 16
(4) CPU interfaceTerminal
namePinNo.
I/O Function
CS 1 I Chip select for the CPU to accessthe LC8213 (low sctive).
RD 2 I Read.Set to “L” when the CPU isthe read out the LC8213 register.
WR 3 I Write.Set to “L” when the CPU isto the LC8213 register.
A2 4 I Address input for when the CPUaccesses LC8213.A1 5
A0 6D7 9 I/O
3 stateBidirectional 8-bit data bus
D6 10D5 11D4 12D3 14D2 15D1 16D0 17
IREQ 20 O Interrupt request signal for theCPU. By reading out the INTR(interrupt request register) the CPUcan find the cause of theinterruption.IREQ is set to “L” whenthe CPU reads INTR.
DREQ 21 O DMA request signal for the externalDMA controller. This will be set to“H” in the following cases. • Data exists in the EFIFO during
the coding processes.• An empty space exists in the
DFIFO during decoding processes.• The DBUF can read/write during
data transfer between the imagememory bus and CPU bus.
DACK 22 I DMA acknowledge signal from theexternal DMA comtroller.If DACK isset to “L” during coding ordecoding, EFIFO and DFIFO willbe accessed. DBUF will beaccessed if DACK is set to “L”during data transfer between theimage memory bus and CPU bus.
(5) Image memory interfaceTerminal
namePin No.
I/O Function
MA23 54 O3 state
Not used.
MA22 55
MA21 56
MA20 57
MA19 56
MA18 59
MA17 60
MA16 61
MA/MD15 62 I/O3 state
Not used.
MA/MD14 64 Low-order 16-bit address and 16-bit data bus for the image memory.MA/MD13 65
MA/MD12 66
MA/MD11 67
MA/MD10 68
MA/MD9 69
MA/MD8 70
Terminalname
Pin No.
I/O Function
MA/MD7 71
MA/MD6 74
MA/MD5 75
MA/MD4 76
MA/MD3 77
MA/MD2 78
MA/MD1 79
MA/MD0 80
AEN 41 O This is set to “L” when theLC8213 is the bus master to theimage memory.If AEN = “H”, MA/MD, MRD,MWR, IORD, IOWR, UDE andLDE will be a HiZ output.
AST 42 O This signal indicates that anaddress is being output toMA/MD15 ∼ MA/MD0.
MDEN 43 O This signal indicates that theLC8213 is using MA/MD15 ∼ MD0 as data buses.
USE 49 I/O3 state
Not used.
LDE 48 I/O3 state
This signal indicates that the low-order bits of the data bus arebeing used.
MRD 44 O3 state
This is set to “L” when data isbeing read out of the imagememory.
MWR 45 O3 state
This is set to “L” when data isbeing written into the imagememory.
IORD 46 O3 state
Not used.
IOWR 47 O3 state
Not used.
BREQ 37 O This signal is used for the LC8213to request usage rights from theimage memory bus.
BACK 38 I Input signal allowing the LC8213to use the image memory bus.
IDREQ 39 I Not used.
IDACK 40 O Not used.
READY 50 I This signal is used to delay theread/write signal when using lowspeed image memory or an I/Odevice.
DTC 51 O Not used.
(6) OthersTerminal
namePin No. I/O Function
CKL 28 I External clock (Max.20NHz)
RESET 27 I Reset
TEST0 35 I For testing.This is normally fixedto “L”.TEST1 34
TEST2 33
TEST3 32
TEST4 30
VDD 7, 31,73
power supply (+ 5V)
VSS 13, 29,52, 63,72
GND
AR-F151
11 – 17
(7) MBCG46533-175 (IC 509) Pin LoyoutPin# Signal Description
1:18 IA14:IA0 Image bus address
19 AI_LINEINT Scanner line interuppt toFX200 INT1 pin
20 CEP_*LED Chip select to image memory
21 AI_TRIG Tigger signal to LC82103
22 AI_*IPDACK DMA ack. sugnal to LC82103
23 IM_*WR Write strobe to imagememory
24 AI_CEP*DREQ DMA request to FX200
25 AI_BACK Bus ack.signal to LC8213
28 IP_CLK1 CLK1 of the LC82103
32 AI_*CEPDMAK DMA ack.signal from FX200
33 IM_IPDREQ DMA request from LC82103
34: 42 IDATA7: IDATA0 Image bus data
44 IM_IPSH SH signal from LC82103
45 IM_BREQ Bus request from LC8213
46 CEP_DREQ DMA request from LC8213
47 CEP_*AEN Address enable signal fromLC8213
48 CEP_AST Address strobe signal fromLC8213
49 *RESET Reset signal from LBPengine
51 VCKL Not used
53 *DREADY DREADY signal from LBP
54 ERROR ERROR signal from LBP
55 *DCRDY DCRDY signal from LBP
56 *HSYNC Horizontal syc.signal fromLBP
57 *SCLK SCLK signal from LBP
58 VSYNC Vertical signal from LBP
59 PLL-CLK Basic clock from PLL
62 *DDATA Video data to LBP
63 *DSRDY DSRDY signal from LBP
64 *SDATA SDATA for LBP
65 RES-*ERR RESERR to LBP
66 *DPAGE DPAGE to LBP
67 *DPRIM DPRIM to LBP
69 AI-*MWE Write strobe to 16MDRAM
70 AI-*ICAS L-CAS signal to 16MDRAM
71 AI-*UCAS U-CAS signal to 16MDRAM
73 *ICAS CAS signal from FX200
74 *IWEI Write enable signal for evenbyte on data bus
75 *IWE0 Write enable signal for oddbyte on data bus
76 FX1_*RSTO Reset signal from FX164
77 AI_*IRD read strobe to I/O device
78 AI_*IWR write strobe to I/O device
80 AI_*SANWRL Strobe signal for LD0:8 bus
81:89 LD0:LD7 Buffered AD bus for slowdevices access
90 AI_*CSIP Chip select signal forLC82103
91 AI_*CSCEP Chip select signal for LC8213
92 AI_*RDKRB Read strobe signal for74LS244
93 AI_*FIFOA9 WPSFIFO address signal
Pin# Signal Description
94 AI_*CSCONF Chip select signal for64KSRAM
95 AI_*WRLED Not used
98 F2_*SEL1 Zone select signal fromFX200,
99 F2_*SEL3 Zone select signal fromFX200
100 F2_*DMAK0 DMA ask.signal from FX200
101 F1_*DBE Data buffer enable signalfrom FX164
102 F1_*DDIN Status signal indicating thedirection of the data busfrom FX164
103 F1_*RD Read strobe signal fromFX164
104 F1_*WR Write strobe signal fromFX164
108 F1_CTTL1 System clock from FX164
110 F1_*HLDA Hold Ask. signal from FX164
111 F1_ALE Address latch signal fromFX164
112:129 AD15:AD0 FX164 AD bus
132 *XINT 1284 INT signal
133 XSELECT 1284 SELECT signal
134 XPERR 1284 PERR signal
135 XBUSY 1284 Busy signal
136 XACK 1284 ACK signal
137 XFAULT 1284 FAUL signal
138:146 BPCDATA1:BPCDATA8 1284 buffered data
148 *XSTROBE 1284 STROBE signal
149 *XSLECTION 1284 SELECT IN signal
150 *XAUTOFD 1284 AUTOFD signal
151 AI_1284IN 1284 buffer direction controlsignal
152 AI_ECPINT 1284 interrupt signal toFX200
153 AI_*DREQ
155 XTST TEST pin
156 SW4M FIFO RAM size select signal
157:174 AI_FIFOD0:AI_FIFOD15
WIPS FIFO Data
175 AI_FIFO*WR WPS FIFO write strobe
177 AI_FIFO*CAS WPS FIFO CAS signal
178 AI_FIFO*RAS WPS FIFO RAS signal
179:188 AI_FIFOA0:AI_FIFOA8 WPS FIFO address signal
190:193 AI_SMPH0:AI_SMPH3 Scanner motor phase signal
194:195 AI_CUR0:AI_CUR1 Scanner motor currentcontrol signal
197 AI_*CLK2 CLK2 signal for CCD
198 AI_*CLK1 CLK1 signal for CCD
199 AI_*CLAMP CLAMP signal for CCD
202 AI_*LAMPON Scanner lamp control signal
203 AI_*TGCCD TG signal for CCD
204 AI_*RSCCD RS signal for CCD
205 PNL_*SCOVER Scanner cover open signal
206 *B4SEN B4 sensor signal (Not usedin not-Japan model)
207 *PISEN Paper in Sensor on Scannersignal
208 *ORSEN Original sensor on scannersignal
AR-F151
11 – 18
5. FAX PWB circuit description (AR-F151only)
(1) SummaryThe FAX PWB performs the following operations:• Interface with the MCU PWB (Scan data input, print image data out-
put)• FAX operation panel control• FAX image conversion• Interface with the public telephone line
NS FX164 is used as the CPU, and FX200 is used as the system con-troller. An 8M OTPROM is used as the program ROM, and16M DRAMas the main memory. To store the registered telephone numbers, etc.,64K SRAM (backed up by battery) and the clock IC are used.
LC8213 is used to perform data compression and expansion.ASIC performs laser printer control and interface with and the MCUPWB.The NCU circuit connects with the telephone line.
(2) CPU sectionThe NS32FX164 (having 32bit core and 16bit DSP core) is used as theCPU in combination with the system controller NS32FX200. The 32bitCPU core is used to control the system. By combination with the 16bitDSP core and the Sigma Delta Coded circuit in the NS32FX200, theMODEM function is realized. The NS32FX200 is provided with theDRAM controller function, the interrupt controller function, the timerfunction, and the DMA controller function, which are used to control thesystem.
(3) MemoryA DRAM of 16M (1M × 16 bit composition) is used as the mainmemory. An 8M OPTROM (512K × 16 bit composition) is used as theprogram memory. The NJU6355 is used as the clock IC, and 64K SRAM of 8K × 8bit isused as the configuration memory which stores various settings. Thesetwo IC’s are backed up by a 3V lithium battery even when the ACpower is turned off. The configuration memory is also used as the buff-er memory in PC-FAX.
(4) Scanner image storing processASIC (LZ9FH19) receives scanner image data processed in the MCUPWB and stores in the scan data memory.ASIC outputs image data to the image data bus and performs com-pression and expansion with LC8213 according to the CPU’s instruc-tion.
(5) Compression, expansionBy combination of LC8213 and 256K SRAM, compression and expan-sion are performed.
This IC converts bit map data into coded data in MH, MR, or MMR for-mat or converts coded data of MH, MR, or MMR format into bit mapdata. In FAX sending, bit map data is outputted from LZ9FH19 to theimage bus are coded in MMR format and outputted to the CPU bus.The coded data are stored in the main memory. In FAX reception, thecoded data are read from the main memory and converted into bit mapdata by this IC and outputted to the image bus.The outputted data are sent through the ASIC to the MCU PWB andprinted. The 256K SRAM connected to the image bus are used as thebuffer memory.
(6) ASIC section This ASIC of about 30,000 gates is composed of the three blocks.• SCL block: Scanner control and bus control• 1284 block: Interface section with PC• LBP: Laser printer engine control and FIFO memory controlRESET_GEN forms reset signals in ASIC, and CLOCK GEN formsclock signals in ASIC. HFKDIV divides the basic video frequency in-putted to the ASIC.
SCL block
The SCL block performs scanner control, timing control, and bus con-trol.The scanner control block does not use the MCU because the MCUtakes an image data.The sensor block receives input of the sensor and switch state on theADF. The bus control block performs the CPU bus control, image buscontrol, and DMA transmission between them. The timing control blockforms CCD clock signals and DMA signals.
CPU NS32FX164
32bit CPU CORE16bit DSP module
System controller NS32FX200
DRAM controllerInterrupt controllerTimerDMA controllerSigma Delta Coded
Analog circuit
NCU circuit
Public Telephone line
CPU Bus CPU
Interface
Compression
Expansion
Image Bus Interface
LC8213
Image Bus
256K SRAM
LBP
ECP
SCL
Reset_gen
ASIC
HfckdivClock gen
Scanner control
Motor control
Lamp modulation
Bus control
DMA control
CAPTURE
Image buscontrolTiming control
Sensors
TC Tim
e slo
t
CCd timing conrol
LC8213 Dreq out
ECP Dreq out
CTT
L di
v2 m
ain
clock
CTT
L fro
m F
X
LC82
103
CC
D ti
min
g
LC82
13 D
req
in
ECP
Dre
q in
LC82
103
DMA
han
dsha
ke
LC82
13 B
REQ
LC82
13 B
ACK
LC82
13 c
ontro
s
Imag
e m
emor
y ad
dres
s
Imag
e m
emor
y da
ta b
us
Imag
e m
emor
y co
ntro
l
Address
FX data in
FX data out
Controls
LBP READY
LBP DACK/wrne
Data tp LBP
Con
trol
FX A
D B
US
Control
Address
FX data in
FX data out
FX d
ata
out
Con
trol
Imag
e ad
dres
s
Imag
e m
emor
y co
ntro
l
LC82
13 D
ATA
DAC
K
DREQ
Imag
e da
ta o
n
Imag
e wr
neC
aptu
r on
AR-F151
11 – 19
The LBP block controls the laser printer engine and the FIFO memory.Since sending/receiving of command/status with the LBP engine ismade in the serial line, serial/parallel conversion is made in this blockto make interface between the CPU and the LBP engine. The refer-ence video signal generated in the PLL circuit is made to the video fre-quency necessary for the dividing circuit. Video data are sent to thelaser engine in synchronization with this signal. A 16M DRAM (1M × 16 bit) is used as the printer FIFO memory, whichis used as the buffer memory in PC-scan.
(7) NCU circuitThe NCU circuit has the following functions:• Matching between the public line and Sigma Delta circuit (MODEM
circuit)• To make OFF-hook state• Ring detection • External telephone connection • Detection of OFF-hook state of the external telephone
Relay RY501 connects the public line and the matching transformer.Relay RY501 connects the DC load line and the public line.When RY501 is open, the external telephone is connected to the publictelephone line. For calling sound from the public line, the signal is rec-tified and inputted to the photo coupler PC817 ISO502 to generateNCU_RDT signal.
The CPU judges whether calling is made from the public line or notreferring to the frequency of the NCU_RDT signal. By turning on RY501, the public line loop is closed. Then response ofMFP is transmitted to the public line. (OFF-hook state). When the dialpulse is selected, RY501 is turned on/off according to the telephonenumber to transmit the remote telephone number to the publictelephone line. In the tone pulse, the tone signal from the Sigma Deltacircuit is passed through the matching transformer to the publictelephone line.The NCU_LPCDT signal is generated fromPC814 (ISO503) accordingto the potential generated in R513. When the external telephone is inOFF-hook state, a potential is generated in R513 to drive theMCU_LPCDT signal LOW. The CPU monitors the signal and judgeswhether the external telephone is busy or not.
(8) Sigma Delta circuitThe Sigma Delta circuit converts analog signals passed through thematching transformer into digital signals. The digital signals(FX200_SDOUT) outputted from FX200 are inputted to the analogswitch to generate digital switch for switching with +5V/5V. The signalsare converted into analog signals in the LPF circuit.
On the other hand, the analog signals inputted through the matchingtransformer are amplified in the AMP circuit. By combination withFX_200SDBFK signal and the integrator/comparator, the FX_200SDINsignal is made and inputted to FX200.
(9) Data flowThe data flow in each reception mode is shown below.
The FAX data from the public line are stored in the 16M DRAM. In thiscase, the data are stored in the received format, that is in MH, MR orMMR format. When reception of one page data is completed, printingis performed.
CLK
RST
RDYLED
CS_LBP
CA[5:0]
DATA2FPGA[15:0]
IWR_
IRD_
D_LBP2SCL[15:0]
LBP_WE_
IMG2LBP[7:0]
LBP_RDY
SCL
Module
PLL
HFKDIV
PLL_C
LK
J[3:0]
VCLKHS_
LBP moduleECPmodule
RE
SE
RR
HS
YN
C_
SEL
ELDATA[5:0]
ELWR_
ELRD_
PA RERR
LEDATA[7:0]
LERDYSTALLSTSCH
DPRIM
ELDATA[7:0]
PAPPY
VSYNC
DREADYRESETERRORDDATADPAGEDSRDYDCRDYSCLKSDATA
RAS_CAS_WR_OEADDR[9:0]DATA[15:0]
DRAM256Kx16
LBPENCINE
RLE
Rublicline
Externaltelephone
Matchingtransformer
Ringdetection
Loopcurrentdetection
NCU_LPCDT
NCU_RDT
Sigma Deltacircuit
To CPU
To CPU
T501
RY501
R513
ISO502
ISO503
LF347+5V
-5V
FX200_SDOUT
HC4053(IC605)HC4053(IC605)
LPF LIS
FX200_CAL
LF347
FX200_GAIN
LM311 LF347
HC4053(IC516)
FX200_SDIN
FX200_SDFBK
AMP.Integrator,Comparator
+5V
-5V
Matching
transformer
Reference voltage
FX164 FX200
NCU
Main Memory
LC8213
ASIC
Buf. Mem.
Prog.ROM
Image.Memory
Image Bus
CPU Bus
PSTN
CompressedImage
(FAX reception) Reception operation
FAX/PCLMCU PWB
FAX/PCLMCU PWBLZ9FH19
SCANDATAMemory
LCD PWB
AR-F151
11 – 20
The FAX data stored in the main memory are transmitted to LC8213,where they are converted into bit map data, which are sent to ASICand transmitted to the FAX/PCL MCU PWB for printing.
LZ9FH19 receives image data from FAX/PCL MCU and stores in thescan data memory. The mage data are transmitted to LC52113 andconverted into MMR format. The converted data are stored in the mainmemory then read by FX200 and transmitted to the public line.
6. LCD circuit (AR-F151 only)A. OutlineThe LCD PWB is composed of the 4-bit, single-chip microprocessor,HD404344, the LCD panel, the key SW block, the LED circuit, and theshunt regulator circuit. The block diagram is shown below.The LCD PWB is composed of the key scan process block, the serialI/O process block, the LED lighting process block, the LCD displayprocess block, the reset process block, the oscillation circuit, and theLCD power circuit. These circuits are driven by 5V, and only the LCDcircuit is driven by 12V to generate 5.2V as the LCD display drive volt-age.
B. CPU pin table
Pin No. Signal name Input/Output
1 LED1 Output
2 LED2 Output
3 LCDRS Input/Output
4 LCDRW Input/Output
5 LCDB4 Input/Output
6 LCDB5 Input/Output
7 LCDB6 Input/Output
8 LCDB7 Input/Output
9 OSC1 Input
10 OSC2 Output
11 GND –
12 KEYCOM1 Output
13 KEYCOM2 Output
14 KEYCOM3 Output
15 KEYCOM4 Output
16 VCC –
17 TEST Input
18 /PANEL RESET Input
19 /SCK Input
20 SID Input
21 SOD Output
22 LCDE Output
23 KEYCOM9 Output
24 KEYCOM8 Output
25 LED3 Output
26 KEYCOM7 Output
27 KEYCOM6 Output
28 KEYCOM5 Output
FX164 FX200
NCU
Main Memory
LC8213
ASIC
Buf. Mem.
Prog.ROM
Image.Memory
CPU Bus
PSTN
CompressedImage
Image Bus
(FAX reception) Print operation
FAX/PCLMCU PWB
LZ9FH19
FAX/PCLMCU PWB
SCANDATAMemory
LCD PWB
FX164 FX200
NCU
Main Memory
ASIC
Buf. Mem.
Prog.ROM
Image.Memory
CPU Bus
PSTN
CompressedImage
Image Bus
LC8213
(FAX transmission)
FAX/PCLMCU PWB
FAX/PCLMCU PWB
LZ9FH19
SCANDATAMemory
LCD PWB
Key scan section LED circuit section
LCD power circuit
LCD panel
Oscillation circuit
FAX boardPWB
LCD PWB
CPUHD404344
SOD
SCKSIORESET
AR-F151
11 – 21
C. LCD panel pin arrangement
Pin No. Signal name Input/Output Remark
1 LCDRS InputH: Data input;L: Instruction input
2 LCDRW InputH: Data read;L: Data write
3 LCDE Input Enable signal
4 DB0 Input Not used.
5 DB1 Input Not used
6 DB2 Input Not used
7 DB3 Input Not used
8 LCDB4 Input Data bus line
9 LCDB5 Input Data bus line
10 LCDB6 Input Data bus line
11 LCDB7 Input Data bus line
12 VSS – 0V
13 VDD – +5.2V
14 Vin – +5.2V
15 V5 – LCD drive power
16 GND – Frame GND
D. Key scan input process diagram
LCD display dataprocess time (B)
Key scanprocesstime (A)
Key scanprocesstime (A)
Key SW effective period
input
AR-F151
11 – 22
[12] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
11
22
33
44
E E
D D
C C
B B
A A
US
B-I
N
TM
ON
/F-R
ES
ET
/PO
FF
D15
(FR
XD
)(/
FR
TS
)
(/F
CT
S)
(FT
XD
) (OP
-CLK
)
SIN
4
/CS
0
/HW
R
D8
D1
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D0
/CP
US
YN
C
(SP
PD
)
/CS
0
PS
W
(OP
-DA
TA
)
DA
L
/SC
AN
ST
MR
MT
0
PR
(MH
PS
)
MR
MT
2
/HW
R
RT
H
SIN
2
/TM
EN
TM
CLK
DM
T2
DM
T1
RR
S
DA
H
/PR
ST
AR
T
HL
MR
MT
1
/LW
R
SIN
3
/AS
ICIN
T
DM
T3
MR
MT
3
/RD
DM
T0
PM
CLK
SC
L
SIN
1
/SC
AN
SP
/CS
1
/RS
T
/RE
SE
T
CP
UC
LK
/LW
R
DR
ST
A6
A7
/CS
1
A3
A4
A2
/RD
A1
A5
SE
LIN
3S
ELI
N2
SE
LIN
1
/CS
2
KIN
2
KIN
1
FW
SD
A
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
24V
5V
5V
5V
5V
A5V
5V
0.1u
C24
2
3.3K
JR
203
100pC39
9
20K
J
R30
3
1KJ
R13
9
74H
C14
IC11
3E1S
S13
3
D10
0.1u
C40
9
0.1u
C41
0
10u
16V
C9
0.1u
C18
1
SB
O-0
2SA
NL20
33K
JR
125
9.1K
J
R12
9
0.1u
C39
4
0.1u
C39
3
0.1u
C23
30.
1u
C23
2
DA
204K
D10
6
20K
JR
213
47p
C17
1
W24
257A
J-12
IC5
47p
C25
5
0.82
uC
10
1000
p
C13
9
M24
C02
WB
N6
IC16
47p
C25
4
100p
C27
9
W24
257A
J-12
IC7
100p
C23
4
0.1u
C23
1
47p
C19
9
0.1u
C22
5
20KJBR21
47p
C19
8
H8S
/235
0
H8S
/235
0
IC9
100p
C22
7
47p
C38
9
47J
R30
0
74V
HC
08
IC11
1A
330J
R22
3
20KJBR4047JBR36
DA
N20
2U
D29
MX
27C
4096
IC6
47p
C17
8
SB
O-0
2SA
N
L4
0.1u
C18
3
10K
J
R27
1
1KJ
R24
7
1KJ
R13
7
20KJR201
7.5K
J
R24
9
0.1u
C37
274
HC
14
IC11
3F
20KJR20847J
R20
747J
R21
5
20K
J
R21
4
47p
C17
2
4.7K
J
R23
9
1000
p
C17
3
20KJBR41
20KJBR43
20KJBR42
20K
JB
R27
47J
R18
6
100p
C20
5
47p
C20
0
47J
BR
24
47J
BR
23
47J
BR
25
20K
JB
R28
20K
JB
R22
20K
JR
200
DA
P20
2U
D28
1000
p
C28
3
1KJ
R24
0
100p
C31
4
100p
C25
6
20K
JB
R47
20K
JB
R52
47J
R21
847
JR
217
20K
JB
R49
20K
JB
R48
47JBR38
100p
C20
8
100p
C20
710
0p
C20
6
47J
R20
2
1KJ
R28
2
47p
C37
1
47p
C21
147
p
C21
047
p
C20
9
47J
R18
7
NF
M83
9N
F1
NF
M83
9N
F2
1SS
133
D5
1SS
133
D6
18p
C10
3
47p
C10
2
10K
J
R27
2
DA
P20
2U
D27
10K
J
R22
8
10K
J
R23
2D
AN
202U
D26
47JBR37
47JBR39
47J
BR
26
47J
R26
0
47p
C31
5
1000
P
C20
1
0.1u
C22
4
0.1u
C32
9
10K
J
R25
8
74V
HC
08
IC11
1D
2200
0p
C17
7
10K
JR
257
2200
0p
C17
0
M51
953
IC4
22u
16V
C11
68J
R20
6
1000
p
C26
5
1000
p
C26
9
1KJ
R22
9
1KJ
R22
4
1000
p
C29
6
2200
0p
C35
6
0.1uC
357
AT
-51
19.6
608M
Hz
X1
18p
C26
8
18p
C26
7
1011
21
15I/O
4
16I/O
5
17I/O
6
18I/O
7
19I/O
8
20/C
E
21A
10
22/O
E
23A
11
25A
824
A9
26A
13
27/W
E
28V
DD
14G
ND
13I/O
3
12I/O
2
11I/O
1
10A
0
9A
1
8A
2
7A
3
6A
4
5A
5
4A
6
3A
7
2A
12
1A
14
2A
1
4V
SS
3A
2
8V
CC
1A
0
7/W
C
6S
CL
5S
DA
15I/O
4
16I/O
5
17I/O
6
18I/O
7
19I/O
8
20/C
E
21A
10
22/O
E
23A
11
25A
824
A9
26A
13
27/W
E
28V
DD
14G
ND
13I/O
3
12I/O
2
11I/O
1
10A
0
9A
1
8A
2
7A
3
6A
4
5A
5
4A
6
3A
7
2A
12
1A
14
38P
64/IR
Q0-
37P
65/IR
Q1-
36V
ss
35V
ss
34P
66/C
S6-
/IRQ
2-
33P
67/C
S7-
/IRQ
3-
32P
A7/
A23
/IRQ
7-
31P
A6/
A22
/IRQ
6-
30P
A5/
A21
/IRQ
5-
29P
A4/
A20
/IRQ
4-
28V
ss
27P
A3/
A19
26P
A2/
A18
64P35/SCK1
25P
A1/
A17
63P34/SCK0
24P
A0/
A16
62P33/RxD1
23P
B7/
A15
61P32/RxD0
22P
B6/
A14
60P31/TxD1
21P
B5/
A13
59P30/TxD0
20P
B4/
A12
58Vcc
19V
ss
57PD7/D15
18P
B3/
A11
56PD6/D14
17P
B2/
A10
55PD5/D13
16P
B1/
A9
54PD4/D12
15P
B0/
A8
53Vss
14P
C7/
A7
52PD3/D11
13P
C6/
A6
51PD2/D10
12P
C5/
A5
50PD1/D9
11P
C4/
A4
49PD0/D8
10V
ss
48PE7/D7
9P
C3/
A3
47PE6/D6
8P
C2/
A2
46PE5/D5
7P
C1/
A1
45PE4/D4
6P
C0/
A0
44Vss
5V
cc
43PE3/D3
4V
ss
42PE2/D2
3V
ss
41PE1/D1
2P
G4/
CS
0-
40PE0/D0
1P
G3/
CS
1-
39Vcc
102
P53
/AD
TR
G-
101
P52
100
Vss
99V
ss98
P51
97P
5096
PF
0/B
RE
Q-
95P
F1/
BA
CK
-94
PF
2/LC
AS
-/W
AIT
-/B
RE
QO
-93
PF
3/LW
R-
92P
F4/
HW
R-
91P
F5/
RD
-90
PF
6/A
S-
89V
cc88
PF
7/87
Vss
86E
XT
AL
85X
TA
L84
Vcc
83S
TB
Y-
82N
MI
81R
ES
-80
WD
TO
VF
-79
P20
/PO
0/T
IOC
A3
78P
21/P
O1/
TIO
CB
377
P22
/PO
2/T
IOC
C3
76P
23/P
O3/
TIO
CD
375
P24
/PO
4/T
IOC
A4
74P
25/P
O5/
TIO
CB
473
P26
/PO
6/T
IOC
A5
72P
27/P
O7/
TIO
CB
571
P63
/TE
ND
1-70
P62
/DR
EQ
1-69
P61
/TE
ND
0-/C
S5-
68V
ss67
Vss
66P
60/D
RE
Q0-
/CS
4-65
Vss
128 PG2/CS2-
127 PG1/CS3-
126 PG0/CAS-
125 MD2
124 MD1
123 MD0
122 P10/PO8/TIOCA0/DACK0-
121 P11/PO9/TIOCB0/DACK1-
120 P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA
119 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB
118 P14/PO12/TIOCA1
117 P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC
116 P16/PO14/TIOCA2
115 P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD
114 Vss
113 AVss
112 P47/AN7/DA1
111 P46/AN6/DA0
110 P45/AN5
109 P44/AN4
108 P43/AN3
107 P42/AN2
106 P41/AN1
105 P40/AN0
104 Vref
103 AVcc
321
4321
5678
1
2
3
38A
16
3D
15
4D
14
5D
13
6D
12
7D
11
8D
10
9D
9
10D
8
12D
7
13D
6
14D
5
15D
4
16D
3
17D
2
18D
1
19D
0
1V
PP
39A
17
20O
E
2C
E
37A
15
36A
14
35A
13
34A
12
33A
11
32A
10
31A
9
29A
8
28A
7
27A
6
26A
5
25A
4
24A
3
23A
2
22A
1
21A
0
1213
4321
5678
4321
5678
4321
5678
1
2
3
4321
5678
1
2
3
1
2
3
4321
5678
4321
5678
4321
5678
111312
5O
UT
4C
D
3G
ND
2N
C
1V
CC
A18
D12
D12
D13
D14
D13
D13
D13
D12
D15
D15
D15
D14
D14
D14
D12
D15
A12
D4
D8
D1
A13
A17
D7
A14
A11
A15
D6
D9
D0
D11
D10
D11
A2
A6
D9
D11
D7
D1
A6
A15
A3
D1
A1
A13
A5
A18
D10
A1
D6
A14
A7
D10
A13
A4
D5
D4
D2
A8
D3
D10
D9
D2
A11
A3
A10
A14
A4
D7D
6
A11
D5
A10
A12D
0
D5
A9
A9
A13
A15
A8
D3
D3
A2
A6
A6
A2
A7
A3
A3
D8
D8
D6
D2
D9
A8
D7
A5
A5
A11
A14
A1
D8
D5
D4
D3
A15
D1
A16
A7
D0
A9
A4
A2
A16
A10
D4
A1
A12
A12
A7
A7
A5
A5
A17
D11
A9
A8
D2
A4
A6
A1
D0
A4
A2
A10
A3
(8-B
2)
(1-B
3)
(4-D
4)
(1-D
3)
(5-C
1)
(7-D
4)
(7-D
4)
(5-A
2)
(7-E
1)
(7-D
1)(7
-D2)
(7-E
1)
(2-B
1)
(2-E
3)
(4-C
1)
(5-A
2)(5
-A2)
(5-A
2)(5
-A2)
(5-A
2)(5
-A2)
(5-A
2)(5
-A2)
(5-A
2)(5
-A2)
(5-A
2)(5
-A2)
(5-A
2)(5
-A2)
(5-A
2)(6
-C4)
(1-B
3)
(5-C
1)
(2-B
4)(5
-C1)
(6-A
4)
(1-D
3)
(1-D
3)
(5-B
1)
(5-B
1)(5
-B1)
(5-B
1)(5
-B1)
(5-B
1)(5
-B1)
(6-C
4)
(6-C
4)
(4-A
3)
(4-A
3)
(4-D
2)
(6-E
3)
(5-C
1)
(5-B
1)(5
-B1)
(5-B
1,7-
E4)
(5-B
1)(5
-A1,
7-C
4)
(3-A
4)
(5-A
1)
(4-D
3)
(1-B
2,5-
A2)
(1-B
1)(1
-A2,
5-A
2)(2
-C4)
(2-C
4)(2
-C4)
(4-D
3)
(4-D
4)
(8-C
3)(8
-C3)
(1-A
2)(1
-B2)
(2-D
2)
(2-E
4)(2
-E3)
(2-E
3)
(3-B
4)(3
-B3)
(4-D
4)
(3-C
1)(3
-C1)
(3-C
1)(3
-C1)
(4-D
4)
(6-C
4)
AN
-GN
D
MC
U 1
(C
PU
SE
CT
ION
)
AR-F151
12 – 1
11
22
33
44
E E
D D
C C
B B
A A
24V
1(D
SW
S)
24V
1
DS
WS
(PS
W2)
(/P
RE
AD
Y)
(PS
H2)
(PS
W2)
(PS
H2)
(/F
RE
AD
Y)
(/P
AG
E)
(PO
FD
)
(SD
OD
)
(MH
PS
)
(TC
S)
MM
LD
DV
S1
(MM
LD)
(MF
D)
(TC
S)
TC
S
DV
SE
L
(MF
D)
(MM
LD)
MF
D
MH
PS
DV
S1
(PS
W1)
(PS
H1)
SIN
4
(PS
H1)
PS
H1
(SD
SW
)
(PM
RD
Y)
(SP
ID)
(SD
SW
)
(SP
ID)
(PO
D)
(PO
D)
(PM
RD
Y)
SB
4D
SP
PD
(SB
4D)
PO
D
PM
RD
Y
(SP
PD
)
(PP
D3)
(PS
W1)
(PP
D1)
(PP
D1)
PS
W2
PS
W1
PP
D1
PP
D3
PS
H2
CE
D2
CE
D1
(SD
OD
)
(CE
D1)
(CE
D2)
(CE
D1)
(CE
D2)
SP
ID
SD
SW
DS
WS
PP
D2
/GD
I-IN
/ME
MO
RY
-IN
RT
H
SE
LIN
3O
SE
LIN
2O
SE
LIN
1O
SE
LIN
3
SE
LIN
2
SE
LIN
1
(SB
4D)
(PP
D2)
(PP
D3)
TH
OP
EN
SIN
3
SIN
1
(PP
D2)
SIN
2
RT
H-I
N
TH
OP
EN
FT
H
24V
1
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
A5V
A5V
5V
5V
5V
5V5V
5V
5V
5V
12V
12V
12V
5V
5V
5V
5V
A5V
5V
1SS
133
D9
4.3K
J1/4
WR
136
DA
204K
D10
2
0.22
J2W
R2
1SS
133
D4
1000
p
C16
5
1KJ2
W
R1
1KJ
R14
9
10K
J
R30
2
0J J
UM
PE
R
J.P
12
10K
J
R30
1
0J J
UM
PE
R
J.P
13
DA
204K
D10
4
10K
J
R18
9
0 765432102G
70MU
XE
N
74H
C15
1
IC10
2
DA
P20
2U
D20
DA
P20
2U
D8
DA
P20
2U
D36
7.5K
J
R12
4
20K
J
R14
8
DA
P20
2U
D37
20K
J
R17
1
10J
R18
4
DA
N20
2U
D31
DA
N20
2U
D33
DA
N20
2U
D22
100p
C28
8
DA
N20
2U
D13
DA
N20
2U
D21
DA
N20
2U
D38
20K
J
R17
2
0.1uC30
3
DA
P20
2U
D7
DA
P20
2U
D19
DA
P20
2U
D2
7.5K
J
R12
3
DA
P20
2U
D30
7.5K
J
R14
6
100p
C27
6
100p
C27
8
DA
N20
2U
D17
DA
N20
2U
D1
DA
N20
2U
D14
DA
P20
2U
D32
DA
N20
2U
D35
20K
J
R14
7
DA
P20
2U
D15
1KJR
277
150J
1/4W
R29
5
20K
J
R27
9
1000
p
C36
2
B3B
-PH
-K-M
CN
31
74H
C14
IC11
3A
1KJ
R27
81K
JR
283
10K
J
R18
1
10K
J
R18
2
1000
p
C38
2
1KJ
BR
20
10K
J
R18
3
20K
J
R18
0
1000
p
C18
5
1000
p
C20
2
1000
p
C18
7
0 765432102G
70MU
XE
N
74H
C15
1
IC10
5
1000
p
C18
6
20K
J
R28
4
DA
204K
D10
7
0.1u
C22
2
33p
C19
7
1KJ
R14
0
20K
J
R14
1 1000
p
C15
0
0 765432102G
70MU
XE
N
74H
C15
1
IC10
4
1KJ
BR
51
1000
p
C38
5
1000
p
C38
8
10K
J
R28
5
20K
J
R29
8
1KJ
BR
71
1000
p
C34
0
10K
J
R27
0
1000
p
C38
4
20K
J
R29
6
1000
p
C38
3
20K
J
R29
7
1000
p
C15
3
1000
p
C15
4
1000
p
C15
6
1000
p
C15
5
7.5K
J
R14
5
1KJ
BR
17
1000
p
C17
6
0.1u
C24
9
DA
204K
D10
5
1KJ
BR
18
0.1u
C15
2
100p
C27
5
100pC27
7
100p
C28
7
0.1u
C22
3
74LS
07
IC10
8A
0 765432102G
70MU
XE
N
74H
C15
1
IC10
3
47J
R23
3
47J
R23
4
47J
R24
2
10K
J
R14
3
0.1u
C31
7
0.1u
C18
0
1000
p
C15
11KJ
R14
2
1000
p
C21
21KJ
R18
8
MA
700
D16
1SS
133
D18
10K
FR
152
1KF
R15
1
0.1u
C25
3
100J
R21
6
300J
R25
2
R193
R194
R195
74LS
07
IC10
8C
74LS
07
IC10
8B
-+
LM35
8
IC10
9A
-+
NJM
2903
IC10
1A
-+
NJM
2903
IC10
1B
33p
C24
1
33p
C20
3
33p
C24
8
10J
R19
9
10J
R18
5
10J
R20
5
4.7K
J
R15
3
1000
p
C18
2
1000
p
C12
0
1000
p
C12
1
0.1u
C25
2
2200
0p
C18
8
1.2K
J
R17
0
1MF
R15
5
10K
J
R17
9
10K
FR17
7
620FR17
8
7.5K
J
R15
4
2200
0p
C19
6
1000
p
C32
7
20K
J
R26
3
21
21
65
121314151234910117
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3 1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
321
21
81234
765
65
121314151234910117
21
65
121314151234910117
81234
765 81234
76581234
765
21
81234
765
21
65
1213141512349101176
5
43
48
123
48
123 48
765
(2-E
3)
(6-A
2,6-
A4)
(6-A
1)
P-G
ND
P-G
ND
(8-C
3)
(8-C
3)
(7-B
1)
(2-E
3)
(2-E
3)
DE
TE
CT
ER
CN
SP
F D
OO
R O
PE
N
(2-E
4)
(2-E
3)
(6-D
2)
(6-B
2)
(6-A
2)
(2-E
4)
(2-E
4)
(7-E
3)
(7-E
1)(7
-E2)
(7-C
2)(1
-D4)
(1-B
2)
(7-C
1)
(7-A
1)
(7-C
1)
(6-D
2)
(6-D
2)
(2-E
3)
(2-C
3)
(2-E
3)
(2-E
3)
(2-E
3)
(2-E
3)
(2-B
2)
(2-B
2)
(2-B
3)
(2-E
3)
(6-D
2)(2
-C1)
(2-B
4)
(2-E
4)
(2-E
3)(6
-C2)
(6-D
3)
(2-E
4)(6
-C1)
(2-E
3)(7
-B1)
(7-A
1)
(2-E
4)(6
-D4)
(6-C
1)
(2-B
4)(2
-B1)
(2-B
3)
(2-B
1)(2
-B4)
(2-B
3)
(2-B
2)
(2-B
3)
(2-B
4)
(2-B
3)(2
-D2)
(2-B
3)
(2-B
4)(2
-E2)
(2-B
1)(2
-B1)
(1-C
4)
(1-C
4)
(1-C
4)
(2-E
3)
(1-D
3)
(4-D
2)
(6-E
1)
(6-D
1)
(6-B
4)
(6-B
4)
(6-B
4)
(1-D
3)
(1-D
3)
(1-D
3)
(2-E
4)
(6-C
1)
(6-C
1)
(1-B
2)
AN
-GN
DA
N-G
ND
1.5K
J*3
AN
-GN
D
INP
UT
PO
RT
SE
LEC
T C
IRC
UIT
TH
ER
MIS
TE
R S
EN
SE
CIR
CU
IT
MC
U 2
(IN
PU
T S
EC
TIO
N)
AR-F151
12 – 2
11
22
33
44
E E
D D
C C
B B
A A
DA
HC
CD
HI
CC
DLO
DA
L
/SM
SE
L
/LD
/VID
EO
PM
CLK
PM
CLK
-A
LED
MH
PS
LED
SP
PD
LED
MF
D
/MR
PS
2
MR
MT
2M
RM
T0
SP
MT
-2
MR
MT
1
MR
MT
-3
SP
MT
-1
MR
MT
3
MR
MT
-0
SP
MT
-3
/MR
PS
1
MR
MT
-2
24V
-mir
SP
MT
-0
MR
MT
-1
LED
PP
D2
LED
PP
D1
LED
PO
D
5V
12V
12V
A5V
5V
24V
24V
5V
5V
-+
LM35
8
IC10
9B
HF
50A
CC
2012
09
L7
HF
50A
CC
2012
09
L8
HF
50A
CC
2012
09
L14
HF
50A
CC
2012
09
L13
HF
50A
CC
2012
09
L15
0.1u
C35
8
2200
p
C34
310
KF
R27
3
10K
F
R27
4
2.4K
J
R26
8
2.4K
J
R26
7
100J
R24
8
2200
p
C34
2
100p
C23
6
100p
C23
5
SLA
7027
MU
IC12
74V
HC
08
IC11
1C
2200
0p
C34
4
0.1uC
345
2MJ
R26
52MJ
R26
6
-+N
JM34
14A
IC11
0B
0.1u
C37
9
-+N
JM34
14A
IC11
0A
10u
16V
C15
0.1u
C26
374
LS07
IC10
6C
150J
1/4W
R27
5
150J
1/4W
R29
4
150J
1/4W
R15
0
620J
R23
5
RS
B-2
4R
Y1
C30
5
C31
6
470p
C29
8
C30
4
C33
11J
2W
R5
47K
JR
255
ICP
-N38
(R
OH
M)
CP
2
C32
2
47u
25V
C14
2200
p
C34
1
C35
5
1J 2
W
R4
RS
B-2
4R
Y2
C29
0
47K
JR
254
750J
R25
6
300J
R23
6
470p
C29
7
47u
35V
C16
C28
9
220J
1/4W
R15
6
150J
1/4W
R16
9
150J
1/4W
R26
9
48
765
18O
UT
B
17IN
B
16IN
/B15
GB
14R
EF
B
13T
DB
12V
SB
11O
UT
/B10
RS
B
9R
SA
8O
UT
A
7V
SA
6IN
A
5IN
/A
4G
A
3R
EF
A
2T
DA
1O
UT
/A
8109
48
765
48
123
65
(6-D
4)
AN
-GN
D
(4-D
3)
(6-A
1)
(7-A
1)
(7-B
1)
(7-B
1)
(6-A
1)
(6-A
1)
(7-A
1)
(6-A
1)
(6-A
1,7-
B1)
(4-D
2)(4
-D2)
(1-C
4)(1
-C4)
(1-C
4)(1
-C4)
(6-C
2)
(7-B
1)
(6-B
2)
(6-D
1)
(6-D
2)
(6-C
1)
(6-E
3)
(6-E
3)
(1-C
4)
(1-C
4)
(6-D
4)(5
-B4)
(1-D
2)
AN
-GN
D
AN
-GN
D
AN
-GN
D
P-G
ND
16
913
9
1000
pF*8
1
6
46
16
8
13
8
1
11
4
11
MC
U 3
(O
UT
PU
T S
EC
TIO
N 1
)
AR-F151
12 – 3
11
22
33
44
E E
D D
C C
B B
A A
DM
T3
TM
ON
24V
dup
/DM
T2
/DM
T3
/DM
T1
/DM
T0
DM
T2
DM
T0
DM
T1
/BIA
SH
/TC
/GR
IDL
BIA
SH
TC
GR
IDL
/SG
SS
GS
/SP
FS
SP
FS
/SR
RC
SR
RC
(OP
-DA
TA
)
(OP
-CLK
)
OP
-DA
TA
OP
-CLK
TM
-T
Ma-
O
TM
b-O
TM
VF
MO
UT
BIA
S
SP
US
CL
VF
M
MP
FS
BIA
SL
CP
FS
1
VF
MC
NT
MC
CP
FS
2
SM
SE
L
/LD
EN
/PM
D/M
RP
S2
/MR
PS
1/M
M
/PR
HLO
UT
/RR
S
/SP
US
/SM
SE
L
/MC
/BIA
SL
/BIA
S
/CL
/VF
MC
NT
/MP
FS
/CP
FS
2/C
PF
S1
FT
HH
LLD
EN
PM
DM
RP
S2
MR
PS
1M
M
PR
RR
S
5V
5V
5V
24V
24V
5V
24V
5V
24V
24V
2.2K
JR
225
TD
6206
4F/A
F
IC11
2.2K
JR
226
2.2K
JR
230
2.2K
JR
227
74V
HC
08
IC11
1B
2SA
1036
K
Q10
3
2SA
1036
K
Q10
2
2SD
1853
Q1
TD
6206
4AF
IC13
DT
C11
4EK
A
Q10
1
MT
ZJ2
2B
D23
74H
C14
IC11
3D
74H
C14
IC11
3B
2.2K
JR
251
2.2K
JR
250
2.2K
JR
262
2.2K
JR
261
+
0.47
u 50
V
C4
2200
p
C11
5
4.7K
J1/4
W
R12
2
1SS
133
D12
1SS
133
D34
1SS
133
D3
+
10u
35V
C7
1.5K
J
R28
1
74LS
07IC
108D
74LS
07
IC10
8E
4.7K
JR
104
47K
J
R10
3
2200
0pC
128
TA
7291
S
IC1
47K
J
R13
3
47K
J
R12
6
4.7K
J1/4
W
R13
5
47K
J
R13
4
TD
6200
3
IC2
TD
6200
3
IC3
120J
1/4W
R19
2
DT
A14
3XK
A
Q10
4
TD
6250
3F
IC8
GN
DG
ND
13N
C
15N
C
8C
OM
1C
OM
16O
4
9O
3
7O
2
2O
1
12N
C
10N
C
5N
C
4N
C
14I4
11I3
6I2
3I1
654
C1E1
B1
C1
E1
B1
2 1
3
GN
DG
ND
13N
C
15N
C
8C
OM
1C
OM
16O
4
9O
3
7O
2
2O
1
12N
C
10N
C
5N
C
4N
C
14I4
11I3
6I2
3I1
3
2
1
89
43
89
1011
6V
CC
1
8V
CC
2
7O
UT
1
3O
UT
25
VS
S
1IN
2
9IN
1
2V
DD
9C
M
10O
7
11O
6
12O
5
13O
4
14O
3
15O
2
16O
1
8G
ND
7I7
6I6
5I5
4I4
3I3
2I2
1I1
9C
M
10O
7
11O
6
12O
5
13O
4
14O
3
15O
2
16O
1
8G
ND
7I7
6I6
5I5
4I4
3I3
2I2
1I1
1
2
3
9N
C
10O
7
11O
6
12O
5
13O
4
14O
3
15O
2
16O
1
8G
7I7
6I6
5I5
4I4
3I3
2I2
1I1
/HL
/VF
M
/FT
H
(6-D
4)(6
-D4)
(3-B
1)(3
-B1)
(6-A
2)
(2-D
3)(1
-D2)
(5-A
2)(5
-A2)
(5-A
3)(5
-A3)
(5-A
2)
(6-B
3)
(6-A
4)
(5-A
2)(6
-A4)
(6-B
4)(6
-B4)
(6-B
4)(6
-A4)
(6-A
4)
(5-A
2)(5
-A3)
(5-A
2)(5
-A2)
(5-A
2)(5
-A2)
(6-B
3)
(6-B
3)(6
-B4)
(6-B
3)
(7-A
2)
(6-B
2)(6
-C3)
(6-B
2)
(7-A
2)
(7-A
2)
(7-A
2)
(7-B
1)
(7-B
1)
(7-B
1)
(3-E
1)
(5-A
3)
(5-A
3)
(5-A
3)
(5-A
3)
(1-D
3)(5
-A2)
(5-A
2)(1
-D3)
(5-A
2)(5
-A2)
(5-A
2)
(1-C
4)
(1-C
4)
(1-C
4)
(1-C
4)
(6-A
3)
(6-A
3)(5
-A2)
(1-C
1)(5
-A2)
(6-C
4)
(6-C
4)
(7-B
1)
(1-D
1)
(1-D
1)
(5-A
3)
P-G
ND
MC
U 4
(O
UT
PU
T S
EC
TIO
N 2
)
AR-F151
12 – 4
11
22
33
44
E E
D D
C C
B B
A A
/128
4-E
N
US
B-O
N
/US
B-E
N
/RE
AD
Y
/SCANSP
/HS
YN
C
OU
TD
11
/FA
XA
CK
OU
TD
2O
UT
D1
OU
TD
12
OU
TD
10
OU
TD
5
OU
TD
9
OU
TD
15
OU
TD
7
/PC
LRE
Q
OU
TD
3
OU
TD
8
/PC
LPR
D
OU
TD
4
OU
TD
6
OU
TD
14O
UT
D13
OU
TD
0
/PC
LAC
K
/FA
XC
S
/FA
XR
EQ
/FA
XP
RD
/PC
LCS
BU
SY
/AC
K
CP
FS
1
TM
-
D10
TMCLK
MP
FS
D13
SM
SE
L
BIA
SL D3
D1
MAD4
/OEP
MD
/PRSTART
MC
D6
/SC
AN
ST
BIA
S
D11
A5
A1
MAD6
VF
M
D12
/TMEN
MAD9
GR
IDL
D15 D
2
A6
CL
MAD1
MR
PS
2 D4
/CPUSYNC
MAD7
/WE
TC
TM
D8
A4
CP
FS
2 D9
/CS2
MAD0
MAD11
BIA
SH
D14
MAD3
MM
D0
A7
MAD8
LDE
N
MR
PS
1 D5
MAD2
MAD10
VF
MC
NT D7
A3A2
MAD5
MDATA15MDATA14MDATA13MDATA12MDATA11MDATA10MDATA9MDATA8MDATA7
MDATA6MDATA5
MDATA4MDATA3MDATA2MDATA1MDATA0
PA
RA
AD
0P
AR
AA
D1
PA
RA
AD
2P
AR
AA
D3
PA
RA
AD
4P
AR
AA
D5
PA
RA
AD
6P
AR
AA
D7
SP
FS
SG
SS
RR
CS
PU
S
/ASICINT
SW
E[0
]
SC
S[0
]
SO
E[0
]
SC
S[1
]
SO
E[1
]
SW
E[1
]
OP
-LA
TC
H
S/H
/LD
CCDD7
CCDD4
SP
BCLK
/f2
CP
RS
CCDD3
/f1
/SH
CCDD0
CCDD6
CCDD1CCDD2
CCDD5
SCS[0]
SOE[1]
SWE[0]SOE[0]SCS[1]SWE[1]
/SYNC
PE
/CAS1
/RE
V
/SLC
TIN
/FA
ULT
/ST
B/A
UT
OF
D
SLC
T
INIT
CP
UC
LK
/LW
R/R
D
/RESET
/CAS0
/RAS0/RAS1/RAS2
5V
5V 5V5V
5V
5V
5V
3.3V
5V
20K
J
BR
53
2KJ
R24
3
0.1u
C28
4
W24
257A
J-12
IC14
100p
C29
2
0.1u
C39
6
W24
257A
J-12
IC15
0.1u
C22
9
74H
C14
IC11
3C
0.1u
C24
3
0.1u
C25
80.
1u
C39
80.
1u
C22
8
0.1u
C40
7
0.1u
C40
6
0.1u
C40
8
47J
BR
59
0.1u
C27
0
0.1u
C25
7
0.1u
C26
0
10J
R21
1
10J
R21
2
0.1u
C26
40.
1u
C28
5
SB
O-0
2SA
N
L5
0.1u
C25
0
0.1u
C27
1
0.1u
C28
6
SB
O-0
2SA
NL9
VH
IHG
73C
025F
D
0.1u
C33
9
0.1u
C39
7
0.1u
C39
5
0.1u
C28
2
18p
C32
6
20K
JB
R44
10K
J
R21
9
0.1u
C25
9
18p
C33
4
18p
C19
2
18p
C19
1
10u
16V
C12
20K
JB
R19
10J
R20
4
20K
JB
R8
20KJR191 10
0p
C21
7
30J
BR
69
10J
BR
15
10J
BR
31
10J
R17
4
10J
R15
7
10J
R15
9
10J
R16
1
10J
R16
0
10J
R16
6
10J
R17
3
10J
R17
6
10J
R16
5
10J
R16
7
10J
R16
8
10J
R15
8
10J
R16
2
10J
R16
3
10J
R17
5
10J
R16
4
20K
JB
R3
20K
JB
R2
20K
JR
190
20K
JB
R1
18p
C18
9
18p
C21
8
20K
JB
R33
47J
BR
30
47J
BR
29
20KJR241
20K
JR
209
20K
JR
220
20K
JR
238
20K
JR
237
20K
JB
R53
10J
BR
3220
KJ
BR
46
10J
R21
0
100p
C29
1
20K
J
BR
63
47J
BR
54
100p
C17
920
KJ
BR
9
20K
J
BR
13
20K
J
BR
12
20K
J
BR
11
20K
J
BR
10
20K
J
BR
70
20K
J
BR
72
20K
J
BR
73
20K
J
BR
68
47J
BR
60
47J
BR
6747
JB
R66
47JR24547JR246
47J
BR
57
47J
BR
65
47J
BR
58
47J
BR
61
20K
J
BR
62
20K
JB
R45
20K
JB
R35
20K
JB
R50
10J
R22
1
100p
C24
7
100p
C24
6
100p
C24
5
100p
C24
4
10J
BR
34
10J
BR
16
10J
BR
14
20K
J
BR
7
20K
J
BR
6
20K
J
BR
5
20K
J
BR
4
1KJR196
47p
C28
0
100p
C28
1
0.1u
C33
7
0.1u
C33
5
10J
BR
64
/SDCLK
18p
C22
018
p
C21
9
VC
K
1KJR197
10J
BR
55
10JR244
30J
BR
56
74LS
07
IC10
6A
10J
BR
7410J
BR
75
18p
C22
1
18p
C19
0
47p
C23
8
47p
C23
9
18p
C32
4
18p
C32
5
18p
C33
3
18p
C33
2
47p
C27
2
SB
O-0
2SA
N
L6
33p
C23
7
12p
C26
1
47J
R22
2
10J
R23
1
33p
C27
4
47J
R25
3
12p
C29
9
100p
C24
0
10u
16V
C13
<13
29>
13.
9867
MH
z X
2
<13
30>
22.
000M
Hz
X3
0.1u
C33
6
SB
O-0
2SA
N
L11
SB
O-0
2SA
N
L12
100p
C29
5
33p
C37
0
33p
C36
8
33p
C34
9
33p
C34
7
33p
C36
9
33p
C36
7
33p
C34
8
33p
C34
6
20K
J
R19
8
74LS
07
IC10
6B
2200
0p
C32
0
0.1u
C31
9
2200
0p
C30
2
0.1u
C30
1
0.1u
C27
3M
6623
6FP
IC10
7
15I/O
4
16I/O
5
17I/O
6
18I/O
7
19I/O
8
20/C
E
21A
10
22/O
E
23A
11
25A
824
A9
26A
13
27/W
E
28V
DD
14G
ND
13I/O
3
12I/O
2
11I/O
1
10A
0
9A
1
8A
2
7A
3
6A
4
5A
5
4A
6
3A
7
2A
12
1A
14
15I/O
4
16I/O
5
17I/O
6
18I/O
7
19I/O
8
20/C
E
21A
10
22/O
E
23A
11
25A
824
A9
26A
13
27/W
E
28V
DD
14G
ND
13I/O
3
12I/O
2
11I/O
1
10A
0
9A
1
8A
2
7A
3
6A
4
5A
5
4A
6
3A
7
2A
12
1A
14
65
6464636362626161606059595858575756565555545453535252515150504949484847474646454544444343424241414040393938383737363635353434333332323131303029292828272726262525242423232222212120201919181817171616151514141313121211111010998877665544332211
128
128
127
127
126
126
125
125
124
124
123
123
122
122
121
121
120
120
119
119
118
118
117
117
116
116
115
115
114
114
113
113
112
112
111
111
110
110
109
109
108
108
107
107
106
106
105
105
104
104
103
103
102
102
101
101
100
100
9999
9898
9797
9696
9595
9494
9393
9292
9191
9090
8989
8888
8787
8686
8585
8484
8383
8282
8181
8080
7979
7878
7777
7676
7575
7474
7373
7272
7171
7070
6969
6868
6767
6666
6565
192 192
256
256
191 191
255
255
190 190
254
254
189 189
253
253
188 188
252
252
187 187
251
251
186 186
250
250
185 185
249
249
184 184
248
248
183 183
247
247
182 182
246
246
181 181
245
245
180 180
244
244
179 179
243
243
178 178
242
242
177 177
241
241
176 176
240
240
175 175
239
239
174 174
238
238
173 173
237
237
172 172
236
236
171 171
235
235
170 170
234
234
169 169
233
233
168 168
232
232
167 167
231
231
166 166
230
230
165 165
229
229
164 164
228
228
163 163
227
227
162 162
226
226
161 161
225
225
160 160
224
224
159 159
223
223
158 158
222
222
157 157
221
221
156 156
220
220
155 155
219
219
154 154
218
218
153 153
217
217
152 152
216
216
151 151
215
215
150 150
214
214
149 149
213
213
148 148
212
212
147 147
211
211
146 146
210
210
145 145
209
209
144 144
208
208
143 143
207
207
142 142
206
206
141 141
205
205
140 140
204
204
139 139
203
203
138 138
202
202
137 137
201
201
136 136
200
200
135 135
199
199
134 134
198
198
133 133
197
197
132 132
196
196
131 131
195
195
130 130
194
194
129 129
193
193
567
432
4321
5678
1
234
8
765
56
78
43
21
21
4 3 2 1
5 6 7 8
4 3 2 1
5 6 7 8
5O
UT
4GND8
Vcc
5O
UT
4GND
8V
cc
43
16V
cc
4P
ULS
E
12V
cc
11C
KO
10-C
KO
9C
NT
CK
14G
ND
8G
ND
7C
KO
/2
6-C
KO
/2
5G
ND
13T
R
15T
ES
T3
3T
ES
T2
2T
ES
T1
1C
LK IN
SA
D13
SAD13
SA
D8
SAD8
SA
D8
SA
D13
SD10
SAD0SAD1SAD2SAD3SAD4SAD5SAD6SAD7
SAD9SAD10SAD11SAD12
SD
15
SD15
SD02
SD
00
SD
14
SA
D0
SD
05
SA
D5
SA
D7
SA
D6
SA
D3
SA
D0
SA
D9
SA
D10
SD
04
SA
D4
SD
03
SA
D1
SD
10S
D01
SD
07
SA
D10
SA
D11
SA
D11
SA
D2
SA
D12
SD
02
SA
D1
SA
D6
SA
D2
SA
D12
SD
06
SD
12
SD
17
SA
D3
SD
13
SD
16
SA
D9
SD
11
SA
D5
SA
D7
SA
D4
SD07SD06SD05SD04
SD03
SD01SD00
SD17SD16
SD14
SD13SD12SD11
(8-B
2)
(8-B
2)
(8-B
2)
(8-B
2)
(8-B
2)(8
-B2)
(8-B
2)(8
-B2)
(8-B
2)(8
-B2)
(8-B
2)(8
-B2)
(8-B
2)
(8-B
2)(8
-B2)
(8-B
2)(8
-B2)
(8-B
2)(8
-B2)
(8-B
2)
(4-D
3)
(7-D
3)(7
-D3)
(7-D
3)(7
-D3)
(7-D
3)(7
-D3)
(7-D
3)
(6-D1)
(6-E1)
(1-A
3)(1
-A3)
(1-A
3)
(7-E
4)
(1-D
2)
(7-D
3)
(7-C
3)
(7-D
3)
(7-D
3)
(7-D
4)
(7-D
3)
(7-D
3)
(7-C
3)
(7-C
3)
(7-D
4)
(7-D
4)
(7-D
4)
(7-D
3)
(7-C
4)
(7-C
4)
(7-C
4)
(7-C
4)
(1-A
3)
(6-D1)(6-E1)
(6-D1)
(6-E1)(6-E1)
(6-E1)
(6-E1)(6-E1)
(6-E1)
(6-E1)
(6-E2)(6-E2)(6-E2)
(6-E2)
(6-E2)
(6-E1)
(6-E1)
(6-D2)(6-D2)
(6-E1)
(6-D2)(6-D2)(6-D2)
(6-D1)
(6-D1)(6-D1)(6-D1)(6-D1)(6-D1)(6-D1)(6-D1)(6-D1)(6-D1)
(1-E1)(1-B2)
(1-C4)
(1-A3)(1-A3)
(1-B2)
(1-A3)(1-A3)(1-A3)
(1-D2)
(1-A2)(1-A2)
(1-D2)(1-D2)(1-D2)
(6-D4)
(6-E4)
(6-E4)(6-E4)(6-E4)(6-E4)(6-E4)(6-E4)(6-E4)
(8-A2)(8-A2)
(8-B2)(8-B2)
(8-C2)(8-C3)(8-C3)
(5-D4)(5-D4)(5-D4)(5-E4)(5-E4)(5-E4)
(8-B
2)
(5-C
4)
(5-C
4)(5
-C4)
(5-C
4)
(5-C
4)(5
-C4)
(6-C
3)
(1-A
4)
(1-D
3)(1
-D3)
(1-D
3)
(1-A
4)
(1-A
4)
(1-A
4)(1
-A4)
(1-A
4)
(1-A
3)(1
-A3)
(1-A
3)(1
-A3)
(1-A
3)
(1-A
3)(4
-A1)
(4-A
1)(4
-D3)
(4-D
3)
(4-D
3)(4
-D2)
(4-D
2)(4
-D2)
(4-D
3)(4
-D3)
(4-D
2)(4
-D2)
(4-D
2)(4
-D2)
(4-D
2)
(4-D
2)
(4-D
3)
(4-D
2)
(4-D
3)(4
-A4)
(4-D
2)(4
-D2)
(4-D
3)
(6-D
4)
(3-A
3)
Oth
er S
ectio
n is
5V
PU
LL U
P
Thi
s S
ectio
n is
3.3
V P
ULL
UP
MC
U 5
(A
SIC
SE
CT
ION
)
AR-F151
12 – 5
11
22
33
44
E E
D D
C C
B B
A A
/MC
24V
1
PS
W2
PS
H2
/BIA
SH
SE
LIN
2OS
ELI
N1O
PP
D3
SC
LS
DA
/RS
T
/CL
MM
LD
24V
1
/MM
PM
RD
Y
MR
MT
-0
MR
MT
-2M
RM
T-3
MR
MT
-1/BIA
S/B
IAS
L
HLO
UT
/TC
FW
/PR
/GR
IDL
OP
-LA
TC
HO
P-C
LK
OP
-DA
TA
KIN
2K
IN1
PS
W
DR
ST
SE
LIN
3O
5V1(
DS
WS
)
5V1(
DS
WS
)
CE
D2
/CP
FS
2
CE
D1
/MP
FS
LED
MF
D
RT
H-I
N
PP
D2
LED
PP
D2
/SY
NC
/VID
EO
/PM
DP
MC
LK-A
/LD
EN
S/H
24V
-mir
MH
PS
LED
MH
PS
TM
b-O
TM
a-O
MF
D
/CP
FS
1
PP
D1
LED
PP
D1
PO
D
/RR
S
LED
PO
D
VF
MO
UT
/VF
MC
NT
24V
1(D
SW
S)
12V
3.3V
5V
24V
5V
24V
24V
24V
5V
24V
24V
24V
24V
5V
ELK
TL1
6
ELK
TL1
9E
LKT
L17
B28
B-P
HD
SS
-B
CN
3
1N40
05
D11
100u
16V
C8
0.1u
50V
C11
6
SB
O-0
2SA
N
L18
0.1u
C10
7
0.1u
C14
9
DA
N20
2U
D24
1000
p
C14
8
240J
1/4WR
102
22u
16V
C6
1000
p
C19
3
1000
p
C37
4
0.1u
C13
3
100J
R27
6
1000
p
C16
2
B5B
-PH
-K-R
CN
12
1000
p
C14
5
HF
50A
CC
2012
09
L10
1000
p
C30
8
1000
p
C36
3
1000
p
C12
9
0.1u
C13
0
1000
p
C13
8
1000
p
C14
7
0.1u
C16
4
B5B
-PH
-K-M
CN
13
1SS
133
D25
0.1u
C12
7
0.1u
C10
1
2200
0p
C16
6
5214
7-05
10
CN
28
B4B
-PH
-K-S
CN
11
240J
1/4W
R10
1
B18
B-P
HD
SS
-B
CN
23
B6B
-PH
-K-R
CN
29
B3B
-PH
-K-K
CN
1
B14
B-P
HD
SS
-B
CN
604
FE
-BT
-VK
-N
CN
25
08F
E-B
T-V
K-N
CN
18
18F
E-B
T-V
K-N
CN
20
B4P
-VH
CN
4
22u
35V
C1
B3B
-PH
-K-R
CN
14
B3B
-PH
-K-S
CN
27
B3B
-PH
-K-S
CN
22
B2P
-VH
CN
9
B3B
-PH
-K-S
CN
7
B5B
-PH
-K-S
CN
21
2827
2624222018161412108642
252321191715131197531
1
2
3
54321
54321
54321
4321
18161412108642
1715131197531
654321
321
1412108642
131197531
4321
87654321
181716151413121110987654321
4321
321
321
321
21
321
54321
(4-D
2)
(2-E
2)
(2-A
3)(2
-A3)
D-G
ND
(1-E
3)
P-G
ND
D-G
ND
(3-E
2)
D-G
ND
(1-E
3)
(1-E
1)C
HE
CK
ER
CN
(3-E
2)
(3-E
2)(3
-E1)
PO
WE
R P
WB
CN
CL
UN
IT C
N
(4-D
2)
P-G
ND
P-G
ND
MA
IN M
OT
OR
CN
(4-D
2)(2
-A4)
(2-E
2)
(2-D
4)
(4-D
2)
(4-A
3)
(6-A
1)
(6-D
4)
(5-B
4)
(6-A
3)
(4-E
2)
(4-D
2) (4-D
2)
(4-D
2)(4
-D2)
(4-D
2)(4
-D2)
(4-D
3)
(4-D
3)
(4-E
3)
(4-D
3)
(4-D
3)
(4-D
3)
(4-D
4)
(4-B
1)
(4-B
1)
(4-A
3)(6
-A3)
(3-E
1)
(3-E
3)
(3-E
3)
(3-E
4)
(3-E
4)
(3-E
4)
(3-A
3)
(3-A
4)
(2-D
1)
(2-D
4)(2
-D4)
(2-C
2)
(2-A
4)
(2-A
3)
(2-A
3)
(2-A
1)
(2-A
4)
(2-A
1)
(2-A
3)
(2-A
3)
(2-A
3)
(1-B
4)
(1-D
1)(1
-D1)
(1-B
4)
(1-B
1)
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
P-G
ND
D-G
ND
AN
-GN
D
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
P-G
ND
OP
E P
AN
EL
CN
CS
S2
CN
CE
D1
CN
TM
CN
MA
NU
AL
FE
ED
CN
PP
D2
CN
LSU
UN
IT C
N
MIR
RO
R M
OT
OR
CN
P-G
ND
D-G
ND
RR
S C
N
MH
PS
UN
IT C
N PP
D1
CN
CP
FS
1 C
N
PO
D U
NIT
CN
DS
W U
NIT
CNV
FM
UN
IT C
N
MC
U 6
(C
ON
NE
CTO
R S
EC
TIO
N/P
OW
ER
SE
CT
ION
)
AR-F151
12 – 6
11
22
33
44
E E
D D
C C
B B
A A
(PO
FD
)
PS
W1
24V
dup
/PA
GE
(/P
AG
E)
(/F
RT
S)
/FR
TS
(FR
XD
)F
RX
D
/FC
TS
(/F
CT
S)
/FR
EA
DY
(/F
RE
AD
Y)
FT
XD
/PR
EA
DY
(/P
RE
AD
Y)
(FT
XD
)
OU
TD
6
OU
TD
1
OU
TD
13
/PC
LPR
D
/F-R
ES
ET
/FA
XC
S
OU
TD
8O
UT
D11
/PC
LAC
K
/PA
GE
OU
TD
10
OU
TD
5
/PC
LRE
Q
OU
TD
0
/FA
XP
RD
/PR
EA
DY
OU
TD
3
/FR
EA
DY
OU
TD
12O
UT
D15
OU
TD
2
/FA
XA
CK
OU
TD
14
OU
TD
9
/HS
YN
C
/FA
XR
EQ
/PC
LCS
OU
TD
4O
UT
D7
FT
XD
/FC
TS
FR
XD
/SC
AN
ST
/RE
AD
Y
/PO
FF
/PR
ST
AR
T
/FR
TS
SB
4D
24V
1
24V
-mir
SP
MT
-2S
PM
T-1
SP
ID
SP
MT
-0S
PM
T-3
/SG
S/S
RR
C
/SP
US
/SP
FS
LED
SP
PD
SD
SW
SP
PD
/DM
T3
/DM
T1
/DM
T0
/DM
T2
5V
5V
5V
5V5V
5V5V5V
12V
3.3V
5V
24V
5V
1KJ
R25
920
KJ
R26
4
B3B
-PH
-K-M
CN
10
20K
J
R11
3
ICP
-N38
(R
OH
M)
CP
1
0.1u
C13
7
0.1u
C13
5
0.1u
C13
4
B05
B-X
AS
K-1
CN
19
18p
C10
8
10J
R10
6
18p
C11
4
10J
R11
220
KJ
R11
9 18p
C11
2
10J
R11
020
KJ
R11
7
18p
C11
3
10J
R11
120
KJ
R11
8
18p
C10
9
10J
R10
720
KJ
R11
4 18p
C11
1
10J
R10
920
KJ
R11
618p
C11
0
10J
R10
820
KJ
R11
5
TX
25-6
0P-2
3ST
-H1
CN
5
SB
O-0
2SA
NL1
18p
C14
1
0.1u
C11
8
47u
25V
C3
0.1u
C11
9
47u
16VC5
0.1u
C11
7
SB
O-0
2SA
NL2
SB
O-0
2SA
NL3
47u
16V
C2
18p
C14
3
10J
R13
2
18p
C14
0
10J
R13
010
JR
128
10J
R13
1
18p
C14
2
B24
B-P
HD
SS
-B
CN
26
321
54321
605958575655545352515049484746454443424140393837363534333231
302928272625242322212019181615 171413121110987654321
24222018161412108642
2321191715131197531
/FR
TS
OU
TD
1
OU
TD
11
/FR
EA
DY
OU
TD
12
OU
TD
0
/FA
XP
RD
/PR
EA
DY
OU
TD
7O
UT
D8
OU
TD
10
FR
XD
/PC
LCS
/FA
XR
EQ
/FA
XA
CK
F-R
ES
ET
/PC
LRE
Q
/HS
YN
C
/PR
LIN
E
/PC
LAC
K
OU
TD
6
OU
TD
13
/FA
XC
S
/FC
TS
FT
XD
OU
TD
15
/PO
FF
OU
TD
4
/PC
LPR
D
OU
TD
3
OU
TD
9
/FP
AG
E
OU
TD
2
OU
TD
14
OU
TD
5
/SC
LIN
E
/RE
AD
Y
(2-E
2)
(2-A
2)
(1-D
2)
(5-E
1)(5
-E1)
(5-E
1)
(7-E
2)
(3-E
2)
(1-D
4)
(1-E
1)(1
-C1)
(5-A
3)
(7-C
4)
(7-E
4)(7
-C4)
(7-E
2)
(7-D
4)
(7-D
1)
(7-C
4)
(7-E
1)
(7-E
4)
(7-E
1)
(7-E
1)(7
-E2)
(5-E
2)
(5-E
2)(5
-E2)
(5-E
2)(5
-E2)
(5-E
2)(5
-E2)
(5-E
2)(5
-E2)
(5-E
2)(5
-E2)
(5-E
2)(5
-E2)
(5-E
2)(5
-E2)
(5-E
1)
(5-E
2)(5
-E2)
(5-E
2)(5
-E2)
(5-E
2)(5
-E2)
(2-E
2)
(2-E
3)
(2-E
2)
(1-D
2)
(1-D
1)
(1-D
1)
(1-D
1)
(7-C
4,7-
D4)
PC
L/F
AX
CN
(2-A
1)
(2-A
1)
(2-A
2)(3
-E3)
(4-D
3)
(4-D
3)(4
-D3)
(3-E
2)(3
-E1)
(4-A
4)
(2-A
1)
(3-E
2)(3
-E1)
(4-D
4)
(4-D
4)(4
-D4)
(4-D
4)
SP
F U
NIT
CN
D-G
ND
MC
U 7
(C
ON
NE
CTO
R S
EC
TIO
N 2
)
AR-F151
12 – 7
11
22
33
44
E E
D D
C C
B B
A A
SC
LS
DA
CC
DH
I
CC
DD
2
CC
DD
5
CC
DD
1
CC
DLO
CC
DD
4
CC
DD
6
CC
DD
0
CC
DD
3
CC
DD
7
BC
LK CP SP
RS
/SH
/f2 /f1
US
B-I
N
/128
4-E
NU
SB
-ON
/US
B-E
N
/GD
I-IN
/AC
K
PA
RA
AD
5
SLC
T
PA
RA
AD
6P
AR
AA
D7 /ST
B
PA
RA
AD
1
/RE
V
PA
RA
AD
3
PA
RA
AD
0 INIT
BU
SY
/SLC
TIN
/AU
TO
FD P
E/F
AU
LT
PA
RA
AD
2
PA
RA
AD
4
/WE
/RA
S0
MD
AT
A4
MA
D2
MD
AT
A9
MA
D7
/ME
MO
RY
-IN
MD
AT
A14
/CA
S0
MD
AT
A2
MA
D0
MD
AT
A7
MA
D5
MD
AT
A12
MA
D10
MD
AT
A0
/OE
/RA
S2
MD
AT
A5
MA
D3
MD
AT
A10
MA
D9
MD
AT
A15
/CA
S1
MD
AT
A3
MA
D1
MD
AT
A8
MA
D6
MD
AT
A13
MA
D8
MD
AT
A1
/RA
S1
MD
AT
A6
MA
D4
MD
AT
A11
MA
D11
TC
SD
VS
EL
DV
SE
LT
CS
12V
5VA
5V
3.3V
5V
3.3V
5V
5V24
V24
V
300J
R30
5
300J
R30
4
DA
204K
D11
0D
A20
4KD
109
FF
4-32
-S15
D3
CN
30
0.1u
C37
6
0.1u
C36
5
10u
25V
C18
0.1u
C36
610u
25V
C19
0.1u
C38
6
47u
16V
C17
0.1u
C36
40.
1u
C37
7
0.1u
C37
8
5.1K
J
R28
6
31F
T-B
T-V
K-N
CN
15
5234
0-04
01
CN
16
B10
-PH
DS
S-B
CN
17
B4B
-PH
-K-R
CN
17
21
21
3232
3131
3030
2929
2828
2727
2626
2525
2424
2323
2222
2121
2020
1919
1818
1717
1616
1515
1414
1313
1212
1111
1010
99
88
77
66
55
44
33
22
11 31302928272625242322212019181716151413121110987654321
4039383736353433323130292827262524232221
2019181716151413121110987654321
108642
97531
4321
(5-C
4)
(5-C
4)
(5-C
4)
(5-C
4)
(5-C
4)
(5-C
4)
(1-E
3)
(5-C
4)
(5-C
4)(5
-C4)
(5-B
4)(5
-B4)
(5-B
4)(5
-B4)
(5-C
4)
(5-B
4)
CC
D P
WB
CN
(3-C
3)(3
-C4)
AN
-GN
D
(5-A
3)
(5-A
3)
(1-B
1)(5
-A3)
(5-D
3)
(5-D
2)
(5-D
3)
(5-D
3)(2
-D3)
(5-D
2)
(5-D
3)
(5-D
3)
(5-D
2)
(5-D
3)
(5-D
2)(5
-D3)
(5-D
3)
(5-D
2)
(5-D
3)
(5-D
3)
(5-D
2)
(5-D
2)
(5-D
2)
GD
I/US
B C
N
(5-C
1)(5
-C1)
(5-C
1)(5
-C1)
(5-C
1)(5
-C1)
(5-C
1)(5
-C1)
(5-C
1)(5
-C1)
(5-C
1)(5
-C1)
(5-C
1)(5
-C1)
(5-C
1)(5
-C1)
(5-C
1)(5
-C1)
(5-C
1)(5
-C1)
(5-C
1)(5
-C1)
(5-C
1)(5
-C1)
(5-C
1)(5
-C1)
(5-C
1)(5
-C1)
(5-C
1)(5
-C1)
(5-C
1)
(2-D
3)
(5-C
1)
(5-D
1)(5
-D1)
(5-C
1)
GD
I ME
MO
RY
CN
(1-E
3)(2
-A4)
(2-A
4)
D-G
ND
(2-A
4)(2
-A4)
D-G
ND
DV
UN
IT C
N
MC
U 8
(C
ON
NE
CTO
R S
EC
TIO
N 3
)
AR-F151
12 – 8
AR-F151
12 – 9
AR-F151
12 – 10
AR-F151
12 – 11
AR-F151
12 – 12
AR-F151
12 – 13
AR-F151
12 – 14
AR-F151
12 – 15
AR-F151
12 – 16
AR-F151
12 – 17
AR-F151
12 – 18
11
22
33
44
E E
D D
C C
B B
A A
5.2V
5V
5V
5.2V
5V
5V
5V
5V
Jum
per
J746
C-L
CD
IC70
2
20K
JR
737
N,M
R75
1
N,M
R75
5
N,M
C71
9
CN
701-
3S
OD
N,M
C71
3
DT
A14
3EK
A
Q70
1
HD
4043
44
IC70
1
0.1u
C71
8
20K
J
R71
5
1KJ
R72
4
0.1u
C71
6
D70
3
N,M
C70
8
0.1u
C71
7
D70
2
2KJ
R75
2
0.1u
C71
210
KJ
VR
701
1KJ
R74
1
CN
701-
2V
CC
0.1u
C71
5
CN
701-
7D
-GN
D
0.1u
C71
4
4.00
MH
z
Y70
1
20K
J
R73
6
470p
FC
7071K
JR
725
CN
701-
4S
ID
20K
JR
748
510J
0.5
WR
731
100J
R75
0
N,M
R75
4 1KJ
R74
2
1KJ
R74
0
CN
701-
6/P
AN
EL
RE
SE
T
470p
FC
706
470p
FC
705
NJM
431U
IC70
3
+22
U/1
6VC
702
0.1u
C70
4
20K
JR
749
CN
701-
1A
12V
0.1u
C70
1
+
22U
/16V
C70
3
1KJ
R71
9
1KJ
R72
21K
JR
721
1KJ
R72
0
1KJ
R71
6
1KJ
R72
3
1KJ
R71
81K
JR
717
20K
J
R70
6
20K
J
R70
5
20K
J
R71
4
20K
J
R71
3
20K
J
R71
2
20K
J
R71
1
20K
J
R71
0
20K
J
R70
9
20K
J
R70
8
20K
J
R70
7
20K
J
R73
4
CN
701-
5S
CK
CN
701-
8D
-GN
D
20K
J
R73
5
CN
701-
9
F-G
ND
2.4k
FR
733
2.7k
F
R73
2
S74
1S
743
S74
0S
747
S74
4S
745
S73
9S
742
S74
6
S73
0
S70
2
390J
R74
6
390J
R74
5
D70
1
390J
R74
7
30P
N,M
C70
9
0.1u
C71
1
N,M
C71
0
1MJ
R73
9
10K
JR
730
1KJ
R72
7
1KJ
R72
9
1KJ
R72
6
1KJ
R72
8
20K
J
R70
2
20kJ
R70
1
20K
J
R70
3
20K
J
R70
4
S70
1S
704
S70
3
S73
7
S73
5
S73
8
S73
6
S73
3
S73
1
S73
4
S73
2
S72
7
S72
8
S72
9
S72
6
S72
3
S72
4
S72
5
S72
2
S71
9
S72
0
S72
1
S71
8
S71
7
S71
6
S71
3
S71
4
S71
5
S71
2
S70
9
S71
0
S71
1
S70
8
S70
5
S70
6
S70
7
12
16G
ND
15V
S
14V
IN
13V
DD
12V
SS
11D
B7
10D
B6
9D
B5
8D
B4
7D
B3
6D
B2
5D
B1
4D
B0
3E
2R
/W
1R
S
28D
527
D4
26D
325
D2
24D
123
D0
22R
0321
SO
20S
I19
/SC
K18
/RE
SE
T17
TE
ST
16V
CC
15R
3314
R32
13R
31
12R
30
11G
ND
10O
SC
2
9O
SC
1
8R
23
7R
22
6R
21
5R
20
4R
13
3R
12
2R
11
1R
10
2
31
3 2
SC
K
DA
P20
2UD
AP
202U
DA
N20
2UD
AN
202U
D70
7D
706
D70
5D
704
/PA
NE
L R
ES
ET
1
KE
YS
EN
1
LCD
B4
LCD
RS
LCD
B5
LCD
RW
LCD
B6
LCD
E
LCD
B7
KE
YC
OM
2
KE
YC
OM
6
KE
YC
OM
3
KE
YC
OM
7K
EY
CO
M8
KE
YC
OM
4
KE
YC
OM
1
KE
YC
OM
9
KE
YC
OM
5
KE
YS
EN
1
KE
YS
EN
6K
EY
SE
N5
KE
YS
EN
4K
EY
SE
N3
KE
YS
EN
2
KE
YS
EN
6K
EY
SE
N5
KE
YS
EN
4K
EY
SE
N3
KE
YS
EN
2
LED
1LE
D2
LED
3
KE
YC
OM
3K
EY
CO
M2
KE
YC
OM
8K
EY
CO
M9
KE
YC
OM
6K
EY
CO
M7
LCD
E
LED
3
KE
YC
OM
1
KE
YC
OM
5
KE
YC
OM
4
SID
S0D
LCD
B7
LCD
B6
LCD
B5
LCD
B4
LCD
RW
LCD
RS
LED
2LE
D1
FAX
LC
D P
WB
(A
R-F
151
Onl
y)
AR-F151
12 – 19
4
E
3
D
2 1
ED
BA
4 3
B
2
A
1
CC
RD
39E
SA
B1
ZD
32.
2uF
/50V
C19
Z06
51T
1
8 9111216154317651413 2
CN
1
B16
B-P
HD
SS
-B(O
ptio
n)10
0uF
/35V
C18
(Opt
ion)
1SS
270A
D5
TF
541
CR
6PM
-10
BC
R5P
M-1
0T
M54
1
SC
R1
273J
R10
2
203J
R10
8
PC
817
PC
2
104J
-474
JR
4104J
-474
JR
3
330-
271J
(Fus
e)
R6
101-
271J
R5
3R3-
150J
(5W
)R
25
101J
R10
6
R01
JR
107
Z04
84
L102
160u
H
IR3M
02IR
9494
TL4
94
IC10
4
RD
30Z
D10
1
330J
R11
1
1uF
/50V
C10
7
470J
R12
7
PQ
3RD
23
IC10
2
R33
J(5W
)
R11
2
L543
1T
L431
HA
1743
1
IC1
472K
/AC
250V
(Y)
C7
222K
/AC
250V
(Y)
C6
BE
AD
S
BJ1
01
K28
79K
2755
K22
57
Q1
(Opt
ion)
1N40
05D10
8
471K
C11
4
(Opt
ion)
1SS
270A
D10
5
SD
DJE
-3S
W1-
1
684J
R1
F3 5A
/125
V
EN
C47
1-10
D
ZR
1
SD
DJE
-3
SW
1-2
224K
/AC
250V
(X)
C4
102J
R13
121J
(1/4
W F
use)
R23
101J
(1/4
W F
use)
R24
121J
(1/2
W F
use)
R22
PQ
12R
F11
PQ
12R
F1
IC10
1
181J
R11
4
2401
D
R11
0 2101
DR
113
D5S
BA
60
DB
1
4R7J
(Fus
e)
R15
104J
R16
330J
(Fus
e)R
103
1SS
244
HS
S81
D10
4
103J
R12
6
392J
R10
9
FM
B-2
4LY
G80
2C04
D10
6
561J
R11
8
561J
R11
7
221J
R10
5
100J
(Fus
e)R
104
5101
FR
133
1SS
270A
D10
7
1001
F
R13
6
A11
75A
673
Q10
2
A14
51B
1136
Q10
1
104K
C11
147
2JR
123
823J
R12
5
472J
R12
0
471K
C11
3
104J
R12
4
123J
R12
1
100J
(Fus
e)
R11
9
472J
R11
6
333J
R11
5
472J
R12
2
104K
C11
2
100u
F/1
6V
C10
6
C27
85C
1213
A
Q10
3
1000
uF/3
5VC
105
CR
3PM
-8T
F32
1
SC
R10
1
Z04
00
L101
6.8u
H
470u
F/3
5V(Z
L)C
104
472K
C14
1SS
244
D4
HS
S81
C13
104K
124J
R12
9
680u
F/2
00V
C10
153J
R10
103K
C12
C27
85C
1213
A
Q2
153J
R12RD
20Z
D2
PC
817
PC
1-2
SD
T-S
S-1
24D
M
RY
1-1
1SS
270A
D10
1
ER
A92
-02
D10
2
D92
M-0
2Y
G90
2C2R
D10
3
TM
1641
PT
RC
1
Z02
02
L4
Z02
02L5
F1
15A
/125
V
L N FG
AC
-P07
223J
R11
1N40
05
D2
1N40
05
D1
L543
1T
L431
HA
1743
1IC
103
5K-o
hmV
R10
1
223K
C11
0P
C81
7
PC
1-1
331J
R13
110
4KC
115
223J
R13
2
472J
R13
7
2200
uF/1
0VC
109
HZ
S15
-3R
D16ZD
1
103J
R20
C27
85C
1213
AQ
105
333J
R21
393J
R13
4
4321
CN
3
B04
P-X
L
SD
T-S
S-1
24D
M
RY
1-2
S21
ME
5YP
C3
ER
A22
-06
D3
33uF
/25V
C10
8
220u
F/2
5V
C10
3
470u
F/3
5V(Z
L)
C10
2
103K
/250
V
C9
104K
/AC
250V
(X)
C15
104K
C16
102K
C17
104K
/AC
250V
(X)
C8
222K
/AC
250V
(Y)
C5
471K
/1kV C11
223J
R1910
4JR
18104J
R17
472J
R10
1
220J
(2W
)R
7
563J
R8
331J
(2W
)
R9
122J
R13
0
104J
(1/2
W)
R2
1 76
12,1
3,14
5
8,9,
10
11
42
12Vcc
8C1
3 FBack
14 RefOut
13 OC
11C2
7 GND
6 RT
10 E2
5 CT
4DTCon
9 E1
15-I2
16+I2
2 -I1
1+I1
3 2
4 1
3 2
4 1
FW
HL
/PRG
ND
+3.
3V
+5V
+12
V
+24
V
CIR
CU
IT D
IAG
RA
M (
LOW
VO
LTA
GE
BLO
CK
)
AR-F151
12 – 20
11
A A
/H S
YN
C
PK
YE
YE
BL
GY
73.
3V
410/P
SO
FF
D-G
ND
183.
3V
GY
2512/P
SO
FF
D-G
ND
BL
24V
1LB
BIA
S1
PL
RD
CN
65 4
/MC
BR
/TC
2P
KG
RID
L3
4321
DV
un
SC
L
2 4S
DA
5V
6 8D
-GN
D
GY
D-G
ND
BR
MH
PS
CN
27LE
DM
HP
S1
MH
PS
2 3
PK
CN
28
P-G
ND
1C
N25
P-G
ND
2 4/C
L3
24V
24V
CN
7
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
1818
CN
301
CN
11
CN
10
DS
W
PK
PL
PL
PK
BL
RD
GY
GY
8P
K
1817
2
RD
PK
41
PM
PL
/PM
DP
MR
DY
P-G
ND
24V
PM
CLK
-A
5
BL
3P
-GN
D
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
LAS
ER
CN
T
15111097S
/HS
/H
D-G
ND
7
24V
PW
B
SU
PP
LY
PO
WE
R
PW
B
SU
PP
LY
PO
WE
R
MC
U P
WB
PW
B
CC
D
BL
PK
GY
BR
BR
BR
GY
WH
RD
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
LB PL
PL
OR
OR
YE
RD
RD
PK
PK
BR
LB PL
PL
PL
LB
GY
GY
GY
PK
PK
OR
LBLB
PL
RD
RD
BR
PL
PL
PL
GY
GY
PK
BL
BL
BL
PL
LB
RD
BK
WH
WH
BK1 2
1 2
2121
RD
WH
F-G
ND
CN
3CN
3
100V
EX
ON
LY
200V
EX
ON
LY
TH
ER
MO
ST
AT
2H
LLH
LN3
HLL
BK
HLN
WH
HL
GY
SIN
GLE
BY
PA
SS
VE
RS
ION
ON
LY
MU
LTI B
YP
AS
S V
ER
SIO
N O
NLY
CN
20
OR
OR
OR
RD
RD
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
CN
902
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
DR
ST
DR
ST
SE
LIN
20
DR
ST
OP
-CLK
KIN
2
D-G
ND
PS
W
SE
LIN
30
OP
-LA
TC
H
5V SE
LIN
10O
P-D
AT
A
KIN
1
SE
LIN
20
DR
ST
OP
-CLK
KIN
2
D-G
ND
PS
W
SE
LIN
30
OP
-LA
TC
H
5V1
SE
LIN
10O
P-D
AT
A
KIN
1
1 3
7 8 1611
951
65
10
62
DR
ST
1
PW
B
OP
2 3
1611
73
CN
901
2
1 94 10
84
323122201816141211103 82 4 15 17 30216 2523 27971 135 2624 292819
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
F2
D-G
ND
CC
DH
I
5VCC
DLO
D-G
ND
A5V
12V
D-G
ND
CP
SP
CC
D-D
1
CC
D-D
4
CC
D-D
6
BC
LK
CC
D-D
0
F1
CC
D-D
7
CC
D-D
3
RS
CC
D-D
2
/SH
AN
-GN
D
CC
D-D
5
D-G
ND
1D
-GN
D2
D-G
ND
11
D-G
ND
13
D-G
ND
15
D-G
ND
17
D-G
ND
19
D-G
ND
21F
222
D-G
ND
23
CC
DH
I30
5VCC
DLO
D-G
ND
25
CL
D-G
ND
CC
D-D
5
14 10
CN
30
F1
AN
-GN
D
8 3
CC
D-D
2
2712
V26 20
/SH
5
CC
D-D
3
16 9
CC
D-D
6
CC
D-D
1
18 1232 4
SP
CC
D-D
7
CC
D-D
0
A5V
29 728
RS
31 6C
CD
-D4
BC
LK
24
CP
1
MR
MT
-13
Mirr
or2
MR
MT
-324
V
MR
MT
-0
Mot
or
5
MR
MT
-241 2
MF
D
1
DS
W
RD
MF
D
1
CN
14
1
MP
FS
CN
4
24V
1(D
SW
S)
2 2
D-G
ND
CN
1
CN
12
CE
D1
3
LED
PP
D1
42 3
CE
D1
5
CE
D1
GY
PK
PP
D1
D-G
ND
PP
D1
D-G
ND
5V1(
DS
WS
)
/MP
FS
31D
-GN
D
4LE
DM
FD
GY
24V
2
5V
CN
1
YE
1615P
-GN
D
7531
CN
17
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
5V1(
DS
WS
)D
-GN
D2
4
16
H
6
3
/LD
EN
TC
S
13
N
2
1
5
LSU
5V1(
DS
WS
)
P-G
ND
TC
S
C
6
24V
DV
S
12
/LD
EN
BIA
S
PM
CLK
-A
5Y
8
24V
/H S
YN
C
/PM
D
D-G
ND
1
DV
SD
-GN
D
8
2
6
/VID
EO
8
/VID
EO
2
D-G
ND
5
TC
S
14
CN
23
PM
RD
Y
53
1
S
6
54A
N-G
ND
RT
H-I
N1
2R
TH
1A
N-G
ND
RT
H2
65V5V
59 2
FW
12V
811 1
/PR
HLO
UT
13P
-GN
D
24V
3D
-GN
D
24V
1214
D-G
ND
3.3V
225V
215V
15 19
PP
D2
MC
FB
2321
321
D-G
ND
PP
D2
LED
PP
D2
GY
PK
PK
FW
12V
CN
13
D-G
ND
PP
D2
LED
PP
D2
31
GY
BIA
SM
C
TH
ER
MO
ST
AT
CN
9
1
813
224
V1
24V
MM
GY
GY
1
8
24V
1
24V
LED
PO
D
/MM
2017
6
HLL
1C
N3
6
/CP
FS
1
MM
LD
CP
FS
1
CN
18
VF
M
23
2
L/P
R
MM
LD
OR
RD
11
HLO
UT
BC
7
7
NHLN
GR
IDL
P-G
ND
TM
b-O
PK
4
7
/RR
S
24V
1
P-G
ND
INLE
T
TM
11
GN
D
BIA
S
D-G
ND
HLL
231
P-G
ND
24V
BK
RD
GY
OR
24D
-GN
D
/MM
24V
24V
CN
22
9
16
8
1
D-G
ND
VF
M
PO
D
GN
D
5
CN
11
14
2
1
HLN
CN
21
42
/TC
/MC
24V
P-G
ND
TM
a-O
/VF
MC
NT
GN
D
WH
GY
RD
GY
5
TC
6
5
GR
ID
HL
RR
S
PO
D
13
2
3.3V
P-G
ND
AC
TU
AL
WIR
ING
DIA
GR
AM
1/5
AR-F151
12 – 21
AA
11
GD
I/US
B P
WB
/INIT
MD
AT
A3
MA
D3
PA
RA
AD
6
3.3V
MA
D2
9
37
5V
1810
MD
AT
A0
MD
AT
A14
22
MD
AT
A2
7/A
UT
OF
D
MD
AT
A7
4
GD
I
ME
MO
RY
PW
B
10P
AR
AA
D5
3.3V
8
PE
28
MD
AT
A5
1
PA
RA
AD
2
15
/RA
S1
14M
DA
TA
11
18D
-GN
D
PE
1616
/RA
S1
17
MA
D9
MD
AT
A9
341
34
MA
D8
37
MA
D6
PA
RA
AD
3
5VP
AR
AA
D0
27
PA
RA
AD
5
28
13
19
14
23 38
2
PA
RA
AD
3
/CA
S0
D-G
ND
5 24
9
9
2
/RA
S2
39
/CA
S0
MD
AT
A8
/FA
ULT
16
18
MD
AT
A10
31
25
8
/CA
S1
16
/WE
MA
D6
/WE
MD
AT
A13
/ST
B17
/ME
MO
RY
MD
AT
A0
/INIT
21
25M
AD
2
MD
AT
A15
/AU
TO
FD
MD
AT
A7
MA
D1
PA
RA
AD
0
22
7P
AR
AA
D2
MA
D0
SLC
T20
39
5V
D-G
ND
MA
D0
31
MD
AT
A11
MA
D5
11
18
MD
AT
A4
9
12
40
MD
AT
A5
5
MD
AT
A1
11 12
MD
AT
A15
15
MA
D9
33
26
2021
21
MD
AT
A9
3
/AC
K
38
/RA
S0
20
MD
AT
A6
MD
AT
A2
24
32
D-G
ND
5
10
17
/CA
S1
17
12
8
MD
AT
A10
23
23
22
PA
RA
AD
1
/OE
MD
AT
A12
MA
D8
2625
6
4
22
BU
SY
PA
RA
AD
7
/FA
ULT
MC
U
PW
B
/AC
K
13
D-G
ND
MD
AT
A3
19
MD
AT
A4
33
3.3V
D-G
ND
8
26
/GD
I-IN
/RA
S2
5V
CN
16
/RE
V
14
3.3V
3
SLC
T
7
MA
D7
D-G
ND
6
/OE
MA
D10
24
BU
SY
D-G
ND
PA
RA
AD
1
14
PA
RA
AD
6
5
5V
PA
RA
AD
4
4035
MA
D11
30
2
/ME
MO
RY
/ST
B
29
13
3
36
MA
D5
D-G
ND
30
32
MD
AT
A6
11
19
CN
15
12 15
20
24
6
15
35
2925
MA
D7
PA
RA
AD
7
/GD
I-IN
6
MA
D1
MD
AT
A14
4
MA
D4
3
11
23
36
MD
AT
A12
/RE
V
/SLC
TIN
13
MA
D11
MD
AT
A13
10
MA
D10
21
7
27
4
PA
RA
AD
4
/SLC
TIN
/RA
S0
MD
AT
A8
MA
D4
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
MA
D3
MD
AT
A1
26
5V
19
211
3
10 13 32 1911 33
4
36 23
6 7
3112 21
1
14 25
82 5 9
27 29 30
Dat
a B
it 0
/ST
RO
BE
Dat
a B
it 2
Dat
a B
it 3
Dat
a B
it 4
Dat
a B
it 5
Dat
a B
it 6
Dat
a B
it 7
/AC
KB
US
YP
ES
LCT
/ER
RO
R/IN
IT
D-G
ND
/SLC
T IN
Dat
a B
it 1
/AU
TO
FD
XT
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
GD
I/US
B V
ER
SIO
N O
NLY
CN
701
CN
502
CN
501
Per
sona
l
Com
pute
r
GD
I VE
RS
ION
ON
LY
PS
W1
PS
W1
D-G
ND
1 2
CN
10
D-G
ND
PS
W1
2 328 29 30 31
D-G
ND
US
B-I
N/U
SB
-EN
US
B-O
N/1
284-
EN
3.3V
2727 28 29 30 31
US
B-I
N/U
SB
-EN
US
B-O
N/1
284-
EN
3.3V
PL
GY
PL
GY
AC
TU
AL
WIR
ING
DIA
GR
AM
2/5
Opt
ion
Opt
ion
AR-F151
12 – 22
11
22
33
44
E E
D D
C C
B B
A A
BL
BR
GY
GY
D-G
ND
PS
W2
PS
W2
CE
D2
PS
W2
D-G
ND
21G
YB
R
46119
BR
GY
BR
GY
BR
D-G
ND
PS
W2
1211
GY
GY
FG
69
FG
FG
BR
BL
RD
OR
GY GY
BR
BR
GY
BR
OR
RD
BL
MC
U P
WB
CE
D2
13
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
14
141/C
PF
S2
72 13C
ED
2
5V24V
11
8P
PD
34
BR
BR
GY
GY
GY
BR
OR
OR
BL
RD
RD
2CS
UN
CN
6
123P
PD
35V P
PD
3D
-GN
D
8 7 2 1
12
24V
/CP
FS
22
1C
PF
S2
GY
1D
-GN
D2
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
CE
D2
PP
D3
5V24V
/CP
FS
2
141387421
AC
TU
AL
WIR
ING
DIA
GR
AM
3/5
AR-F151
12 – 23
11
22
33
44
E E
D D
C C
B B
A A
LBLB
LB GY
BL
PK
D-G
ND
LED
SD
OD
SD
OD
SD
OD
321
CN
31
CN
26
FG
MC
U P
WB
SB
4D
Sen
ser
PW
B
PA
PE
R F
EE
D U
NIT
BR
PK
2 13S
PP
D
GY
FG
6
PK
PL
RD
RD
BR
BL
BL
OR
BR
PL
RD
GY
24V
mir
SP
MT
-1(B
)
SP
MT
-0(A
)
24V
mir
SP
MT
-3(/
B)
SP
MT
-2(/
A)
FA
X S
PF
UN
BL
BL
3S
B4D
1
4
24V
5
SP
ID
5
43
D-G
ND
21
5V
/SP
US
5V5
BL
SD
SW
4D
-GN
D4
1
5
212
SP
ID
OR
SD
SW
3
GY
SP
US
2
1
PL
1
2
3 6 2
SP
MT
1
23
BL
RD
19
24V
mir
SP
MT
-1
SP
MT
-0
PL
BR
BR
22
24V
mir
20S
PM
T-3
SP
MT
-2
PK
21
RD
24
OR
RD
BR
PK
GY
BL
PL
GY
/SP
US
24V
5VSB
4D
SD
SW
SP
ID
LED
SP
PD
SP
PD
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
1211
428753
AC
TU
AL
WIR
ING
DIA
GR
AM
4/5
AR-F151
12 – 24
11
22
33
44
E E
D D
C C
B B
A A
CN
701
CN
501
CN
503
124 972 6 16133 10 11 14 1581 5
D-G
ND
AS
IG
AS
IGN
D-G
ND
HS
EN
H V
OL2
-5V
HS
OF
FH
K
H V
OL0
H V
OL1
-A12
V
VC
C
A12
V
-A12
V
A12
V
VC
C
FG
CN
601
CN
5
FA
X-S
PF
UN
F-G
ND
9
SP
EA
KE
RFA
X-O
P P
WB
62 43 85 71
PL
GY
OR
BR
LB GY
PK
BL
BL
GY
LBOR
PL
PK
BR
GY
1 3 4 72 85 6
SO
D
5V SID
RE
SE
T
D-G
ND
SC
K
A12
V
D-G
ND
BL
BL
2
BZ
1B
L1
BL
1
BZ
22
BL
BL
GY
LBOR
PL
PK
BR
BL
GY
62 8431 75
SO
D
VC
C
D-G
ND
SC
K
A12
V
RE
SE
T
SID
D-G
ND
BL
GY
PK
PL
OR
LB GY
BR
7B
Z1
5S
CK
21A
12V
6 8
RE
SE
T
BZ
2
10
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
3
VC
C
SID
SO
D
94
PW
BF
AX
PW
BM
CU
D-G
ND
OU
TD
13
/PR
LIN
E
D-G
ND
/FA
XP
RD
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
OU
TD
3
NC
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
/FR
TS
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
3.3V
NC
FT
XD
/HS
YN
K
OU
TD
10
/SC
LIN
E
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
5VD-G
ND
D-G
ND
/SC
DS
ET
D-G
ND
OU
TD
2
/RE
SE
T
OU
TD
9
D-G
ND
/PW
OF
F
D-G
ND
/RE
AD
Y
D-G
ND
OU
TD
5
D-G
ND
OU
TD
12
3.3V
OU
TD
4
12V
OU
TD
1
NC OU
TD
0
OU
TD
14
OU
TD
15
D-G
ND
OU
TD
6
FR
XD
OU
TD
11
/FP
AG
E
/SC
DA
CK
/SC
DB
CS
NCOU
TD
8
D-G
ND
OU
TD
7
5V /FC
TS
NC
/FA
XP
RD
D-G
ND
/PC
LPR
D
OU
TD
2
D-G
ND
FR
XD
/FA
XR
EQ
OU
TD
15
OU
TD
13
OU
TD
7
OU
TD
5
/HS
YN
K
D-G
ND
/FR
TS
/SC
LIN
E
/FA
XA
CK
OU
TD
14
OU
TD
10
OU
TD
8
OU
TD
0
D-G
ND
/FP
AG
E
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
F-R
ES
ET
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
/PR
EA
DY
D-G
ND
D-G
ND
12V
5VOU
TD
12
OU
TD
6
/PO
FF
D-G
ND
/FR
EA
DY
D-G
ND
5V/PC
LRE
Q
OU
TD
9
OU
TD
1
D-G
ND
3.3V
/PC
LAC
K
OU
TD
4
D-G
ND
/FC
TS
/RE
AD
Y
/PR
LIN
ED
-GN
D
D-G
ND
3.3V
/FA
XC
S
/PC
LCS
OU
TD
11
OU
TD
3
D-G
ND
FT
XD
D-G
ND
49 55 60585350 595751 54 56524039 41 474443 4537 38 42 484625 33 34 35 3630 31 322927 282621 24232219 2017 181613 14 1510 11 1296 7 852 3 41
5756 58 6054 55 5950 51 52 534937 45 46 47 4842 43 444139 403825 3635343332313029282726242322212019181716151413121110
987654321
AC
TU
AL
WIR
ING
DIA
GR
AM
5/5
AR-F151
12 – 25
(Danish) ADVARSEL !Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteriaf samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English) Caution !Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent typerecommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.
(Finnish) VAROITUSParisto voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaantyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French) ATTENTIONIl y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie dumême type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par
le constructeur.Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish) VARNINGExplosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalenttyp som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantensinstruktion.
(German) AchtungExplosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ odervom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
AR-F151
COPYRIGHT © 1999 BY SHARP CORPORATIONAll rights reserved.Printed in Japan.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without prior written permission of the publisher.
SHARP CORPORATIONDigital Document Systems GroupQuality & Reliability Control CenterYamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
1999 August Printed in Japan N
AR-F151
Top Related